








.»*«*•* sse t ^aeB *:yg w g : «r=g^4. i®‘s&:.r^§«lfcUi' ,,,a ? il»"? ??« "iH*-..*^l?lHri 

«.•*' ? an] :-;:::v- r::: -;-. -:t • : t." rrrr. 52i« : •?* * * cm T-rrrr-t:;'* *«•« ~:r 

......... tr '‘;*jx*;*‘ja*Cl;!'SaJCS' •JJ' *t ■■ iHHfcf' *?s** •* - — •« - . 1 * ~. *•- ..— •• — i ■• . if-. ....... .. . *m*'’*'* -■••• -*• 

rHfrr:?*: tferyartHjr.-pc^tmfaacHfcT i m m tjtirixtov 1» ::t? rirr^. ■ r.t'r •;' -r :: :*c=r nur -.'iH; sjV /If- :L- « s*»‘ i*J5 • JOv? He '*i> ; nitrHntuii}i;Hi 






I ‘»»fcfitH5S«Hcic*5c£ijccisr. I 


HnrKisx jetjCEn 


»V3Sir43u .;iv.«ixt *. 


• -r:t }: l ~ : frv-r : f tn nHMii aifH *'- s : 

ret *a ;ct: ha :f. r 1 fer-j : .:: 


T.‘i:ra lii: s' i: 





HiiaiiiHiHSarari -«irMrshrn€t«niiia 

■*rrT7»?*-T.-? -:.-T~r~*r- T •*:• - -.-.tt :vr : ;^7 *r;i nr?-r:* n ivtrtrszss^ZSZCjjTV “ 
ssaesrsi-;*;;: 




~t 1 r «»H?t jBSjSHswtS : : . ';r.£ i.i::: i; --c |3g • ri ; ' f Hrrrjnr : s i • « : jt -t :r wt - g e rritii? 
17 m. n n;: :tis :c: : -3 it. C r.c u v r.txIHjr.:!! : • “MrriaH •*:;.? -rrs^^rcs-5 J-? 

:^.‘t:g , t5s.—rr:?g?i-frtsn- # rT;j ftprtiwsm t : ta »Hawn«ar..“ietn . , sa: ^g g |^ : r 3M 



• ■-*. - I'Z'.l '. 

■ VW«M rfifcin.4 5* MHHS««HS IHH f EfiSra f 0|!9££Be?3§ 


’mr ftT Tlrntity^ t*iy*fv»*rrr -ry^-MvH ftjrrr* rr.ttt" >hm ir.rii* t:»nn;v 



tHxatcoPt OOWi4a.ta :bc«.*’HJ|: p* ••- ■ r srm i:Ul;t X 1 g.X U * '4lt: mttu ’.xa Wn:::' •<-' : :?! 1 ‘ .? \arr. r.jfnct ft iftWtft 

?7Cv;vf*JCE-. vvtn.,?nrt 2 tiSg?:-f?»:s:?t tit.r :s?t HtshjtrustrtHjrjtr-vs.-.. t. 1 . .t z:if£Ct 2r.r } :: r.'-Z-z^r.-. “-r.::: .:ntr;r:*;i;;vtrrt,-T>tnn:r.?MTpt U ir* •sr:j:.-rrr trt ::?r-j?Tt*. 

t ? I htH: •. : t ? r^n.twmo« :mn « :n5utkrnrt -. ?•■ ■■•.3atx ^acc: 3.- .x i: a? cr . t trt: • rj -.".n:i: :.- t. •.anats:? xr : 5 t HHSr: “i:t 




fif. r.T- ttiXAfjHKfx :' > ; *i tr.;::: 



COCft C Ct^t: 'ttnrr^Trr.grsitrr^c 








Class 

Book 


PZ3 


Copyright N° 


■ ' c i. 33 

(XT' 


COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 











/ 
































/ 


/ 






. 





+ 

































































































































THE SWORN 
BROTHERS 


THE BORZ OI-G YLDENDAL BOOKS 


T HE firm of Gyldendal [Gyldendalske 
Boghandel Nordisk Forlag] is the old- 
est and greatest publishing house in 
S£&ndinavia, and has been responsible, since its 
inception in 1770, for giving to the world some 
of the greatest Danish and Norwegian writers 
of three centuries. Among them are such 
names as Ibsen, Bj^rnstjeme Bj^rnson, Pon- 
toppidan, Brandes, Giellerup, Hans Christian 
Andersen, and Knut Hamsun, the Nobel Prize 
winner for 1920, whose works I am publishing 
in America. 

It is therefore with particular satisfaction 
that I announce the completion of arrange- 
ments whereby I shall bring out in this country 
certain of the publications of this famous 
house. The books listed below are the first of 
the Borzoi-Gyldendal books. 



A novel translated from the Norwe- 
gian of Sigrid Undset by W. Emme. 


Grim: the Story of a Pike 


Translated from the Danish of Svend 
Fleuron by Jessie Muir and W. 
Emme. 

Illustrated in black and white by 
Dorothy P. Lathrop. 


The Sworn Brothers 


ALFRED A. KNOPF, Publisher, NEW YORK 


The 

Sworn Brothers 

A TALE OF THE EARLY DAYS OF ICELAND 

TRANSLATED FROM THE DANISH OF 

GUNNAR GUNN ARS SON 

By C. FIELD AND W. EM ME 



NEW YORK 

ALFRED • A • KNOPF 

1921 




COPYRIGHT, 1918, BY 
GUNNAR GUNNARSSON 


COPYRIGHT, 1921, BY 
ALFRED A. KNOPF, Inc. v 




2) GL A 6 2 7 6 0 8 



PRINTED IN TIIE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 

RUG -8 '21 

* •- * ' ’ b* 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

Book I . 1 

Book II 109 

Book III 221 








# 


■ 









( 

























BOOK I 








» 


















I 


I N the red light of the fire in the midst of the hall, the 
age-browned pillars of the high-seat stood forth 
strongly lit in the middle of the main wall, against the 
background of smoky darkness which spread behind. 
The bright glow threw into relief the carved images of 
the gods, weird and grotesque shapes which kept chang- 
ing as the fire blazed up or sank in its embers. 

Upon the broad seat between the pillars of the high- 
seat, with the dragon-ornaments and gaping beast-heads 
of its back towering above and behind, sat Orn, a broad, 
grey-haired warrior, leaning forward over the table, his 
strong, coarse fingers buried in his thick, white beard. 
Upon the table at his side stood a great carved drinking 
horn. Orn sat in silence. It was seldom that he drank 
much in the evening. 

One step below, and opposite him, on the other side of 
the fire, was the table round which his men-servants sat. 
Only now and then a low-voiced exchange of words be- 
tween man and man broke the silence of the hall. Other- 
wise there reigned an oppressive stillness. Often they 
glanced towards him, but each time looked uneasily at 
one another afterwards. For he sat very still, with a 

3 


4 the sworn brothers 

fixed, absent look in his eyes. A shiver passed through 
them as they thought that perhaps he saw something 
which they could not see. It was not comfortable in the 
hall that evening. All the more swift was the circula- 
tion of the beer-mugs. But they were not set down on 
the tables with a bang, as was the rule when they were 
empty, but cautiously placed on one side. 

On a dais at the end of the hall, farthest removed 
from the entrance door, sat women at work, spinning 
and carding wool in silence. For once silence prevailed 
on the women’s dais. Only a faint rustle was heard 
now and then when one of them rose to help another or 
to fetch more wool. 

The only one who did not feel depressed by the silence 
in the hall was a fourteen-year-old boy, seated at the 
table right opposite the high-seat on the other side of 
the fire. He was content to make holiday by sitting 
quietly with his thoughts, and felt easy and unoccupied 
in mind. He sat quite still, letting his gaze linger alter- 
nately on his father and the pillars of the seat. He had 
little resemblance to the stalwart figures round him. 
His skin was as clear as a young girl’s, and his long, 
bright yellow hair fell in heavy locks over his neck. On 
his face, with its regular features, there lay an expres- 
sion of peculiar calm. The mouth under his straight 
nose appeared firm and composed. The look of his blue 
eyes was tranquil and fixed. 

It was Ingolf, Om’s son. He often sat thus, espe- 
cially of an evening. His attention was particularly 
taken up by the pillars of the high-seat. They seemed 
so strangely alive in the red light of the evening fire. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 5 

By day they were quite dead. It seemed as if the 
breath of the gods had crept into the hard, dry wood. 
Perhaps the gods slept by day, or had they possibly 
flown on adventures to other countries and lands P The 
gods had tiresome habits, for all that they were gods; 
one never knew exactly where to find them. Anyhow, 
the pillars stood by day as though they were empty. 

But in the evening they came to life again. Either 
the gods returned, or breath issued at any rate from the 
inner part of the wood and seemed to wander over the 
surface. 

Already in the gloaming, when shadows were gather- 
ing in the deep carving, they began to live. 

But it was a strange, deceitful, and threatening life, 
as though the gods were ill-humoured on first awaken- 
ing, as men are sometimes in the early morning hours. 
Ingolf did not like to stay alone in the hall in the eve- 
ning before the fire was lit. He had a certain conscious- 
ness of the gods’ discontent in the twilight, and felt by 
no means sure that they might not cherish some evil pur- 
pose. And when the gods were wroth or morose it was 
best to keep at a respectful distance. But as soon as 
the fire was kindled on the hearthstones, it became bright 
and comfortable in the hall. The fire sputtered with a 
cheerful crackling which seemed as though it were chat- 
ting pleasantly with the gods ; it blazed up and cast its 
bright light over them, and diffused a kindly penetrating 
warmth. Then the gods recovered their good-humour; 
they smiled openly, and their eyes grew somewhat more 
friendly. 

Then one ventured to look at them calmly and to sit 


6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

near them. Ingolf liked to sit quietly and look at the 
images carved on the pillars. Certainly those in the 
temple were far more splendid, decked as they were with 
costly clothes and heavy rings of gold and other valu- 
able metals. But the gods in the temple were those to 
whom they prayed at solemn festivals and offered sacri- 
fices. It required enormous daring to approach them, 
for one hardly ever saw them, and knew them but little. 
Although they were the same gods, they seemed 
strangely distant in the sanctity of the temple. The 
gods on the pillars of the high-seat, on the other hand, 
were house-gods. He had grown up in their company, 
he had seen them in daily intercourse, as far back as he 
could remember. He had long been confidential with 
them; they were his and the family’s friends. They 
were quiet and peaceful and made no demands. Maybe 
they had fits of ill- temper in the evenings. But for the 
most part they were almost like men, saving, of course, 
that as gods they were naturally higher than men. 

But one ventured — it was indeed a duty — to count 
them as friends, as belonging in some degree to the 
family. One could safely rely upon them, and that 
led to everyday familiar intercourse with them. 

They constituted, besides, so to speak, the axis of the 
home. They were the immovable real centre round 
which all things revolved. They were the persisting 
element. They were the visible sign of the family and 
of the family’s continuance. 

They had become dark brown in the course of time, 
nay, almost black, and hard as stones from age. Ingolf 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 7 
knew well how they felt. He had once, after a long in- 
ward struggle, ventured to touch them. 

And it was not strange that old age could be both 
felt and seen in them. For no one knew how old they 
were, or whether indeed they had any age at all. 
Whether they were of the race of gods or men was there- 
fore doubtful. From time immemorial they had be- 
longed to the family. They had passed by inheritance 
from father to eldest son since as far back as there was 
any tradition, probably from the earliest dawn of time. 
The pillar on the right of the throne represented Odin, 
the All-Father, the old, one-eyed, and wise. His ravens, 
Hugin and Mugin, sat on his shoulders and whispered 
wisdom and knowledge to him. The ravens told him 
everything, past and future. So wise was Odin that 
nothing found him unprepared. 

Odin was the Head of the Gods, consequently the most 
important to have as a friend. The place on the right 
side of the high-seat belonged justly to him. The pillar 
on the left side represented Thor, the Wielder of the 
Hammer, the slayer of giants, the one whose goats amid 
thunder-claps kicked fire from heaven when he drove 
to battle with the giants. Proudly stood Age-Thor, 
with his legs planted wide apart, his arm lifted up to 
smite, and in the bent fingers of his mighty hand he 
gripped the hammer, M joiner. 

And there in the chief seat, on whose brown, worn 
plank only the cushions and the sitters changed, sat his 
father. Ay, there he sat, cheerful and comfortable be- 
tween his gods. 


8 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Every evening he sat there, when he was not out 
journeying or visiting, with his men sitting at tables 
round him, a step lower down. He sat calmly, strok- 
ing with weather-tanned fingers his thick, white beard, 
talked wisely, or was silent. There he sat at the feast 
with the chief guest by his side. And when it chanced 
that he raised his voice, his ringing tones filled the hall, 
and an attentive silence prevailed as far as the outer- 
most seats. Though his father, Om, did not often talk 
in a loud voice, yet when he did, what he said was 
weighty. He seemed then to Ingolf to have a certain 
resemblance to Thor, especially when he raised his 
powerful clenched fists over his shaggy head. Other- 
wise, when he sat silent and meditated, he reminded him 
most of Odin, except that he had two eyes. 

In the chief seat his father was at home. There he 
sat, friendly and comfortable in the place of his ances- 
tors. There had sat his grandfather, Bjornulf, who 
together with his brother, Roald, had been obliged to 
quit the old family estate in Telemarken on account of 
having slain a man. And there had sat also before him, 
his father, Romund Greippson. All high-spirited, 
strong men, whose names were remembered with rever- 
ence. 

And some day he himself would sit there. And after 
him again his son, and his son’s son. Generation 
after generation, family after family, till the earth 
vanished. 

Whenever he thought of the time when his father 
would be no more, and he himself should assume the 
place between the throne-pillars, his cheeks flamed, and 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 9 

a strange, anxious shudder robbed him of strength and 
will-power. 

It was this knowledge that he would have to assume 
a responsibility, and one which he had long ago sworn 
to sustain with honour, and which he waited to assume 
with a mixture of joy and suspense, that had impressed 
on his countenance a composure and on his whole nature 
and bearing an air of assurance far beyond his years. 
Even before his bones had fairly hardened, he had had 
impressed on him by his mother, whom he now only 
indistinctly remembered, who he was and what he should 
become. With his mother’s milk he had imbibed the 
unbroken traditions of the family. Before he under- 
stood what was really involved, he had learnt to under- 
stand that his life was only partly his own. Already, 
for a long time past, it had become clear to him, that 
not only his own, but the honour of the dead and the 
unborn was committed to his hand. For a man without 
honour cast shadows on two sides. Both his ancestors 
and his descendants had a peremptory claim on him — 
the claim of honour. 

And he had no intention of disappointing either him- 
self, the dead, or the unborn. Just then it was very 
quiet in the hall. The confidential crackling of the fire 
was the only sound audible. 

Then suddenly came the sound of tramping steps 
without. Orn raised his head and was again wide 
awake. All sat still and listened. There was a knock 
at the door. Orn made a sign to the porter, who 
pushed back the bolt, and in came Rodmar, Orn’s kins- 
man, followed by his son, Leif, and some servants. 


10 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

The peace and quiet of the hall was suddenly inter- 
rupted. Orn rose with a dignified air. Stately of 
mien, he left the high-seat and went to meet his relative. 
His ceremonious “ Welcome, cousin,” sounded cheerful 
and hearty. Ingolf sprang up and ran round behind 
the seats to meet Leif. He greeted his relative, who 
was his junior by two years, with a kiss and very sincere 
friendliness. 

Orn laid both his hands heavily on Rodmar’s shoul- 
ders. “ I was sure you would come, cousin.” 

“ Such important news should be looked into,” an- 
swered Rodmar seriously. “ We have had prosperous 
though chequered years. What will happen now? ” 

“ The good times are passed,” answered Orn gloomily. 
“ I guess what will happen. Follow me to the high- 
seat, cousin.” 

Orn seated Rodmar at his side, and called for fresh 
beer. They drank to each other with deep draughts. 
When Rodmar had sucked his beard dry, he turned to 
his kinsman, who was a little older than himself, and 
asked : “ Do you think there will be trouble in the 

country? ” 

“ Trouble there will be,” answered Orn, speaking 
slowly and solemnly. “ After peace and prosperous 
years follow hard times. We have had the good times ; 
now we shall have to face the bad. Only it may be 
that the struggle will not reach these parts. We are 
getting old, Rodmar. Our swords are rusty, our arms 
stiff. And our sons are at the worst age possible — 
old enough to entangle themselves in difficulties, not 
old enough to manage them.” 


1 1 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 

“ 1 see that you cherish fears for the future, cousin. 
What do you advise? ” 

“ I advise that you stay here with Leif and as many 
of your servants as can be safely spared from home. 
We should be prepared for everything. In times like 
these most unexpected things can happen.” 

“ I will follow your advice, as I always did. Do 
you think of seeking light on the future from the 
gods? ” 

“ One should not trouble the gods before necessity 
demands it. But we should offer them sacrifices dili- 
gently and without stint.” 

It was only a week since Rodmar and Leif had driven 
home from the winter festival at Orn’s. But for Ingolf 
and Leif it had been a long week. They had found it 
difficult to be apart. They had had a cushion drawn up 
to the fire and lay there on their stomachs right oppo- 
site each other, each with a host of things to ask about 
and report. 

Leif was a tall, loose-knit fellow with a long, bony 
face, browned with freckles and discoloured by wind and 
weather. He had a large nose, and a broad mouth with 
thick lips. The expression of his sparkling grey eyes 
changed suddenly, and constantly shifted from close 
attention to distant dreaminess, from icy coldness to 
beaming warmth. Red curly hair hung in long locks 
down both sides of his smiling face. 

When the most important news had been told, he 
could keep quiet no longer. With a teasing look in 
his eyes, he stretched his head forward and asked in a 


12 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
whisper: <£ Say, Ingolf — did your gods dine on the 
Yule meat? ” 

Ingolf gave a start of annoyance. His smile disap- 
peared, and over his face spread an expression of vexed 
seriousness. He looked anxiously round, but discovered 
to his relief that no one was listening. 

He made no answer, but looked angrily and warningly 
at Leif. Leif laughed softly and in a contented fashion. 
Then he made a funnel of his hands and whispered 
again : “ They are fat, overfed animals, your gods ! ” 

He laughed deep down in his stomach, en j oying Ingolf’s 
wrath. 

“ And such gods ! A decrepit, one-eyed old creature, 
who has to get his wisdom from ravens ! And a stupid 
braggart who is so poor that he has to drive with goats 
because he has no horse.” 

Ingolf clenched his fists and pressed his chin down 
hard on his whitening knuckles. 

“ Hold your tongue, Leif ! ” he said threateningly, in 
reply. 

Leif laughed as before. Then he sprang up suddenly. 
By their side stood Helga, Ingolf’s sister, a slim young 
girl with long, light-yellow hair, shining blue eyes, a 
small bright face, and a happy smile on her childish 
mouth. Leif, whose gladness at meeting again this girl 
friend of his own age beamed from his face and was 
visibly impressed on his whole bearing, embraced her, 
and saluted her with a kiss. Then he suddenly let her 
go, grew red and embarrassed, and began in his confu- 
sion to kick the burning logs. 

Helga watched his action with quiet, smiling eyes. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 13 

“ You are scorching your boots, Leif,” she said, and 
laughed softly. 

He stood straight up, turned towards her, and looked 
at her. And the smile in her eyes put his embarrassment 
to flight. Immediately he was himself again. Beaming 
over his whole face, he seized her two hands and swung 
her arms apart. 

44 I should give you greetings from the cat and from 
old Jorun. I have nearly forgotten to do so. The cat 
caught a huge quantity of mice at Yuletide, and then 
became fat and lazy — just like old Jorun, but she can’t 
bear to be told so.” 

44 Surely you haven’t said so to her.” 

44 Yes. I couldn’t help seeing it. And when I saw it, 
I couldn’t help saying it.” 

44 You ought to be ashamed of yourself, Leif. Have 
you forgotten how kind old Jorun has been to you since 
you lost your mother, and how many stories she has 
told us? ” 

44 1 can make up better stories myself. Old wives’ 
tales are wearisomely long,” answered Leif in a quick 
tone, which concealed the slight wound in his conscience. 

44 Do you believe she makes them up ? ” asked Helga, 
with an air of curiosity. 

44 She talks about gods, trolls, and giants as though 
they really existed. The other tales are lies too, I sup- 
pose.” 

44 You are a stupid boy. How do you know that there 
are not trolls and giants? ” 

44 Well, you never see them, anyhow.” 

Helga was already thinking of something else. 


14 THE sworn brothers 

“ Are you not going back at once? ” she asked in an ex- 
pectant tone. 

“ I hope to stay here the rest of the winter and all 
summer too ! 99 

Suddenly bofh were silent, and found no more to say. 
For a while they stood and looked at each other and 
were very happy. All at once Helga became aware that 
Ingolf lay there, and had not once lifted up his head. 
She cast herself on her knees beside him and peered into 
his face. Ingolf avoided her glance, but she could see 
he was depressed. Suddenly she knelt up and looked 
penetratingly at Leif. The smiles and brightness had 
vanished from her face. “ Now, you have been vexing 
Ingolf again, Leif,” she said in a tone of deep reproach. 
Leif avoided her look, and took his place, a little em- 
barrassed, at the end of the cushion. He felt ashamed, 
but wished to laugh it off. When he did not succeed he 
bent his head, and whispered so low that only they two 
could hear : “ He ought not to get angry because I say 

what I think. You know quite well that I do not be- 
lieve in your gods.” 

“ But you ought not to laugh at them, when you know 
that you hurt Ingolf by doing so,” whispered Helga 
angrily in reply. 

Ingolf lifted his head and looked at them. He spoke 
calmly, and his voice was quiet and sad. 

“ It is not that alone,” he whispered. “ I do not 
mind so much that Leif mocks at the gods. But I 
grieve to think that the gods will some day take ven- 
geance on you, Leif, for your mockery.” 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 15 

“ When I do not believe in the gods, you cannot ex- 
pect me to be afraid of their vengeance,” answered Leif, 
with quiet defiance. 

He sat with downcast eyes, and a discontented and 
vexed look in his face. 

44 You can say what you like in return,” he continued. 
44 Why may I not say what I like? I cannot bear the 
gods. And I cannot endure that you should believe in 
them either. But since you make so much of them, I 
will say nothing.” 

44 Yes, you promise that now,” said Helga. 44 You 
will have forgotten it tomorrow.” 

44 Can I help being forgetful? Then I will promise 
again tomorrow.” 

For some minutes they sat silent and out of humour. 
Then Helga took Leif’s hand. 44 Don’t be cross, Leif. 
We have wished so much to see you again.” 

Leif raised his head suddenly. He raised himself on 
the cushion, made a place by his side, and looked up at 
Helga with a smile. All ill-humour had passed away 
from his face. 

Soon after, all three were lying together confidentially 
discussing their own affairs. The hall was full of the 
hum of many voices and a stronger odour of beer. The 
fire burned yellow and bright. And the images of the 
gods on the carved pillars looked down as if following 
all that passed with a slow content, and waiting, calmly 
wise, for what should come. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 


1 6 


II 

A couple of months after, the two boys were riding 
over the heath. It was towards evening. The day was 
calm with biting frost; grey storm-clouds lined the 
whole horizon. The blue patch of sky above the heath 
grew ever smaller; it seemed as though a storm was 
brewing. Banks of clouds were already threatening to 
swallow the pale moon. The sun seemed stranded on 
golden mountains of cloud in the west. The two cousins 
were returning from a visit to their friends and com- 
rades, Haasten, Haersten, and Holmsten, sons of Atle 
Jarl at Gaulum. Holmsten, the youngest of the 
brothers, was the same age as Ingolf ; the others were a 
little older. 

The two cousins had come to know Atle’s sons at the 
great sacrificial feast of the preceding year at Gaulum, 
and had become friends with them. On Leif’s side the 
friendship was not very warm. 

During the last year they had visited each other 
regularly. And since there was still no sign of disturb- 
ance in that part of the country, they had obtained 
leave to j ourney to Gaulum again this winter. But they 
had been obliged to promise to exercise caution, to fol- 
low the main roads, to return home quickly on the least 
sign of trouble, and, finally, to conduct themselves cir- 
cumspectly, and to remember whose offspring they were 
if anything happened. They had naturally promised 
all that had been demanded, Ingolf with the firm resolve 
to keep his word. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 17 

They had not had any occasion to break their prom- 
ises until today, when Leif had induced Ingolf to make 
a short cut across the heath. He had twitted him with 
want of courage till Ingolf, in a mixture of anger and 
love of adventure, consented. Leif, who was always the 
most eager for an expedition, was, on the other hand, 
most quickly and completely seized by homesickness. In 
the morning he had felt that he must see Helga before 
evening. 

And now they were riding here at a furious gallop. 
The long, wide, red cloaks, fastened by silver buckles on 
their breasts, fluttered behind them. So did as much of 
Leif’s red and Ingolf’s bright yellow locks as were not 
confined by their helmet-shaped caps. 

Leif rode at haphazard and carelessly, satisfied with 
things in general, without thought for anything but the 
exciting present. He rode with arms, legs, and his 
whole body. 

Ingolf, who sat as though of a piece with his horse, 
and moving neither arm nor foot, glanced at him side- 
ways, and a faint smile passed over his firm mouth. 

“ You ride like a fluttering chicken, Leif ! ” he 
shouted to him as they rode on. Leif looked quickly at 
him and was not at a loss for an answer. “ And you 
sit your horse like an old idol, cousin ! ” 

The horses’ frost-powdered heads stretched forward 
as they ran. Yellow flakes of foam flew now and then 
from their mouths; their warm breath rose like clouds 
of vapour from the quivering nostrils. The snow and 
the splinters of ice which they kicked up flew about the 
ears of the riders. Leif enjoyed travelling without re- 


1 8 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
straint, and his delight found vent now and then in a 
ringing shout. Ingolf, on the other hand, rode in a 
mood of deep displeasure; but it seemed as if he could 
not give vent to it at once, for he, also, had become 
partly intoxicated with the wild ride. The rapid beat 
of the rough-shod hoofs against the hard, frozen snow 
sounded pleasantly in their ears. And the strength of 
the mighty muscles which were supporting them thrilled 
the young riders with a glorious sensation of invinci- 
bility, capacity for anything, and divine exultation 
which made their hearts light and filled their heads with 
blissful excitement. 

The sun, preparing to glide down the golden slopes of 
cloud, cast long and fantastic shadows of the horses and 
riders over the glittering plain of snow. Leif suddenly 
became aware of the rushing shadows, and burst intoi 
laughter. He shouted to Ingolf, and pointed to the 
shadows, suddenly anxious to make Ingolf also amused 
at them. Ingolf must laugh also. But Leif’s mirth 
was too violent, too overpowering. He laughed out all 
the laughter that there was at once, and left nothing 
for Ingolf. Leif’s uncontrolled glee blocked up all the 
feeling of amusement in Ingolf, and directly evoked his 
dawning displeasure. He no longer gave himself up to 
the mere pleasure of riding. His fits of forgetfulness 
never lasted very long; thought and reason resumed 
their power over him. 

There rode Leif, and was happy! Did he not see 
that a storm was brewing? Did he not know that it was 
impossible for them to get home that night? Did he 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 19 
not reflect that if a regular snowstorm came on they 
might easily go astray on the heath? No, he saw noth- 
ing, knew nothing, thought nothing 1 He simply 
rode and was happy. And yet it was all his own 
fault. 

As they rode on side by side, a sullen, smouldering 
anger penetrated deeper and deeper into Ingolf’s mind. 
He had great mental stability, which is always some- 
thing to hold fast to. He tried to struggle against his 
feelings ; he would not ride here and become gradually 
furious with Leif. But the process in his mind had al- 
ready gone so far that he was powerless to control it. 
What happened afterwards was in spite of his will and 
better conscience. Leif’s ecstasy also blew up the 
smouldering embers of wrath in his mind like a pair of 
bellows. Leif’s joyful shout caused flames to flare up 
within him. Why should Leif just now become so sense- 
less, so idiotically happy? Why? Why? There were 
innumerable “ whys ? ” to answer when Leif was in ques- 
tion. Why should Leif be always occasioning difficul- 
ties and vexations for him? Why should he be allowed 
to transfer all responsibility from himself to him? 
What was the sense of his alone having to bear incon- 
veniences for them both just because Leif did not choose 
to be inconvenienced? His only fault, after all, had 
been that he had always been, and still was, too yielding 
towards Leif. 

Leif, who rode there so merrily, without thinking of 
his broken promise or the gathering storm — did he not 
remember the gash from Holmsten’s knife which he 


20 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

carried) in his coat as he rode? Did he not remember 
that it was solely due to Ingolf’s presence of mind and 
powerful grip that the knife had not been buried in him 
up to the handle? 

Ingolf was angry now. His perception was distorted 
by evil powers. He only saw Leif’s weaknesses and fail- 
ings, and they were many. Ingolf held a reckoning, 
and was angry. 

Such was Leif ! A child, a stupid boy ! A forgetful 
and ungrateful beast! Not once in friendly games with 
Atle’s sons had he behaved properly. Although Holm- 
sten was two years older than he, he could not endure to 
give place to him in any matter. Times without num- 
ber they had attacked each other like fiery wolf cubs. 
Times without number he and Haasten had reconciled 
them. Each time Leif had promised it should be the last 
time ; next time he would be careful not to let his temper 
run away with him. But Leif’s promises were like fly- 
ing snow in a storm. Such was Leif, the great humbug, 
unreliable and unintelligible. Why should he, because 
Holms ten at parting had given him the knife he had 
nearly killed him with — why should he for that reason 
unclasp his most valuable money-belt, and with his own 
hands clasp it round Holmsten? Weaker characters 
could do that! Next time they met they would, all the 
same, attack each other like fiery wolf-cubs. That 
would certainly end some day with serious enmity be- 
tween the two ; and that would mean a feud with Atle’s 
sons. It might well happen that Leif would yet en- 
tangle him in murder and bloodshed. Some day they 
would certainly have to quit Dalsfjord, as their grand- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 21 
fathers in their time had been obliged to quit Tele- 
marken. 

Thus Ingolf’s thoughts were forced to run on possible 
division of the family, murder, and exile. 

Why could not Leif be content with the difficulties he 
had stirred up for him at Gaulum? Why further entice 
him into breaking the promise he had given his father 
to follow the main roads and to be cautious? 

At first Ingolf had only been angry with himself for 
having let Leif seduce him. into disobedience and break- 
ing his word. But in his present condition he had no 
power to apportion his anger. He had to heap it all 
together with the blame on Leif. 

The riders had slackened their pace, and rode quietly 
side by side, close together. But they avoided looking 
at each other, and did not say a word. Leif perceived 
that Ingolf, for some reason or other, had become very 
angry. 

That did not surprise him. Ingolf, who was accus- 
tomed to preserve his calm on occasions when others be- 
came angry, was also wont to become angry at the 
strangest times. Leif searched his conscience. It was 
fairly uneasy, as usual, but nothing more. It was im- 
possible to see how he had deserved Ingolf’s wrath at 
that moment more than at others. He had not mocked 
at the gods, and he had till just now been so cheerful. 
He felt a little irritated, and was also curious to see 
what had happened in Ingolf’s mind, but he had resolved 
that it was not worth while to irritate him by speaking. 
He would see if he could not, by keeping silence, charm 
the anger out of him. Ingolf could not well remain 


22 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
angry indefinitely. Still, it was a nuisance; all the 
pleasure of the ride was gone. 

They rode on at a rapid trot, and Leif remained 
silent. But he was not accustomed to ride in that way. 
A great feeling of heaviness came over him, and 
quenched in its darkness all the lively sparks of his 
humour. But they would soon be home. He yawned 
till his jaws seemed to crack. Would there be a storm? 
He felt reckless. But wdiat an endless way back it 
seemed when they approached the forest which they 
must go round. What sense was there in the forest ly- 
ing there and barring their way to the valley? But for 
that, they might easily be home by bedtime. If the 
horses only had such long legs as their shadows on the 
snow possessed, they could stride over the forest. What 
wretched short-legged jades they were! 

Yes, everything had gone wrong that evening. Noth- 
ing was as it should be. There rode Ingolf with a bee 
in his bonnet. One dared not even speak to him. And 
why had they no food with them? He felt suddenly so 
ravenously hungry that he actually seemed to sniff the 
scent of roast meat. Meat and bread and beer — hm 
hm! And now that he had once begun to think of food, 
he continued to do so. He could at last almost taste it 
upon his tongue. Could they not ride through the 
wood? 

He suddenly forgot all caution and addressed Ingolf 
in the simplicity of his heart. “ I know a path through 
the forest.” 

It sounded quite naturally, as though he had suddenly 
thought of it. But for those who knew Leif, his voice 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 23 
was too sincere to be able to conceal a lie. Ingolf saw 
through him at once. So Leif was not yet content with 
the harm done ! He looked angrily and scornfully at 
him. 44 Do you?” he answered, with an excessively 
quiet and indifferent air. 44 Then you’d better make a 
short cut through.” 

Leif looked uncertainly at him. He knew no path 
through the wood ; on the contrary, he had lost his way 
in it one summer’s day, and only with great difficulty 
got out of it again. It had just occurred to him that 
if he induced Ingolf to try the wood, they would be able 
to manage it. 

It was only a matter of keeping the right direction, 
and that can always be done when there are two going 
together. The wood could certainly not be impassible. 
And to try it would at least be a change. To stay here 
would be tedious in the long run. 

44 Shall we see if we can find it? ” he braced himself up 
to ask in a conciliatory and almost submissive tone. He 
dared not express his request more plainly; he was 
afraid that Ingolf had already seen too much. 

44 I’ll share in no more foolishness today,” said Ingolf 
coldly and decidedly. 

Leif started as though struck by the lash of a whip. 
Ingolf’s tone kindled a flame in him like fire in dry straw. 
The consciousness of having lied, and the fear of its 
being perceived, made him sensitive and irritable be- 
yond measure. He was seized with rage, and felt a 
shiver run through his whole body. Senseless evil words 
and terrible execrations rose in his mind, but in such 
rapid succession that his tongue could not utter them. 


24 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
With a jerk he turned his horse and rode toward the 
wood. He wanted to get away from Ingolf : he would 
show him — 

Ingolf looked after him. And as he sat there and 
saw him ride away, his arms and legs waving all ways at 
once, a revulsion took place in his mind. His wrath 
had come to a head, and now began to subside. “ There 
was no sense in that,” he thought, and could not re- 
cover himself after Leif’s disappearance. “ I did not 
think to drive him so far. But surely he will have the 
sense to turn back ! ” 

No, Leif did not turn back. And Ingolf, who had let 
slip the opportunity of calling him to return, could not 
yet bring himself to ride after him. 

“ Now we shall be separated for life,” he thought 
again. “ That is too ridiculous. That must not hap- 
pen.” He would not be separated from Leif like that. 
But the consciousness of his own right and Leif’s ob- 
vious wrong had still too strong a hold on him. It 
seemed to him impossible to turn his horse round. Yet 
once more he repeated to himself : 66 It must not hap- 

pen.” But all the same he rode on. He let it happen. 


Ill 

Ingolf rode on. The sun went down. A wind blew 
from the north, bringing thick clouds of ice-cold snow 
as fine as sand. He could not see the wood any more. 
And Leif had long disappeared in the sea of snow. 

Night began to come on. A faint glow high above 
him on the left betrayed the whereabouts of the full 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 25 
moon. With the help of that and the wind he tried to 
guide himself. He was so alone, so completely for- 
saken, as he had hitherto never guessed that anyone 
could be. And he felt his loneliness and desolation as 
accusation and guilt. He had, as it were, grown 
smaller since Leif had left him. 

The uneasiness of dissatisfaction gnawed his mind like 
hunger. He was displeased with himself and also with 
Leif, but more with himself. He was, after all, the 
elder, and was responsible for them both. Also he felt 
seriously anxious for Leif. Leif did not know any path 
through the wood. He had once ventured into it, and 
lost himself. And if he lost himself in the wood in this 
cold he would be frozen to death, unless, indeed, the 
wolves attacked him. 

Ingolf was in despair. He asked himself whether it 
were yet any use to ride after Leif? But now it was 
too late. He felt a lump rise in his throat. Remorse 
came over him like an avalanche. He had to defend 
himself in order not to be utterly overwhelmed. As far 
as Leif was concerned, it was his own fault. It was he 
who actually would ride over the heath. It was he who, 
in spite of reason, made for the wood. If he were 
frozen to death, or eaten by wolves, he only had himself 
to thank. But Ingolf soon discovered that these 
thoughts did not yield him any comfort. In the first 
place, he was not sure that the fault was really Leif’s. 
Lie ought not to have allowed himself to be persuaded 
to ride across the heath, and, by doing so, break his 
word. Neither ought he to have become angry with 
Leif because he had allowed himself to be persuaded. 


2 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Least of all should he have let Leif observe his anger. 
For that was what had driven him to the wood. He 
knew Leif, and how susceptible he was. Treated in the 
right way, he was not unreasonable. By means of 
good-humour and friendly talk one could turn Leif’s 
mind from or in any desired direction. But if he saw 
that any one was angry or embittered against him, im- 
mediately he became twice as angry himself. And all 
sound sense forsook him as soon as he became irritated. 

And another thing: even if the fault was Leif’s, that 
did not make the matter really better. There was, in 
fact, no satisfaction in being in the right as against 
Leif. Leif’s whole character was so made up of hasti- 
ness and want of sense that nothing was easier than 
to be in the right against him. But that was not 
the least relief to his mind. Leif was not one of those 
to be settled with in that way. Even if there was 
not the least doubt that one was in the right, there 
always remained something unsettled when Leif was 
in question. Ingolf rode on. He forgot to pay any 
attention to the direction of the wind or the light of 
the moon. An absorbing consciousness of having 
done wrong, and of remorse, which continually in- 
creased, gnawed his mind and destroyed his peace. 
He could not shake off the thought of Leif. How 
was he now? How would he fare? He tried to per- 
suade himself that Leif must really know a path through 
the wood, and might be home before him. Ah, how 
he wished that he might find Leif’s horse in the stable 
when he himself at last reached home! 

But he knew well that this was only something he 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 27 
wished to believe. Leif’s voice was so sincere that it 
betrayed him when he lied. Leif was a stupid boy. 
Ah, Leif ! Leif ! 

Ingolf struggled hard to keep his tears back. He 
had not the least idea what to do. What should he 
do? He was riding here, and had lost his best friend. 
And it was his own fault. Even if he found Leif at 
home they would not be friends any more. And Leif, 
like himself, as far back as he could remember, could 
not do without him. He did not understand it all. 
He did not comprehend how it could happen. Yes- 
terday, nay, only a little while since, they had been 
friends. Now he was riding alone in the night and 
the snowstorm, and Leif was lost in the wood. Leif 
had left him because he could not overcome himself 
sufficiently to keep with him longer — Leif, who this 
morning would have sacrificed everything for him, and 
given his life for him, yes, ten lives if he had possessed 
so many. He did not know any one else of whom 
he could safely say the same. Half his strength had 
lain in the consciousness that Leif was his friend for 
life and death; that he had, so to speak, two lives. 
He was himself also prepared to die for his friend. 
All the same, a sudden misunderstanding and a few 
words had parted them. For the first time Ingolf 
realized the dangerous power of anger and evil words. 
And he made a vow never again to be angry, and never 
again to speak evil words to a friend. It had a cer- 
tain soothing effect upon him, thus to take himself to 
task, to acknowledge his failing, and resolve to over- 
come it. 


28 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

But this was of no help with regard to Leif. There 
could not be the least doubt now that Leif was roam- 
ing about lost in the wood. It was hopeless to expect 
that he should have given up his purpose. It could 
never occur to him to be so reasonable as to follow 
the edge of the wood. For Leif knew nothing of fear 
or even caution, bold to the point of madness, daring 
to folly as he was. Yes, Leif was by no means merely 
a mocker of the gods or a practical joker. He was 
as fearless and brave as any one whom Ingolf knew. 
That was what forced one to love him, and feel that 
he was indispensable in spite of all his failings and the 
difficulties he caused. That was also the reason why 
Helga liked him so much, and became restless and lost 
her balance as soon as she did not see him, but imme- 
diately became quiet and peaceful when she knew he was 
near. How should Ingolf look his sister, Helga, in 
the eyes when he came home without Leif? 

Ingolf rode on. He no longer knew where he was 
going, and felt indifferent. Without Leif he could, at 
any rate, not go home. He could not get Leif out of 
his mind. 

Leif was in every way difficult and unaccountable. 
There was no use denying it. As far back as Ingolf 
could remember at all, he had had incredible difficulties 
with Leif. All the troubles he remembered to have had, 
had been caused by him. Numberless times, Helga had 
been obliged to appease greater or smaller quarrels 
between them. For Leif was really impossible as a 
comrade. One never knew what to expect of him, or 
what he might devise. There was no feeling secure 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 29 
in Leif’s society ; he always brought, as it were, changes 
and adventures with him. But such as he was, one 
could not do without him. In spite of his difficult 
character he was such that one missed him as soon as 
he was out of sight. 

Ingolf noticed that his horse suddenly changed the 
direction in which he was going. He did not take 
the trouble to check him. It was all the same to him 
where he went, now that he no longer had Leif. 

He had wound his cape twice round him, yet the cold 
penetrated it. He felt frozen and shivered, but did not 
mind. It even had a certain soothing effect on him to 
be so cold that his teeth chattered. Immediately after- 
wards he had forgotten himself, and began thinking 
again of Leif. 

Hitherto he had always felt vexed that Leif was not 
like others. Now he realized suddenly that, in spite of 
all, he did not want to have Leif otherwise. Such as 
he was, he was just Leif, and his friend. On his side 
the friendship was certainly not past. If he met Leif 
again, they would become friends afresh. He knew that 
Leif was always ready for reconciliation so soon as he 
had worked off his rage. 

No, Leif was not like others. There was no doubt 
that he was a good and skilful ski-runner. He was 
always inventing new tricks and difficult feats. Wher- 
ever he found a rock or a hill he must attempt it. 
Not even the steepest descents made him pause. The 
fact that he had one fall after another, each worse than 
the preceding one, had no effect upon him at all. Leif 
did not like learning by experience. And, strangely 


30 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
enough, he had never had any serious accident. When 
Ingolf had once reproached him for his mad foolhardi- 
ness, he had merely replied that he trusted his luck 
blindly for so long as Fate had allotted it to him, and 
not a step further! He was obviously not in the least 
interested as to where the limit was set. One might be 
vexed at it, but it was not of the slightest use. He had 
an incredible faculty for getting into desperate situa- 
tions, and after all saving his skin. 

The cause probably was that he was not merely a 
little unreasonable. In that case he would hardly have 
completed his twelve winters. He was, on the contrary, 
so boundlessly unreasonable that it seemed as though 
the reasonable penalties which always pursued Ingolf 
and all others never exactly knew where to find Leif, 
and therefore could not strike him. 

Ingolf could not explain it to himself in any other 
way. There was, for example, the adventure with the 
bear. It was a year ago now, but he was likely to 
remember it as long as he lived. They had heard from 
the people in the farm that there was a bear’s lair up 
on the heath, a place about which they only knew that 
it would be found in the neighbourhood of two hills 
which had been described to them. They were con- 
tinually thinking and talking about the bear’s lair, and 
could not get away from the subject. Both of them 
had a great desire to see the place. But Ingolf’s desire 
was of the quiet kind which is compatible with patience. 
In his opinion there was no need to go and scent out a 
bear’s lair when one was grown big and could receive 
him when he presented himself. Leif’s desire, on the 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 31 
other hand, was measureless and insatiable. “ If you 
don’t come, I will go alone,” he said. So Ingolf went 
with him. They set out from the place one morning 
in late summer; they trudged far, found no hill nor 
bear’s lair, but, on the other hand, came across a slope 
covered with bilberries, the like of which they had never 
seen. Immediately Ingolf was aware of a high-pitched 
voice within, which shouted, 46 Bilberries ! Bilberries ! ” 
And that Leif must have heard a similar voice was easy 
to see. Crouching to the earth they went and gathered 
bilberries with both hands, eating the little bitter leaves 
along with them without hesitation, when they found 
opposite them a bear who was also eating bilberries. 
For a moment Ingolf remained standing, staring at 
a bear with a blue snout ; then he came to his senses 
and fled for all he was worth. Not till he had run a 
long way did it occur to him that Leif was not with 
him, and that he was not pursued. He stood still and 
looked round, prepared to see the bear coming after him 
with Leif in his stomach and hungering for more pro- 
vender of a similar kind. What he did see was almost 
more terrible. There on the bilberry-slope stood Leif 
and the bear confronting each other. Ingolf stood 
thunderstruck. Why did not the bear eat Leif? He 
did not understand it, did not see that there could be 
anything else to wait for. As though rooted to the 
spot, he remained standing and staring, and could not 
stir. It seemed to him as if several days had passed 
when at last something happened — the bear sneaked 
off. He could not trust his own eyes ! Yes, the bear 
trudged away from the bilberry-slope and left Leif alone 


3 2 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
with the berries. And Leif quite quietly resumed his 
gathering of bilberries. Ingolf did not understand it. 
He found the occurrence so unintelligible that he be- 
lieved the whole must be a dream. He was soon made 
aware of his mistake. In dreams one is accustomed to 
glide comfortably through the air, but he had just to 
climb back on his weary legs to Leif. When Ingolf got 
near him, he stood and looked at him, and was aston- 
ished to see nothing remarkable about him. And so he 
remained standing for a time. There was something 
which needed explaining before he could go on with the 
bilberry-picking. At last he asked : “ Why didn’t 

you run? ” 

“ Do you think one can run from a bear? ” Leif 
answered quite quietly and as a matter of course. 
“What would be the use of that? No, I made him 
think that I was not afraid of him. And at last I really 
was not any more. So he got tired of standing and 
staring, and went his way.” Such was Leif, and such 
was his method with bears. Was it easy to understand 
him ? How could one get the mind with which to under- 
stand him? Ingolf answered himself with a meditative, 
negative shake of the head. And the adventure with 
the bear was by no means unique. He remembered an- 
other incident of the same summer. He lived through 
it again in his need to occupy himself with Leif, and yet 
at the same time forget that Leif at that very moment 
might be hunted by wolves. 

They had agreed together that it was time they 
learnt to swim. Naturally it was just when no one had 
time to teach them. But that kind of trifle had no de- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 33 
cisive weight for Leif when he had got a fixed idea in his 
head. One of Orn’s servants, so he informed Ingolf, 
who was a good swimmer, had shown him that he had 
only to move his arms and legs in such and such a way 
and keep afloat. Leif straightway laid himself across 
a piece of timber in the courtyard and showed Ingolf 
how to move his arms and legs. Thus ; and thus ! — 
that was all ! It did not seem very difficult to Ingolf. 
But suppose one sank in spite of all? But Leif was 
unwearied in his persuasions — oh, it was ever so easy. 
You simply scooped up the water with your arms and 
kicked with your legs — that was all. At last Leif 
made him lie on the piece of timber and taught him 
the strokes. So ! and so ! Kick out strongly ! 
Stretch your arms properly! Now, I bet we swim like 
a pair of seals as soon as we get in the water. Now 
let us go! 

They went down to the Fjord. On the way he made 
Leif promise that first they should not go farther than 
where they could touch the bottom. Otherwise he said 
he would not go. Leif promised, and swore in addition. 
As soon as they got near the shore, Leif had his clothes 
off* and stood naked and careless and stretched himself 
in the sun. Ingolf stood and looked at the water, and 
was a good while unclasping his belt. Leif jumped 
about and hurried him on, but at last would not wait 
any more. As a matter of course, he had either for- 
gotten his promise or did not choose to keep it. In- 
stead of wading out where he could reach the bottom he 
ran out on a rock, flung his arms over his head, launched 
away, and was off. 


34 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Ingolf, still with most of his clothes on, ran out on 
the rock with his heart in his mouth. Down there lay 
Leif ; the water had swallowed him. He lay and worked 
his arms and legs. Now he approached the surface; 
now his head bobbed up. But only for a moment. 
His arms and legs moved very much as when he rode. 
But either he could not manage the swimming-strokes or 
they were no use. In any case, the water would not 
support him. He went to the bottom again. 

Never had Ingolf been so frightened as when he stood 
there and saw Leif in the water — never so helplessly 
anxious and despairing. He stood, and could neither 
move hand nor foot. He felt paralysing terror like 
a dead weight in his whole body. Then he suddenly 
began to shiver. At the same moment all power of cool 
reflection deserted him and he forgot that he was no 
better a swimmer than Leif. He must get out and help 
him. And he was on the point of plunging from the 
rock with his clothes on when he saw Leif come crawling 
up through the water. 

Leif crawled up and got his head above the surface. 
He spat and snorted and made grimaces. It did Ingolf 
good to see him. And he did not go to the bottom 
again. Leif, the incredible, swam ! Not with arms and 
legs working on both sides as he had practised the 
motions. No, he simply crawled through the water with 
a long stroke and did not sink. It looked so ridiculous 
that Ingolf had to laugh aloud. No, Leif of course 
could not be so easily drowned as others die naturally. 
Now he felt the ground under his feet. He stood still, 
coughed, and spat up water and shook himself so that 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 35 
the red locks flew about his head. He laughed suddenly 
when he set eyes on Ingolf. “ What, not yet out of 
your clothes? ” Quite calmly he waded to shore. And 
when he stood opposite Ingolf, he said simply and un- 
affectedly, although he shivered over his whole body: 
66 1 was nearly drowned that time! Who could guess 
that it was so difficult? If I hadn’t just happened to 
think, while I was down there, how dogs swim, I should 
be lying there still ! ” 

When at last he had finished spitting and shaking the 
water out of his ears, he took the same header again as 
a matter of course. 

Such was Leif. He could not break his neck, he could 
not drown, and bears sneaked off when they met him. 
Could he, then, be lost in a wood and frozen to death? 
Or would he extricate himself again as he alone could? 
Ingolf thought it not quite impossible, and that was his 
only hope and comfort. 

It would be just like Leif to crash his way through 
a wood in which anyone else would be lost, and to be 
first home. If only he were already there, in bed and 
asleep ! 

Ingolf was aroused from his reveries by his horse 
suddenly coming to a dead stop. He looked round him, 
and was not long in discovering that he had reached 
home. The horse had stopped exactly opposite the door 
of the stable. Stiff in all his limbs from the cold, he 
crawled down and opened the door. His only thought 
was whether Leif’s horse might already be inside. He 
went from horse to horse, felt them, and noted their 
distinguishing marks. He knocked against his own 


36 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
horse, which had followed after him into the warmth 
with its saddle and bridle on. He freed it from the 
bridle, but forgot the saddle, and went on. No, Leif’s 
horse was not in the stable. 

That was only what he had expected. Nevertheless, 
he felt suddenly paralysed with disappointment. Leif, 
then, had not reached home. Leif was still somewhere 
without. At that very moment he was roaming about 
lost either on the heath or in the wood. Leif’s horse 
was not one of those which could find its way home by 
itself. 

Ah, Leif ! Leif ! He hoped that it was not already 
all over with him. Ingolf seemed to see him in front 
of him lying on his back in a snowdrift with arms and 
legs stretched out. The snow was drifting over him and 
already nearly covering him. By the side of him stood 
his horse, with its head hanging down. Ah, Leif ! 
Leif! 

Ingolf collected himself. He did not feel the cold 
any more, nor did he notice how hunger was gnawing 
him. He shut the stable and went to the courtyard. 
There was something feverish and yet resolute about 
all his proceedings. He entered the outhouse where the 
ski were kept, and found his own and Leif’s. He opened 
the house-door a little and whistled softly to his dog. 
The dog was wild with delight at seeing him again, 
jumped about him, and licked his cold hands with his 
warm tongue, while Ingolf, his fingers stiff with the 
frost, was buckling on his ski. He had no time to take 
notice of it. As soon as he had buckled his snow-shoes 
firmly on, he sped away from the house, the same way 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 37 
he had come. Now he again paid attention to the 
direction of the wind and the light of the moon. 

Leif must be found — there was no question about 
that. He could not return home alive without him. 


IV 

Leif had gone riding on till he reached the wood, his 
mind full of wrath and defiance. There was not one 
reasonable thought in his brain ; he had only the instinct 
to ride on. The motion cooled his irritation. It did 
him good to be out in this wild, chaotic expanse. There 
was a sense of freedom in casting away the yoke of 
reason, a relief in knowing that one was committed to 
something which had two sides and might mean life or 
death. 

He would show Ingolf that though he himself did not 
know any path through the wood he was not afraid 
of riding there all the same. He would show him that 
if he wished to go the straight road home he would do 
so in spite of woods and other hindrances ! He would 
show him that there was a difference between a man and 
an old woman in breeches ! 

The snowstorm beat against him from the side, and 
he had to turn his head so as not to have it directly 
in his ear, yet all the same he had to ride with his eyes 
half shut. But he gave no heed to the weather. A 
man who was intent on performing an exploit could not 
worry about a trifle! Thus, filled with exulting pre- 
sumption, he aproached the border of the wood and rode 


38 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
in among the whistling, crackling trees. Here he had 
to slacken his pace, and, as he did, it struck him all at 
once that there was a fair chance of his losing himself 
in the wood and never getting out again. But nothing 
could stop Leif when he had got up the speed for a 
piece of folly. Besides, it was part of his reason for 
not giving up his project that he was convinced that 
the worst turn he could do Ingolf was to ride through 
the wood. If he won through it, Ingolf would be morti- 
fied; if he got lost, Ingolf would be grieved. And 
Ingolf, sulky beast, deserved no mercy. How 
thoroughly he would look down on him if he happened 
to get home first ! And if not, he knew well that Ingolf 
would not have a quiet hour till he saw him again. And 
serve him right. 

Here in the outskirts of the wood Leif made such 
good progress that he already felt sure of getting home 
first. At the same time, he found room in his heart 
and mind for a certain anxiety regarding Ingolf. He 
hoped he would not be lost upon the heath where he 
had nothing to guide him. 

Now that his fantastic assurance for himself had left 
room for anxiety for Ingolf, his wrath suddenly van- 
ished. Should he not ride after Ingolf, try to over- 
take him, and convince him how much better it was to 
ride through the wood? But then Ingolf would only 
believe that he had turned round because he did not 
dare to ride through the wood alone, which was just 
what he was going to show him he could do. 

His arms and legs came again into action. But the 
deeper Leif penetrated into the wood, the harder it 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 39 
became to make progress. The going was not so good 
here. The horse went on at an irregular pace. Leif 
had continually to turn because of low branches and 
fallen trunks. He had to go slowly and gradually, 
step by step. 

Besides, it was not very comfortable here in the dense 
parts of the wood. Leif did not venture to startle his 
horse by shouting, though he was not really afraid. 
But all the sounds which he could not account for made 
him silent and alert. On all sides there was an uninter- 
rupted whistling, creaking, and groaning. Snow fell 
from the branches with a thump. Hasty flappings of 
wings, which sent a chill through him, penetrated 
through all other sounds, producing a foreboding sense 
of vacuity and gloom. Besides, it was darker here than 
was pleasant. He could hardly discern the nearest tree- 
trunks. He wished he were out on the heath again and 
in Ingolf’s company. What had he wanted to go to 
the wood for? 

Leif was not long in losing himself so completely that 
he thought it just as well to give up altogether aiming 
at any particular direction, and go on at haphazard. 
He felt it really a relief to be free from the trouble. 
The chief thing now was to sit on his horse and keep 
warm, which was beginning to be a difficulty. 

But now Leif was in high spirits and proof against 
blows. He had prepared his mind for troubles and 
schooled himself to confront Fate. He had cast all 
responsibility from him far into space! Let any one 
who chose undertake it ! He was riding here — that 


40 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

was all. Could his horse get on? Let happen what 
would ! 

He did not doubt for a moment that the matter would 
finally turn out well for him. He would get clear. 
How, he did not guess, neither did he trouble himself 
about it. He had reasonably or unreasonably come to 
the conclusion that he might just as well stop interfer- 
ing. Yes, he would not venture to interfere. Suppose 
he turned off to the left now, and by doing so lost the 
right direction? No, he would not touch the bridle, but 
simply trust to luck. If he must pay the price for his 
rashness, he might just as well do it with the same coin. 
And if he got home in that way, the account would be 
settled. 

Thus he rode for a long time, but not so long as he 
thought. He was checked in his progress, and therefore 
the time seemed more than doubled. He thought he got 
on faster than he actually did. At last he sat half 
asleep upon his horse, which he kept going by half-me- 
chanical movements of his arms and legs. The horse 
went slower and slower. It had lost heart, and would 
rather have stood still, hung its head, turned its back 
to the storm, and let time and destiny roll over it. Leif 
did not agree with the horse in the matter. He himself 
sat there and let come what would. But something 
must be kept going, or there would be a complete full- 
stop. So the horse must continue. 

But that was so contrary to the horse’s will that Leif 
at last had to shake off his drowsiness in order to keep 
the animal going. And, in spite of all, it only went step 
by step. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 41 

Leif was working again with his whole body. Never- 
theless, he felt how the cold was tightening its clutch 
on his limbs and already threatening his stomach and 
chest. Leif was no fool. He clearly perceived that his 
life was in danger. In full consciousness he took up the 
struggle against weariness, which by its temptation to 
drowsiness sought to surprise him with sleep, that would 
be fatal in the frost. 

Leif rallied himself with a firm resolve. That was 
not at all to his mind. He did not in the least intend to 
give up. Twelve years could not satisfy a hunger for 
life like his. He had much to do in the world. He was, 
for one thing, a good way yet from becoming a Viking 
and marrying Helga. Would the forest never come to 
an end? 

At last it did. Leif went on riding and riding. And 
what did he see? Tracks of a horse which had been 
going through the snow. So he had then been riding in 
a circle. And where was he? That the wood only 
knew. 

But now he would follow the tracks in the direction he 
had come from to see if he could break the circle and, if 
possible, find his way out of the wood. 

Now it seemed to him the chief thing to find his way 
out, no matter where. That was for the present object 
enough. He resolutely avoided looking further in his 
thoughts. Unconsciously he armed himself against the 
tendency of thought to weaken the mind. He would not 
have his strength paralysed by too much reasoning. 
His business was simply to ride on and fight against the 
cold. 


42 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

He had lost the track again. The horse became more 
and more unwilling to proceed. It only went on because 
it must. 

Suddenly and unexpectedly he noticed that he was out 
of the wood. He saw no more tree-trunks. Here there 
were only whirling clouds of snow around him. His 
only resource was to go on. He kept riding to see 
whether he would not come across trees farther on. No, 
there were no more trees. And what was he to do now? 

On which side of the wood was he? He rallied his 
reasoning power and reflected. Yes, he must be on the 
same side by which he had entered. The wind was due 
north — the direction he came from — there then was 
the north. So he had been very sagacious as far as 
looking went. He should only have been sharp enough 
to see when the wood ended, then he would have had the 
edge of the wood to guide himself by. Should he turn 
round and try to find the wood again? No, no, he 
might get among the trees. And he had lost all desire to 
ride to the wood. The horse had availed itself of Leif’s 
reflections to come to a stop. Without Leif having 
noticed it, it had turned its back to the storm, and 
simply stood still with its head drooping. 

Leif sought to rouse it up and set it in motion again. 
Here there was no use in remaining at a standstill. But 
the , horse had formed its own opinion of the whole 
expedition. It stood immovable, and intended to re- 
main so. Leif expended much energy on its back, 
tugged at the reins, struck it with his whip-handle, since 
lashing seemed of no avail, but it was useless. The 
horse had had enough and more than enough. It stood, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 43 
and intended to remain standing for an indefinite time. 
Leif jumped down and looked with astonishment in its 
eyes. What was the matter with the beast? Had it 
suddenly got fancies in its head? He pulled at the 
bridle, tried to tug the horse to one side, and made his 
whip whistle over it. The horse sighed a little at such a 
cruel and senseless proceeding. But it had once for all 
made up its mind to stay where it was. At that moment 
there was nothing that would make it budge an inch 
from the spot. 

Leif looked helplessly around him. He could not 
understand the horse’s sudden predilection for precisely 
that spot of ground. Was there perhaps something to 
guide them? Completely exhausted it could not be, as 
there was still so much refractoriness in it. 

So he tried to treat it kindly. He talked gently to it, 
patted it, and scratched it behind the ears. He over- 
whelmed it with flattery, and sang to it in a high-pitched 
voice. Then he clambered with some trouble on its back 
again, and hoped that it had now changed its mind. 
But it had not done so by any means. Leif began to 
get angry, but he patted its neck and kept a friendly 
tone. Since this still proved useless he uttered a wild 
howl with all his might, and threw his arms, legs, and 
whole body into motion. At last he was nearly crying 
with vexation. Then he tried it again with friendliness 
and kind words, but it was all of no avail. 

So he gave it up. The horse evidently would not go 
farther. And since he could neither compel nor per- 
suade it, there was nothing to be done with the creature. 

He slipped from its back and tried to review the 


44 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
situation. On nearer inspection it seemed to be just as 
threatening and impenetrable as the snow-clouds round 
him. As he stood there the wind lashed his face and 
pierced icily cold through his clothes. He perceived 
clearly the danger of the situation. If the cold and his 
weariness made him yield a little, it was all over with 
him. 

It was no use to let the horse stand and go on with 
his own strength. The energies he had still in reserve 
were in no reasonable proportion to the storm and the 
length of the way. It was only a little strength and en- 
durance which he had remaining. But it was that little 
which was to rescue him. He kept his hands tightly 
clenched together as if it were a matter of extracting 
some device by purely physical pressure from his oozing 
energies. He intensified his thoughts till he seemed to 
hear them beating in his skull. But it was as though 
all possibilities had conspired against him and forsaken 
him. 

He stood and set his back against the wind, and 
sought to combat a creeping foreboding that there was 
no way of escape. He knew that once he gave up it 
was all over with him. So long as he could keep erect 
and resolute there was still hope. 

His thoughts forsook the beaten paths and travelled 
in the labyrinths of imagination, seeking a last possi- 
bility. A picture came up in his memory. He remem- 
bered a Yuletide sacrificial feast at home . . . the pene- 
trating odour of blood and entrails . . . the warm, 
gaping hollow of an ox’s body emptied of its viscera. 
Before he had yet time to connect thought with action, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 45 
his knife was out. He took the bridle off the horse, with 
feverish fingers sought a certain spot in its neck, waited 
a moment while he overcame his repugnance, and then 
made a thrust. With a groan the horse collapsed on its 
knees. Leif rolled it over on one side, and so it re- 
mained, lying with stiff, struggling legs, now and then 
shaken by a faint shudder. Leif made a cut in its neck, 
so that he could, when possible, extract the windpipe 
and gullet. A warm stream of blood spouted straight 
into his eyes and blinded him till he had again rubbed 
them clean. And now the intoxication of blood over- 
came him. He had the scent of it in his nostrils and the 
taste of it on his tongue. With a single long cut from 
the fore to the hinder-part he slit open its stomach. 
The warm, smoking entrails bulged out of the streaming 
gash. Leif snatched them out with his hands, but had 
to stop, because the heat nearly scalded him — shook 
his hands like a cat its paws — and set to wqrk again. 
In a very short time he had cleared the animal’s stomach 
of all the entrails, with a round cut of his knife he loos- 
ened the diaphragm, extracted the lungs with the grey 
windpipe adhering to them from the breast, and threw 
them away. Then at last, with trembling fingers, he 
sheathed his knife, heaved a long sigh, and crawled 
head-first into the horse’s empty stomach. He coiled 
himself together like an animal, audibly growling with 
the sense of comfort and the prospect of secure rest. 
But however he turned and twisted himself, he could not 
find room for his legs. So he crawled rather crossly out 
again, stripped off his cloak, wound it several times 
round his feet and legs above his knees, to preserve them 


4 6 the sworn brothers 

from being frostbitten, and crept in again. He en- 
joyed the delightful warmth inside. Now it would do 
him real good to have his rest out and sleep. With a 
light and untroubled heart he lay down comfortably. 
Sleep — sleep. When he awoke again, the snowstorm 
would doubtless be over. He chuckled inwardly ; he 
would simply stay here till it was quite finished! If it 
still lasted long he could easily live on frozen horse- 
flesh. He had still a conviction that he would not die 
that day. Nonsense! Here he lay, and liked it. The 
future seemed bright and cheerful to his inner eye. He 
wondered whether Ingolf would be home by now? In 
his fulness of satisfaction and quiet he allowed himself 
to hope so. A little after he was sleeping a sound, un- 
troubled sleep. 


y 

Ingolf bore towards the west. He had the wind on 
his right side, a little against him. He had to climb 
rising ground, although not very steep. He only made 
slow progress. But he felt his strength and how his 
body was, as it were, braced together in one strain. 
And it was as though this consciousness of his own 
strength continually produced new strength again. He 
was so absolutely determined to hold out till he found 
Leif or fell dead that there was not the slightest breach 
in his will, where doubt and fatigue might insinuate their 
poisonous disintegrating vapours. 

For the present, his object was only to go round the 
wood to the other side and see whether he could not find 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 47 
Leif’s tracks and the place where he had entered the 
wood. If he could find Leif’s, or rather the horse’s, 
tracks, his dog would be a considerable help in following 
them. And if he could not find them, it was not impossi- 
ble that the dog might. Such was Ingolf’s plan. 

Now and then he looked at the dog faithfully plodding 
after him. When it ran along unnoticed, it dropped its 
tail discontentedly. It did not see any object in such an 
expedition in this weather, and could not possibly ap- 
prove of it at first. But as soon as Ingolf spoke kindly 
to it, or it only noticed that it was observed, it cocked 
its tail and sprang forward at his side, gladly barking, 
and talked to him in dog-language. 

They went steadily forward, although their progress 
was slow. To his joy, Ingolf noticed that the wind was 
abating. The snow-clouds w T ere gradually dividing, 
and the moon’s pale disc shone against a background of 
blue. Around him spread a white expanse, abruptly 
broken by the dark line of the edge of the wood a little 
to the right. There was no longer an upward incline; 
he sped along easily and softly on his ski, and looked 
about him. The snow-clouds as they departed opened 
an ever-widening horizon to his view. He must clearly 
ascertain where he was. Now he knew the place and 
could do that correctly for himself. Yes, he was up on 
the heath, and had only to turn to the right and follow 
the line of the wood. His snow-shoes glided easily upon 
the smooth, even surface of the snow. With each step 
he increased his speed. For now a mental tension took 
hold of him, and filled him with restlessness. He called 
to his dog, roused it up, and urged it on with short, 


48 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
explanatory shouts. He made it understand that he 
was seeking something, and counted on its help. Sud- 
denly the dog was awake in every nerve. Now he could 
understand his master and feel with him. Eagerly he 
ran on ahead, nosing at the snow. Hither and thither 
he ran, in larger and smaller curves. Now and then 
Ingolf seemed to perceive in it an impulse to stand still. 
But it never came completely to a stop, only making a 
half pause. The dog was so engrossed in its mission of 
finding something, though it knew not what, that it com- 
pletely forgot its tail, and let it hang obliquely down 
behind, completing the impression of self-forgetting ab- 
sorption. 

It was as though Ingolf’s mental tension had trans- 
ferred itself to the animal, which continually increased 
its speed. Ingolf had difficulty in keeping up, although 
he sped as though for his life, so that the sweat poured 
in streams down over his face and dropped from his eye- 
brows and chin. 

Thus they sped on for a long time. Ingolf knew well 
that he must husband his strength. But it seemed as 
though the part of his excitement which had communi- 
cated itself to the dog had returned to him with double 
strength. He completely forgot to economize his 
forces. He put them all forth, well knowing that by 
doing so he imperilled the success of his quest. He 
simply could not do otherwise. The one thing was to 
hold out and follow the dog. He dared not keep it 
back. “ On ! ” he said to himself. “ As long as you 
can keep your head up.” 

Suddenly the dog stopped and began running round 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 49 
and round. Ingolf was a good way behind him. He 
hurried on as quickly as possible, and gave close atten- 
tion to the animal, which now stood and sniffed for a 
time. Then it ran a little way in the direction of the 
wood. Oho! Here it was, then! But what now? 
The dog stood still, sniffed, and ran some way back. 
Then it paused again. What was the matter? 

And see! Now it lifted its head, stood and sniffed 
now towards the wood, now in the opposite direction, 
with a slight, hasty jerk of its body. Its tail was lifted 
too, and stood straight out. 

Now Ingolf felt certain. This was where he should 
enter the wood. Now there remained nothing necessary 
but to take off his ski and to walk. 

But before he had quite got up to the dog, the latter 
had already started again — away from the wood. In- 
golf shouted to it. It must be mistaken. It stood still 
as it was ordered, but did not come back. It remained 
standing, waiting for further directions. Ingolf called 
it again, but it remained standing as before. And now 
Ingolf heard it utter a low whine. What did it want? 
Ingolf shouted encouragingly to it and immediately it 
started off again. Ingolf followed, without yet leaving 
the edge of the wood. He thought the dog was still on 
the track, and only following it in the wrong direction. 
It would soon perceive its mistake and turn round. 

But it was far from turning round. On the contrary, 
it came to a stop and remained standing by a slight 
elevation in the snow. There it paused and ran about, 
nosing here and there eagerly. It was easy to see that 
it had found something of great importance. 


50 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Ingolf came to a stop. He had to rally all his will 
power in order not to collapse. 

He could not stir from the spot. Was Leif lying 
there? Had a tragedy happened after all? The gods 
he had braved had at last taken vengeance on Leif for 
his insolence and mockery. Ingolf felt himself struck in 
a vital nerve. For how could he live after that? 

As he stood there it occurred to him suddenly that 
here his race came to an end. Leif was dear. Only he 
and Helga were left. He with a stain upon his honour 
— in a fit of temper he had let Leif ride unhindered away 
from him to meet obvious death — a stain he could only 
wash away in one way — by giving himself a sacrifice 
to Odin. And Helga . . . yes, Helga would not survive 
that. So here the race would cease. All his dreams, 
all his purposes blown away like chaff before the 
wind. 

Suddenly Ingolf heard the dog close by him. It stood 
in front of him, with its snout lifted and its ears laid 
back, whining up at him. At first he looked down 
without seeing it and without giving heed to its suppli- 
acting look ; then suddenly he woke to attention. The 
dog certainly did not look sorrowful. It looked rather 
as if it had something special, and to a certain degree 
joyful, to announce. And its whining also seemed to 
signify the same. 

In Ingolf’s mind there dawned a spark of hope. He 
set his ski in motion and followed the dog. 

But the nearer he came to the white mound, by which 
his dog already stood, looking back beseechingly and 
whining softly — the slower he moved. Suddenly he 
stood still as though struck. What was it? What 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 51 
sort of a sound was that? He stood still awhile and col- 
lected himself to listen. But his own blood’s throbbing 
made it hard for him to interpret the sound he heard. 
Suddenly the sound grew louder, till here was no mis- 
taking it. It was the heavy snoring of one dead tired. 

Here was Leif, then, calmly asleep. He was not too 
dead to lie there snoring, so that it could be heard a 
long way off. 

In an instant Ingolf was there; he threw off his ski 
and began to excavate the snow with his bare hands. 
Leif in the horse’s stomach was so covered with snow 
that no one could guess what this mound in the land- 
scape really contained. 

Ingolf took hold of a corner of the cloak and pulled. 
Leif did not follow it, as he had expected. The cloak 
came up empty, and only exposed Leif’s legs to view. 
Leif was not interested in what was going on — he 
continued to lie there and snore. So Ingolf began to 
pull Leif’s leg with all his might, and at last dragged 
him out. A hasty look in the hole showed him the 
ripped-up stomach of a horse. Leif opened a pair of 
sleep-drunken and astonished eyes, rose with a bound, 
looked closely at Ingolf and at the dog, gave a glance into 
the hole he had been hauled out from, shook off his stiff- 
ness, yawned, and began to rub his eyes, as though he 
wished to look more closely into the matter before he 
believed it. 

Ingolf stood and stared at him without uttering a 
word. Leif looked dirty and bloody, but it was certainly 
not his own blood. He did not seem to have lost any- 
thing, and was at any rate alive. And how like Leif 
that was. He had at last rubbed his eyes well and was 


52 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
awake. For a moment he sat with his eyes wide open 
and looked at Ingolf. 

“ Well, you have been home,” he blurted out in a 
voice that was hoarse and still a little sleepy. 
“ Brought anything to eat? ” 

Then Ingolf sat down and laughed — laughed so that 
he had to hold his stomach with both hands — laughed 
so that at last he had to fall backwards, and rolled on 
one side. Leif looked at him, but his mental faculties 
were still a little benumbed by sleep. Then he, too, 
began to chuckle inwardly. When, a little while after, 
they had put on their ski, and were on the point of start- 
ing homeward, Leif stopped suddenly, and reflected. 
Then he looked Ingolf in the eyes and reached out his 
hand. He did not utter a word, but pressed his hand 
and looked straight in his eyes again. There was a 
slight quiver about his large mouth. 

Then quickly they loosed each other’s hands. And 
they started off home at full speed. They were as 
though born again, and did not feel weariness, cold, or 
hunger. By their side raced Ingolf’s dog, his warm, 
bright red tongue hanging far out and his tail cheer- 
fully erect. 

So they sped along the way by the wood. Down the 
slopes above the house they went at a pelting pace. 
When at last they were at home in the courtyard, and 
had stowed away their ski in the outhouse, the dawn was 
beginning to break. No one was up yet. Noiselessly 
they crept to their beds. They did not feel bold enough 
to meet any one this morning. The best thing was to 
take refuge in sleep from all explanations. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
VI 


53 


Helga, though she had only lived for twelve winters, 
knew already a good deal of life. She knew what it was 
to be anxious for one whom she loved. Long before she 
was conscious of her love for Leif, she suffered all a 
lover’s anxiety. Leif took her thoughts with him wher- 
ever he went and travelled. And she could never feel se- 
cure about him. She could, on the other hand, be sure 
that if she had not seen him for the space of a day, not 
to speak of the occasions when he was absent many days, 
that during that interval he had been once, or probably 
many times, near the border of the next world, and that 
it was at any rate only due to the incredible luck which 
always followed him that he came home with whole 
limbs. 

She knew, in fact, the long days and still longer nights 
of waiting and anxiety. She knew what it was to lie 
awake most of the night and see terrible sights. She 
turned restlessly on her bed, and neither dared to close 
her eyes nor to stare into the darkness, because every- 
where she encountered the figure of him she loved, either 
dead or dying. She had learnt to prize two things 
which a woman, who must generally miss and be anxious 
for him she loves, cannot live without — dreaming and 
work. She knew how small occupations shorten the day, 
and the relief won by showing love to animals, being kind 
to them, and lavishing kind words upon them, and she 
experienced the joy it gives to be loved by dumb crea- 
tures. It was known to her, also, how the way is made 
easy to the land of dreams, where the hours fly quickly, 


54 THE sworn brothers 

by busying one’s hands with needle and thread. When 
she sat making something ornamental for herself or 
small gifts for him, there were moments when she seemed 
to triumph over distance, and felt her friend so near 
that she suddenly let her hands sink, looked up, and was 
quite surprised that he was not standing behind her. 
Was it because she did not look up quickly enough? 
Just before, he had been standing there! Helga, with 
her twelve short winters, knew also happiness. There 
was the happiness of seeing Leif come home radiant, 
and hearing his dear, glad voice tell of great adventures. 
Leif always came across great adventures, so that his 
tongue nearly ran away with him. There was the joy 
of noticing that his eye always sought her first, and 
really only her. It was a joy that he never found rest 
when near her, except at her side, and that he could 
only be quiet and lose himself in dreams when she held 
his hand. It was a joy finally to see him forget every- 
thing, even herself, when he had some purpose in his 
head, or was bent upon going to some other place. 
Even the pain at seeing herself thus forgotten was 
mingled with the deepest feelings of joy. For that was 
just Leif’s way. He came so near her by leaving her. 
She loved him exactly as he was, regardless of limits and 
without consideration. Because he was one of those 
whom no bond holds, it was such a happy thing to know 
that he was hers, when he only remembered it — hers 
and no one else’s. 

And, besides, she knew that she could not cease to 
love him. She was so completely convinced that though 
in knightly bravery and unbounded courage he might, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 55 
perhaps, have an equal, he could not have a superior. 
It was impossible for her to cease loving him. 

Yes, Helga knew happiness. She knew what it was to 
love, and to feel herself beloved. She knew by experi- 
ence how absence deepens and intensifies affection. She 
felt how her latent longing slowly grew, and was pre- 
pared to burst all bonds. She possessed in full measure 
woman’s pure and unbounded devotion. Matured early 
as she was, Helga often reflected on the relation between 
Leif and her brother, Ingolf, which caused her distress. 
She was fond of her brother. Ingolf, though fundamen- 
tally different from Leif, was such that if she once had 
to leave him in order to follow Leif, she would not make 
Leif so complete and happy as she ungrudgingly wished 
him to be. Therefore the great difference in their char- 
acters caused her perpetual anxiety — an anxiety which 
flamed up anew whenever Leif and Ingolf became angry 
with each other, or even a little at variance. In her 
heart she accused them alternately — Ingolf, when his 
phlegmatic character irritated Leif ; and Leif, when, by 
his hastiness and teasing, he provoked Ingolf. Neither 
Leif nor Ingolf had any suspicion of Helga’s deep dis- 
tress each time a trivial misunderstanding divided them 
for a short time. For Helga concealed her anxiety, 
and fought her battle in silence. 

She was always on the watch for the fluctuations in 
their temperaments. She could always perceive when 
they had been at variance, even when they had been 
reconciled and had forgotten what had occurred, before 
they met her. When anything concerned them, she was 
as sensitive as a feather in the wind. And she did not 


56 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
cease till she had examined the cause of their disagree- 
ment to the minutest detail, and cleared away the rem- 
nants of ill-humour which might still remain in one or 
both of their minds. They felt sometimes that it was 
a little tiresome, being called to account in this way. 
But they reconciled themselves to it, because both were 
so fond of her, and because she was wise, quiet, and 
impartial. They did not guess at all that she fought 
for her future happiness with a heart torn by anxiety, 
that her calm had been won by a severe struggle, that 
her seeming cool, wise impartiality was a screen behind 
which she concealed herself. 

Helga was the only one who, to a certain extent, 
discovered the real circumstances connected with their 
journey over the heath. She was also the only one who 
discovered that they had separated, and separated in 
anger. Finally, she was the only one who obtained a 
truthful account of the slaughter of the horse. 

Originally it was by no means their intention that she 
should find out anything of the matter. When Ingolf 
and Leif had slept uninterruptedly for twenty-four 
hours after their return from Gaulum, they woke the 
second night, towards morning, hungry and depressed, 
and began to examine the situation. They hastily 
agreed only to say that they had ridden over the heath, 
and up there had been obliged to kill their only horse, 
and for the rest to maintain an obstinate silence. If 
Orn and Rodmar were in the mood to punish them, they 
must submit; and, for the rest, ride out the storm as 
well as they could. 

They had soon discovered that Orn and Rodmar had 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 57 
more important things to think about. It was enough 
for them that the boys had returned home safe and 
sound. They told them, seriously, that it was not the 
custom of a man of honour to break a promise once 
given, and that, since they had done that, they could 
not yet be accounted men. That hurt their feelings 
rather, but had to be borne. Ingolf and Leif discovered 
once more that one escapes most cheaply when one has 
been most anxious. So lightly did their fathers deal 
with them. 

With Helga it was another matter. She held on, and 
held on. For many days they fought manfully; they 
did not want to make her their confidante in the matter. 
But she was not to be shaken off. And at last there 
came the moment when their tongues were altogether 
loosed, and she got a full account, down to the minutest 
details. 

It happened in the following way. Their plan of 
defence had been to take care that neither should be 
alone with her. For many days it had been impossible 
for her to find them in a remote spot; not once had 
she succeeded in getting one of them alone. When she 
saw that it was not a fair fight, she had recourse to 
stratagem. She kept silence for a few days, and they 
immediately became less vigilant. Then she brought 
out some wild apples which she had kept since the 
preceding summer. She made them believe that she 
had seen her chance to snatch them. The apples smelt 
delicious. Leif and Ingolf were immediately wdlling to 
share the supposed stolen goods with her. So she suc- 
ceeded in luring them into her ambush — an outhouse 


58 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
where they could eat them quietly. She let them bolt 
the door carefully, so that they should not run the risk 
of being surprised. She took her seat on the edge of a 
sledge, and let the boys sit, one on each side of her. 
And then she spoke in a way to cut off all evasions, and 
made it impossible for them to be silent any longer. 
Too late they discovered that they had been caught in a 
trap. 

Embarrassed and unhappy, they began their confes- 
sion. With red faces and downcast eyes, they related 
brokenly and alternately what had happened between 
them on the heath in the evening and the night. Each 
of them accused himself and excused the other. But 
Helga, who listened with more than her ears only, be- 
came quite clear in her mind regarding what had hap- 
pened. 

Quite still she sat with bowed head, and let them tell 
their narrative. When they had finished and were 
silent, she still remained still, without moving or speak- 
ing a word. At last her silence seemed so strange to 
Leif that he lifted his head and looked at her in alarm. 
And what he saw increased his fear. She sat there by 
his side with her face white and, as it were, sunk in. 
Her eyes stared straight before her, her mouth was 
firmly closed, and tears trickled from her despairing 
eyes and ran down over her pale face. Leif felt an 
icy chill run through his whole body which made him 
shudder. This drew Ingolf’s attention, and he also 
looked up. He had never seen his sister look like that ; 
immediately he seized one of her hands. It was ice-cold, 
and remained passive in his. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 59 
Tears came to Leif’s eyes, and he sat there inwardly 
helpless. It was not possible for him to bring out a 
word. He found nothing to say, and simply dared not 
open his mouth, for he was on the point of weeping. 

Ingolf was the first to speak. He pressed his sister’s 
limp hand, shook her arm cheerfully, and said: “You 
must not be so sad about that, Helga. We have for- 
gotten it now. And each of us has certainly vowed in 
his heart that it shall never happen again.” 

Helga opened her mouth to answer him, but her 
tongue would not obey her. She had to struggle hard 
to control her emotion. When she had waited a little, 
she at last began to speak. “ That is just it,” she said, 
with a broken voice. “ It always gets worse and worse 
with you — always more dangerous. When you are 
grown, you will not so easily get over it, nor so easily be 
reconciled afterwards. Perhaps you will even fight each 
other. Perhaps some day one of you will kill the other. 
If things go on like this, there will at last be hatred 
between you. And what shall I do? ” 

Ingolf and Leif sat and felt very uncomfortable. 
Both saw for once the relation between them with her 
eyes. She was right. Things were growing continu- 
ally worse. It was no use to shut their eyes to the 
danger. The next time they fell out, it might be under 
such circumstances as would not admit of their being 
reconciled again. They had not been far from that this 
last time. 

Ingolf was the first who found firm ground in his 
thoughts. A secret purpose was suddenly quickened 
in him. Hurriedly he rose and reached out his hand 


Go THE SWORN BROTHERS 
to Leif. “ Leif, will you be my sworn brother? ” he 
asked quietly, and there was in his voice and bearing 
that adult composure which made him at times seem 
older than he was. 

Leif sprang up and took his hand. He could not 
bring out a word, but gripped hard. Helga remained 
sitting and looked from one to the other. Then she rose 
slowly, laid her hands over theirs, and gave each of them 
a kiss. “ Now you are both my brothers,” she said, 
and looked at the same time at Leif. Her look made 
Leif understand that he was more than a brother. Lie 
turned red, and smiled in an embarrassed w r ay. He had 
the habit of blushing easily. His embarrassed smile 
was very charming. , 

They had forgotten the apples. Now they were pro- 
duced, and helped them over the slight embarrassment 
which followed on their extreme seriousness. Gradually 
Leif and Helga talked fluently. Ingolf, on the other 
hand, did not say much. He sat and took a secret oath 
that henceforth he would be a man, and no overhastiness 
of temper should master him. Nothing should by any 
means divide him from Leif or Helga. Now he and 
Leif were actually brothers, and Leif and Helga would 
hold by each other, he knew. Seldom had he felt so 
happy as at this moment. Quite unconsciously he sat 
and enjoyed his sense of strength and quiet. He con- 
tinued so to sit till Helga roused him with a question. 
Thus they talked easily and enjoyed being together. 
When they separated, they had agreed that the solemn 
ceremony of initiation into blood-brotherhood should 
take place in the spring at the great festival which was 
to be held at the chief temple at Gaulum. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 


6 1 


VII 

Orn and Rodmar were able to make the wdnter pass. 
They sat most days and every evening on the high-seat, 
drank beer, and enjoyed each other’s society. 

From the north came rumours of disturbance. There 
was still peace and no 'danger in Dalsfjord and its 
neighbourhood. But it was best to be prepared for 
everything. 

Now that Halvdan the Black was dead, and his son, 
Harald, made King, though but ten years old, there 
were several kings and chiefs who suddenly conceived a 
desire for the kingdom which Halvdan the Black had 
established. It was rumoured that Harald and his 
uncle, Guttorm, who was to be regent during the two 
years remaining of Harald’s minority, had already gone 
out to meet the disturbers of peace. 

When Orn and Rodmar heard of it, they remembered 
the exploits of their youth. The latter had not lost 
anything by being related through many years. Listen- 
ers obtained the impression that Orn and Rodmar had 
been present at the most important events of the world, 
and decided their issue. And it was not only men 
whom they had encountered. They had met evil and 
hidden powers in manifold forms. And here they sat 
after all. 

Orn and Rodmar were reasonable men, who spoke 
in moderation. When one had spoken, he gladly let the 
other have his turn. And while the one who was silent 
played the part of an attentive hearer, his look became 


6 2 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

absent, he thought of fresh exploits, brought them forth, 
and arranged them in his mind. Then when the other 
at last was silent he was fully prepared. But first he 
nodded courteously and said, “ Yes ! Yes ! ” very 
thoughtfully, and still kept silence for a moment to show 
that he had been following. Then all at once he became 
an active narrator. “ But now here ! 55 

The servants in the hall were amused, but not in any 
unbecoming way. They winked at each other when the 
old men did not see it. They did not grudge the old 
men their reminiscences, and partly believed them. But 
they were amused. 

And Orn and Rodmar showed a startling faculty at 
their age in discovering how to outdo each other’s 
tales. 

When they had bragged their best, they went to the 
temple and offered their fattest animals to the gods, 
feasted in their honour, and gave them gifts. They did 
not feel quite sure whether the gods allowed so much 
pride. And one should not offend the gods, but keep 
on good terms with them. 

Thus the days passed for Orn and Rodmar. They 
grew old, sitting in the high-seat and drinking beer. 
They drank much beer. 


VIII 

One morning, shortly after Ingolf had offered Leif 
blood-brotherhood, they went to their fathers to tell 
them, and ask their permission for the ceremony to take 
place at the feast at Gaulum the first day of summer. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 63 

Leif found his father in bed. When he had spoken, 
Rodmar praised his luck in strong language, added that 
he had always had better fortune than he deserved, 
further remarked that on the rare occasions that he' 
caused his father joy it was always without any merit 
of his own, and bade him go his way and leave him, 
Rodmar, to his beer. 

Orn was sitting in the high-seat, slaking his morning 
thirst, when Ingolf came before him and asked permis- 
sion to speak. Orn granted it with a nod of his white- 
haired head. The slightly absent look did not disap- 
pear from his face; he listened without moving to what 
his son had to say. When Ingolf had spoken, Orn re- 
mained sitting silent. Ingolf was not sure whether he 
had heard what he had said or not. It was easy to see 
that he sat in deep reflection. Ingolf remained standing 
for a time, waiting for an answer. When he saw that it 
was in vain, and that his father had probably forgotten 
that he stood there, he silently departed. 

Orn did not touch his drinking-horn again that day. 
He busied himself with his thoughts, and was taciturn. 
Long before his usual time he sought his couch. Early 
next morning he summoned Ingolf curtly and bade him 
follow him. He led him to an outhouse where the tools 
of the house were kept, and bolted the door carefully. 
Then he took his seat on a chopping-block in the middle 
of the floor and sat silent. Ingolf stood before him, 
awaiting what he had to say, and carefully restraining 
his impatience. 

“ Sit down,” said Orn at last thoughtfully. 

Ingolf sat down on some lumber which had been piled 


6 4 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
up against the main wall. So they remained sitting a 
considerable time. Om was long in commencing. 
“ You have told me,” he began at last, speaking very 
slowly and with constant pauses, “ that you intend to 
enter into blood-brotherhood with your cousin, Leif. 
I must presume that you are acquainted with duties of 
blood-brotherhood, and have carefully considered the 
matter, and also that you have not let yourself be sur- 
prised into talking rash vows, or have followed your 
feelings alone without consulting your understanding. 
I will not disguise from you that I could have wished a 
better brother for you in this. And I leave it to your 
discretion whether the circle of your brotherhood should 
not be extended so as also to include Atle Jarl’s sons. 
On many grounds I have been led to understand that 
these young men, especially Haasten, would not be un- 
willing to exchange the bond of friendship for that of 
brotherhood. It needs but a word on your part, per- 
haps only a hint. My opinion is that you would stand 
stronger alone than with Leif as your sworn brother. 
You ought to be intelligent enough yourself to perceive 
that. But the three would balance Leif, and more than 
that. You would stand stronger afterwards, especially 
if another tie subsequently should unite us to Atle’s 
sons, which I do not regard as impossible. For the 
rest, Leif is certainly our kinsman. We should there- 
fore look after him, and perhaps he is best bound in that 
way. I do not wish to say more about the matter.” 

Orn was silent for a long time. Presently he resumed. 
“ I feel I am growing old. The days depart and do not 
return to me. They seem, as it were, to go a very little 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 65 
way, and there is nothing to hold fast to in them ; they 
slip through my hands.” 

He coughed, reflected, and began again. “ Therefore 
I have considered that perhaps it would be best if I were 
to make over to you our property to manage. It will be 
good for you to be early accustomed to command people 
and to bear responsibility. And you are certainly a 
child no longer. I will therefore gladly see, before I 
die, how you prosper when you manage by yourself. 
For the rest, I leave matters without anxiety to you, and 
I shall be at hand, and can be useful. I will also ad- 
vise Rodmar to do the same for Leif. Your task will 
certainly be increased by that, for you will have to look 
after your kinsman, at any rate at first. But since you 
wish to enter into brotherhood with him, you must bear 
the consequences. There is no more to be said about it 
at present. We must have time to prepare the matter, 
and can return to it later. There was also another 
thing I wished to speak to you about today.” 

Orn was silent and reflected. Then he commenced 
again hesitatingly, not without a certain embarrass- 
ment. “ I often heard in her time your mother speaking 
with you. It is now long since, and you were little at 
the time. Probably you have forgotten some of what 
she said. But I have noticed that you have remembered 
part of it — perhaps you remember every word. I have 
never spoken to you of your mother. You have never 
given occasion for it, and one should not talk too much. 
When one talks too much, words easily become mere 
wind. Therefore I have never hitherto spoken with you 
about something, of which, however, I wish to speak with 


66 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
you — not because I believe it necessary — perhaps you 
are already as clear on the matter as myself — but be- 
cause I want you to remember that I have spoken to you. 
The fact that I cannot well postpone it has also deter- 
mined me to speak now. 

“ You know that Odin and Thor are especially my 
gods. They have been the gods of our family as far 
back as tradition goes, and I want you, like your fore- 
fathers, to hold them especially in honour. If you do 
that, it will go well with you. For wisdom and strength 
are the two things a man must have. If he has them, 
he has honour too, in Valhalla as well as here upon 
earth. Goods and gold, power over men, and great pos- 
sessions are good things, which you should strive to ac- 
quire, and hold fast when you have them. But all those 
things can, in case of need, be dispensed with. Honour 
is the one indispensable thing, because, after all, it is 
the only thing that uplifts a man, and the only thing 
that survives him on earth, when he is dead and done 
with. And because honour can be lost during a man’s 
lifetime, a dead man with honour preserved is happier 
than the man who is still alive, and whose honour is ex- 
posed to peril. It is not necessary to impress upon you 
anything else than that ; when your honour is concerned, 
you must be prepared to stake your life. The memory 
of a man outlives him. And honour casts a glory over 
a man’s memory, just as dishonour casts a shadow. No 
man in our family has a shadow on his memory. This 
is the most important thing which I wish to say to 
you. But if you have the patience to hear me, I have 
something more to say. And that is this. You shall 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 67 
respect your land’s law and justice, for as long as you 
have not renounced its law, you are bound by it, and 
dishonour yourself by breaking it. You shall not stir 
up unnecessary quarrels, but avoid disunion and strife, 
as long as your honour is not injured. Peace in the land 
produces fruitful fields. But if you have a lawful ven- 
geance to inflict, do so with a heavy hand, as behoves 
one born to such a place as yours. But be always ready 
for reconciliation when it is offered sincerely. An 
honourable reconciliation is preferable to a victory 
which may carry in it the seed of future defeat. 

“ And never break a treaty, for only a wretch ignores 
his vows, only a traitor breaks his word. A brave man 
is prepared to support his least word with his life, 
thereby the high-born are recognized. The churl, on 
the other hand, regards his word as nothing more than 
the breath of his mouth. His tongue shall be eaten of 
snakes, and his evil memory will ride his soul like a night- 
mare for ever.” 

Orn had become excited. Then he was silent, com- 
posed himself again, meditated, and was still. 

When he had finished meditating, he rose solemnly 
and drew from his arm a heavy gold bracelet graven 
with runes and signs. Ingolf sprang up when his father 
rose, and remained standing before him with bowed head, 
and his bright face slightly flushed. 

Orn spoke: “ This bracelet has for a long time be- 
longed to our race, and has always been an heirloom 
in the head branch of the family. Some of those who 
bore it have worn it till their death. Others have trans- 
ferred it to the future wearer when they found that their 


68 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

time was near. My son, I am growing old, and it is no 
use to deny it or to hide it. Forgetfulness is getting 
more and more the mastery over me. Reach me your 
hand.” 

Ingolf stretched out his right hand, and raised his 
head. There was a moist glimmer in his eyes. Deeply 
moved, Om drew the bracelet on his arm. “ Now you 
wear the ring.” 

Ingolf fell on his knees before the old man, and Orn 
made the sign of the Hammer over his head, and said 
quietly : “ Odin give you wisdom, and Thor strength. 

Frey make your land fruitful, and Njord guide your 
seafaring! All the bright Ases help thee! Rise, my 
son.” 

Ingolf rose silently. Orn laid his hands on his shoul- 
ders, looked for a moment closely at him, and let him 
go. They went out into the courtyard of the house. 
For a while they stood there silent, side by side, and 
looked out over the landscape where the snow-covered 
mountains rose and the valleys sank. Ingolf saw every- 
thing, as it were, with new eyes. The fjord was such a 
crystal blue, and seemed to have something to say to 
him. The dark edge of the wood, which he caught a 
glimpse of here and there, held today a secret and cer- 
tain promise of the spring and the snow-free earth. 
The sky was high and clear, and the day had a solemn 
stillness about it. The frost in the air seemed to be 
relaxing. In Ingolf’s eyes the whole scene wore a sol- 
emn aspect, and seemed in a way newborn. Even the 
low houses with snow-covered roofs seemed to have al- 
tered their appearance, and looked twice as home-like. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 69 
When Orn went in, Ingolf remained standing there, and 
enjoyed the freshness of the day. 

Orn went straight in to the high-seat and his drink- 
ing-horn. His throat had become dry from much talk. 
He emptied the horn in a moment and had it filled 
afresh. He emptied the horn many times that day. 


IX 

Ingolf informed Leif in carefully-chosen words that 
his father would be glad if they extended the proposed 
brotherhood so as to include the sons of Atle. Leif 
stood looking down while Ingolf talked. As soon as 
Ingolf had spoken the first word, he felt sorry that he 
had brought the question up at all. Leif’s attitude 
had an effect on him. He stood and fumbled with words 
which would not arrange themselves properly. 

When he finished, Leif looked up askance at him. He 
did not say much at first. 

Ingolf felt a profound and unusual depression. He 
felt as if he had in some degree deceived Leif. 44 I only 
wished to tell you that,” he tried to add, but was quite 
sure that his voice did not sound convincing. 

44 What do you think yourself?” asked Leif at last 
quietly, and looked up again, still with a rather un- 
steady glance. 

44 1 have never thought about brotherhood with Atle’s 
sons,” answered Ingolf quietly, suddenly recovering his 
equilibrium. 44 1 have offered you brotherhood with 
myself alone, and am therefore prevented from forming 


70 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
brotherhood with another. But I understand from 
what my father said that there perhaps was a possibility 
that Atle’s sons would like to enter into brotherhood 
with us. And in such a case I would like to know your 
opinion beforehand.” 

“ I have never contemplated forming brotherhood 
with Holmsten,” answered Leif in a quiet, firm voice, 
quite different from his usual one. “ In fact, I do not 
choose to be everybody’s brother.” 

“ Well, let us say no more about it.” Ingolf tried to 
speak lightly. 

But Leif continued. There was a tremor of swelling 
wrath and distress in his quiet voice. “ I understand 
well that for you a brotherhood with Atle’s sons is quite 
a different thing from brotherhood with me. By enter- 
ing into the blood-tie with them you gain power and 
consideration. Do you enter alone into brotherhood 
with Atle Jarl’s sons; I will not stand in the way. I 
release you from your word. I am able to stand alone.” 

Ingolf paused a little and then said: “You mis- 
understand me, Leif. I only want to bring the matter 
before you. It is possible that I should not have done 
that. But I took for granted that we might already 
talk together like brothers. I will gladly confess that, 
for my part, I might think it good to enter into brother- 
hood with Atle’s sons — yes, I should even like to have 
Haasten for a brother. But I could not think of enter- 
ing into any brotherhood without you. There is no one 
else whom I would rather be brother to, and that you 
know well, or ought to know. No power could induce 
me to release you from your word, Leif.” 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 71 
Leif stood thoughtful awhile. Then he raised his 
head and looked in Ingolf’s eyes with a firm and trust- 
ful look. “ I know well,” he said in the same quiet tone, 
66 that I am not the best brother you could have. But 
you shall never have reason to find fault with my faith- 
fulness. I imagine, Ingolf, that you are afraid that I 
shall some day be the cause of enmity between you and 
A tie’s sons. With my good will that shall not happen. 
My temper shall never again get the mastery of me be- 
fore Holmsten. That I swear to you. I know that you 
like Holmsten, and that you wish to preserve that friend- 
ship. You shall see that you can trust me.” 

The two cousins pressed each other’s hands in silence. 
They referred no more to the matter. 


X 

There came a beggar to the house: an old bent man, 
clothed in dirty rags and torn leather, entered the hall 
one evening and took a place by the fire on the outer- 
most bench. There he sat and warmed his crooked 
fingers, that were blue with cold, and meanwhile squinted 
about him with pale, cunning eyes. As he sat there, 
his yellow beard, in which a quantity of nondescript 
rubbish had been caught, hung down between his legs. 
His grey hair lay in tatters over his back. But his 
powerful eyebrows were the most marked feature in his 
face. Grey and bushy, they almost concealed his eyes 
when they were lowered, and he had a habit sometimes 
of drawing them both up together and slightly lifting 


72 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

one at a time, which gave his face a strangely mobile, 
almost animal, expression. 

He was questioned regarding news from the north, 
but had little information to give. As soon as it was 
evident that he had nothing important to communicate, 
he was allowed to sit in peace and warm himself. It 
seemed as if he valued being left to himself. When he 
had sat for a while and warmed his hands, he loosed the 
rags from off his legs and stretched his feet to the fire. 
They were a marvel of knotted bones and dirt. He 
looked exhausted. Some remains of the evening meal 
were brought him. He received the food with a grunt, 
set it upon his knee, and began eating. With eager 
hands he first sought the best bits, and, groping about 
in the food, turned the contents of the dish round, 
chewing with his whole head. He certainly could eat. 

Ingolf and Leif had sought a place near him, and sat 
looking attentively at him. 

44 I think he can hold as much in his maw as a cow,” 
whispered Leif, absorbed in looking at him. 44 And he 
mumbles just like a cow chewing the cud. Ha! Ha! 
what an old swine he is ! ” 

The beggar emptied the dish so that only bare bones 
remained. Then he gulped comfortably and relieved 
himself of air. Subsequently he fell into a cosy nap 
while he digested. Thus he sat for some time, ap- 
parently sound asleep. But suddenly he raised his eye- 
brows both together and peered round him with wide- 
open pale eyes. 

Ingolf and Leif had come near to him, and were 
contemplating him closely — one his legs, and the other 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 73 
his face. They had seldom seen anything like him. He 
was certainly a remarkable object both above and below. 
He sat for a time and looked at them without saying 
anything, looked from one to the other, contemplated 
them closely, and gave himself plenty of time. 

“ Point and sword,” he said at last in a deep bass tone. 
“ When the point breaks, exploits are over. . . . But 
you sit where you should.” He turned suddenly to In- 
golf and thrust his face with his wide-opened eyes close 
to his. Then he drew his head back, murmuring in a 
deep tone, as though at his own thoughts. The boys be- 
lieved at first that he talked in delirium. They sat still 
and only stared at him — Leif with his mouth half open. 
44 A curious creature ! ” he thought, and felt internally 
much amused. 

The old man remained still for some time, looking 
closely and a little cunningly from one to the other. 
Their staring did not seem to affect him. 46 Shall I tell 
you something? ” he asked at last, growling, and winking 
meaningly with his pale eyes. 44 Shall I tell you about 
the new land? ” 

He turned his face with his eyebrows elevated, ques- 
tioning, and turning abruptly from one to the other. 

In the face of such a direct application from this 
queer figure, the boys became at first a little embar- 
rassed. They loked at each other, and remained sitting 
with bowed heads and fumbling fingers. 

44 Well, if you don’t choose to hear it, I don’t choose 
to tell you,” growled the old grumbler, shook himself, let 
his eyebrows sink, and withdrew into himself. The boys 
lifted their heads, looked at him and at each other, and 


74 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
suddenly became curious. Ingolf nodded to Leif to 
commence, and Leif blurted out : 44 Let us hear, old 

man ! ” 

The beggar slowly lifted his eyebrows, but not in 
order to look at them. It seemed as if he had forgotten 
them, and did not hear what Leif said. He sat staring 
in front of him into the fire with an absent look in his 
old, strangely bleached eyes. 

44 Yes, yes,” he said at last, as if half unwillingly. 
44 Anyhow, it is all the same to me. Why should I tell 
you about it? No one escapes his destiny.” 

With a loud and luxurious yawn he showed them an 
enormous throat behind his yellow teeth. Then he 
closed his chaps and remained sitting silent for a time. 
It seemed as though he were considering whether he 
wanted to open his mouth at all again that evening. 

Leif found this tedious, and summoned up his courage. 
44 It was about the new land you were going to tell us,” 
he said persuasively. And when the old man did not 
hear him he added inquiringly, in order, if possible, to 
rouse him out of his silent reverie : 44 Has a new land 

been discovered? ” 

44 Don’t you know that? 99 asked the old man hastily. 
44 Don’t you even know that ? ” he repeated incredu- 
lously. The boys shook their heads negatively. 
44 Then it is not too early you come to know that, if one 
told you. So you do not even know that. Ah, old 
Noras! How you can spin. You look after the loom 
without wavering even when the motley yarn is blood- 
coloured. Perhaps the one who sees should be silent. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 75 
No, some time you will have to know it. Have you 
never heard of the new land? ” 

After a repeated shake of the head on the part of the 
two boys, he continued : 44 One late summer, some years 

back, Naddod the Viking intended to sail from Norway 
to the Faroe Islands. But the gods granted him no 
good wind, either because he had neglected to sacrifice, 
or in some other way incurred the displeasure of Odin 
and Njord. They sent him a storm, and drove him so 
far westward that at last he believed he was near Gin- 
nungagab, where the seas pour down into Helheim, but 
instead of this he came to a great land. He ascended a 
high mountain to see if he could find a sign that the 
land was inhabited. But no smoke was to be seen 
anywhere, nor any other sign of folk did he find. 
When he sailed from the country again, much snow had 
fallen on the mountains. Therefore he called the 
country Snowland. He and his people said that it 
was a good land. So some years passed without any- 
thing more being heard of the new country. There 
was a Swede, named Gardar Svavarsson, who had pos- 
sessions in Denmark, who sailed from Sealand to fetch 
his wife’s inheritance in the south. When he had 
sailed through Pettlandsfjord, he encountered a storm 
and went adrift. So he drifted to the west and came to 
the new land. He sailed farther along its coasts, and 
discovered that it was an island. He built a house 
by a bay which he called Husevig, and wintered there. 
When he sailed from the land the next spring the wind 
tore a boat, which he had in tow, loose. In the boat 


7 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
was a serf named Natfare and a serf-woman. Per- 
haps they managed to effect a landing and settled in 
the place. Gardar praised the country much. He 
reported that it was wooded from the heath to the 
sea, and had luxuriant pastures. He gave it the name 
Gardarsholme. It retained the name between man and 
man until Floke Vilgerdsson had been there. Floke, 
who was a powerful Viking, equipped a ship in Rogaland 
to seek Gardarsholme. He loaded his ship in Smor- 
sund. Before he sailed, he aranged a sacrificial feast, 
at which he sacrificed and conjured magic powers into 
three ravens. Therefore he has since been called 
6 Raven-Floke.’ A sea-mark was raised where the feast 
had taken place, and was called 4 Floke’s Sea-mark.’ 
It stood on the border between Hordaland and Roga- 
land. First Raven-Floke sailed to Hjaltland and cast 
anchor in a bay which was named Floke’s Bay. At 
Hjaltland his daughter, Geirhild, was drowned in a 
lake, since called Geirhild’s Lake. From Hjaltland 
he sailed to the Faroe Islands, where he gave one of 
his daughters in marriage. Thence he put out to sea, 
taking the three ravens with him. When he had sailed 
for a day and a night, he let the first raven loose. 
It flew astern and disappeared in the direction from 
which they had come. Then he sailed for a day and 
a night more, and let the second raven loose. It flew 
aloft and returned to the ship. Again he sailed a day 
and a night, and let the third raven go. It flew for- 
ward and did not return. When they sailed farther 
in the direction in which it had disappeared, they found 
the land they sought. Floke had on board a man named 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 77 
Faxe. When they came to a broad fjord, Faxe spoke 
and said : 4 This is certainly a great land we have 

found — here are mighty rivers. 5 Therefore the fjord 
was named 4 Faxe-mouth. 5 Raven-Floke did not sail 
into the fjord. He sailed past a headland with a 
mighty snow-covered mountain on it, and across a 
broad bay with many islands and skerries. He landed 
at a fjord on the north side of the bay, which he called 
Vandfjord, and the coast-line he called Bardestrand. 
The fjord was full of fish. They were so absorbed in 
catching the quantities of fish that they forgot to pro- 
cure hay; therefore the sheep and cattle they had 
brought with them died in the winter from want of 
fodder. The spring was fairly cold. Floke ascended 
a high mountain one day in spring and saw north of it 
a fjord packed full with sea-ice. Therefore he chris- 
tened the land and named it Iceland. He meant to have 
sailed away that summer, but before they were ready 
to sail it was autumn, and the weather became stormy. 
Floke had on his ship two peasants, Thorolf and Haer- 
jolf. When they were at the last ready to sail, the 
storm tore away a boat from them, and in the boat sat 
Haerjolf. Haerjolf landed at a place, to which he 
gave his name and called it Haerjolf’s Haven. Raven- 
Floke, who did not wish to sail without Haerjolf, put 
back to land and brought his ship uninjured into a 
fjord which he called Havnefjord. At a river’s mouth 
in the fjord they found a whale driven on shore. Haer- 
jolf had also scented the whale, and there they met. 
They called the river’s mouth Hvalore. They sailed 
thence and wintered in a fjord, on which Raven-Floke, 


78 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
who had had enough of the land, did not choose to lavish 
a name. When, on their arrival home, they were asked 
about the new land, Eloke had only evil to report. 
Haerjolf, on the other hand, praised it moderately, 
mentioned its advantages, and did not conceal its de- 
fects. But Thorolf declared that butter dripped 
from every straw in the land, therefore he was after- 
wards called 4 Butter-Thorolf.’ 

44 And I have no more to tell you about the new 
land,” concluded the beggar rather suddenly, and shook 
himself uncomfortably — 44 you can yourselves go and 
see it.” 

When he stopped speaking, Ingolf and Leif sat for a 
time and stared at him. 44 Why should we do that? ” 
asked Ingolf at last. “We have no mind to change 
our abode.” 

The old man returned no answer. Leif sat thought- 
ful. When he spoke at last his voice was muffled and 
seemed far away. 44 It would be amusing to see that 
land for once.” 

44 You will see it,” growled the old man, and there 
was a peculiar malicious exultation in his harsh voice 
— 44 you will have time enough to see it, I think.” 
Suddenly life came into him afresh, and his voice be- 
came sharp and obtrusive. 44 Get me a jug of beer, 
and I will tell you much more ; I will show you a piece 
of the Norns’ web, hoho ! A charming piece. They 
have twisted threads that you can never guess. Bring 
me beer, and you shall hear something.” 

Ingolf felt overcome by a strange and unusual bodily 
depression, and rose hastily. His spirits were suddenly 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 79 
upset, and he felt almost ill. “ Beer you shall have,” 
he answered curtly and coldly. “ But now I think we 
have heard enough for the evening. Come, Leif.” 

Leif rose a little unwillingly. It was possible that 
the old man had more information to give about the new 
land. Why not hear him to the end, even if he did talk 
some nonsense between whiles? But as Ingolf did not 
wish it, it was all the same to him. He could himself 
speculate further about the island out there in the 
garden, and go into the whole matter more closely with 
Ingolf. 

The beggar had a jug of beer brought, which he 
emptied in small draughts in order to relish it better. 
Then he lay down by the fire, curled himself into a 
bundle, and slept. He remained lying there for the 
night ; the next morning he wandered farther. When 
Leif sought him, in order to question him more closely, 
he had gone. Leif tried to talk with Ingolf about the 
new land. But Ingolf was always occupied with some- 
thing else when Leif began to talk about Iceland. Leif 
did not observe that Ingolf with deliberate intention 
avoided the subject. 

Ingolf could not free himself from a certain anxiety 
that Leif might become too interested in the new dis- 
covery which the beggar had reported to them. It 
would be like Leif suddenly to begin to make plans to go 
there, perhaps migrate and settle there. That must 
not happen, for Leif became unstable when he had con- 
ceived an idea, especially if it were rather an unusual 
one. No, In, golf wished to remain in Dalsfjord, in his 
father’s house. He was strongly averse from every- 


8o THE SWORN BROTHERS 
thing which smacked of wandering and adventure. By 
his prudent methods he soon brought Leif to forget 
the new land. 


XI 

The winter was nearing its end. After Goi came 
Enemaaned, and then, in the midst of spring, a fine 
Thursday ushered in Harpe, the first month of summer. 

On the first summer day there was held in this part 
of the land a great sacrificial feast at Gaulum, which 
lasted three days and nights. On that occasion there 
assembled, at the residence of the Jarl, chiefs and yeo- 
men from distant parts, each bringing for himself some 
food and a large quantity of beer. Especially was it 
obligatory on those who were preparing Viking expedi- 
tions for the summer not to remain away, if they wished 
for honour and victory in their undertaking. 

From the early morning the place began to be alive. 
Great crowds were seen gathering from all sides. The 
sun was reflected from new-polished weapons, and shone 
on parti-coloured shields. The house-servants were 
for the most part dressed in suits of grey home-spun 
frieze, but the peasants and their sons appeared in 
splendid foreign-made clothes. Red, blue, green, and 
parti-coloured chequered cloaks were seen in each com- 
pany. 

All day people continued to assemble at the house. 
The days passed in putting up tents, preparing for the 
festival, seeking out friends and acquaintances, making 
appointments for the summer, and settling various 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 81 
accounts. Atle Jarl was invisible that day. Only his 
closest friends, and people who sought him on important 
business, were taken to the room where he had hid 
himself, busily absorbed as he was in arranging or pre- 
paring arrangements for his own and others’ affairs. 

Among those who sought him that day and had audi- 
ence of him was Om Bjornulfsson. Their conversation 
was quite short, and resulted in Atle Jarl sending for 
his eldest son, Haasten. Haasten was only for a mo- 
ment in the room with his father. His brothers, Haer- 
sten and Holmsten, waited meanwhile outside. Haasten 
told them nothing about his conversation with his father. 
And when Haasten did not speak of his own acord, his 
brothers did not question him. Haasten, Haersten, 
and Holmsten went about and bade every newly arrived 
chief welcome. They wore splendid clothes, and carried 
valuable weapons and ornaments. Over his shoulders 
each of the brothers wore a long cloak of heavy silk — 
Haasten a red one, Haersten a blue one, and Holmsten 
a green one. 

They were all three fine-looking youths, tall and well- 
built, fair-haired, with noble features and quiet demean- 
our. As they went about bidding the guests welcome, 
side by side, Haasten on the right and Holmsten on the 
left, few remembered having seen three such fine-looking 
fellows together. They were very popular ; very many 
sought their friendship, but few won their confidence. 

Among these few were Ingolf and Leif. Haasten 
made no attempt to conceal his gladness when he greeted 
the two cousins. Ingolf was the special object of his 
warm friendship. He included Leif because he was once 


82 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
for all inseparable from his cousin, and because in spite 
of everything he liked him, and silently admired him 
for his courage. 

Walking slowly, the three brothers turned back to the 
place where Ingolf and Leif were superintending the 
erection of tents, but their fathers had already disap- 
peared. They had found a place of honour in the hall, 
where individual guests were received. There they sat, 
tasted the brewing of the house, and compared notes 
on the latest news with like-minded friends. 

Ingolf observed at last that Haasten especially 
wanted something with him that day, and accordingly 
arranged that they should be alone for a while. Haas- 
ten went straight to the point. “ I hear, Ingolf, that 
you and Leif will tomorow enter brotherhood. I have 
expected that some time it would come to that, but it is 
happening somewhat sooner than I had expected.” 

Ingolf interrupted him, though he well understood 
that he had not finished what he had to say. He told 
Haasten briefly, but without concealing anything, about 
their journey home after their last visit to Gaulum. 
He hinted that Leif and he certainly were both anxious 
to enter into an unbreakable bond. 

“ You know Leif,” he concluded. “ You know how 
imprudent he is, and how he needs protection. The 
shield that shall protect him will receive dints. But a 
shield he must have, and that shield I will be.” 

“ Do you, think that it would be of use if Leif at the 
same time obtained other shields?” Haasten asked 
quietly. Ingolf grew a little pale, a fact which did not 
escape Haasten. For a while they stood and looked into 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 83 
each other’s eyes. There was a strange silence between 
them. Both felt that now their destinies were being 
settled. At last Ingolf reached Haasten his hand. 
“ Haasten, my friend,” he said in a low voice, 66 1 hope 
that we will always stand side by side where the word of 
friendship sounds as well as where weapons speak. But 
I think Leif would feel a defence of shields as a prison.” 

Haasten remained standing quite still with his friend’s 
hand in his, and looked into his eyes. Both had a 
troubled look. Then Haasten said quietly : “ You have 
spoken, and it cannot well be otherwise. Let us each 
for himself keep a good watch on our brothers. I have 
a sure foreboding that it will be needed.” He gave 
Ingolf’s hand a final pressure and released it. Silently 
they returned to the tents where Leif stood engaged in 
friendly and cheerful conversation with Haasten’s 
brothers. Leif had produced the knife which Holm- 
sten gave him, and was showing with gestures and much 
hilarity how he had succeeded in killing the horse. 

“ The belt is paid for, Holmsten,” he concluded 
cheerfully. “Your knife, which once should have taken 
my life, has saved it. If you have an ax, hew at me and 
make me a present of it afterwards. I need an ax ; my 
father will not give me one. He fears I might test its 
usefulness a little too much. I have tried to steal one 
from him. But he has locked the weapons up in a chest 
which I cannot open.” 

Leif stopped when Ingolf and Haasten came up. A 
hasty glance convinced him that something had taken 
place between the two. They were very quiet. He 
thrust the knife noisily into its sheath, and involuntarily 


84 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
straightened his body from its careless attitude. Soon 
after, Haasten and his brothers withdrew. Haasten 
went straight to his father. “ Is the matter ar- 
ranged?”, asked Atle Jarl. “ No, I have been con- 
sidering it,” answered Haasten, who did not wish to give 
his father full information. “ I fear that brotherhood 
with Leif Rodmarsson will cause us too many difficul- 
ties.” 

“ Very possibly,” answered Atle. “ But Ingolf is a 
good fellow, and will inherit much property. His 
family has many friends, and will be a good support 
in disturbed times.” 

“ My friendship with the cousins is independent of 
their entering brotherhood.” 

“Perhaps,” answered the Jarl dryly. “You are in 
any case master over your proceedings. My advice 
was only advice. May you never regret not having 
followed it.” 

Haasten, who saw that his father was angry, did not 
answer, but saluted him respectfully and retired. He 
was depressed and filled with heavy forebodings, but 
tried to conceal it as much as possible. 

The day began to decline. Atle Jarl had taken 
measures, and all the arrangements for the feast were 
ready. The animals destined for sacrifice were not 
allowed out at all that day. The fine, powerful horses 
which were to be offered to Odin stood stamping their 
hoofs impatiently in the stables. A flock of sheep, like- 
wise meant to appease the All-Father, pressed against 
one another, patiently resigned to their fate, in a pen, 
rested their heads on each other’s backs, and chewed the 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 85 
cud over the last remains of the contents of their 
stomachs, now. and then shaking their ears a little dis- 
contentedly. Plump oxen and bulls which, with one 
exception, should soon bleed in honour of Odin, bel- 
lowed in all kinds of tones and butted against the beams 
of the stalls. In an outhouse lay nine serfs and crim- 
inals with their hands tied behind them. They were to 
be hung in order to join the storm-god’s wild hunt. 
That day it was chiefly Odin who received offerings. 
But there was also a little diversion destined for Thor. 
Away in a corner of the outhouse, where the serfs 
waited for the rope, lay a ragged bundle. It was the 
serf-woman, Trude, who had been guilty of stealing, 
and who, as she must somehow say good-bye to life, 
might as well be utilized as an offering to Thor the 
Thunderer. When the pale twilight of the evening had 
drawn its light veil over the landscape, softened its 
sharp outlines and changed them to vague, shadowy 
contours, people began to gather round the temple. All 
their weapons they had left under guard in their tents. 

The temple at Gaulum was an old chief temple built 
long before the house became a Jarl’s seat. The dig- 
nity of high priest had from time immemorial descended 
from father to son, and Atle Jarl the Slender had thus 
inherited it. The temple was a large and spacious edi- 
fice, built of heavy beams, with its entrance by a main- 
wall furnished with gables. Burning and smoking 
pitch-torches hung fixed in heavy iron rings on the 
walls, each watched by a serf. On entering, one per- 
ceived in this flickering light only indistinct images of 
gods who sat on their platforms behind a low partition- 


86 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
wall away at the opposite end of the temple. Within 
the wall no ordinary person ventured to tread; only 
the priest and his consecrated assistants, helpers in 
the sacrifice, might go there. The gods sat arranged 
in a spacious semicircle. There were several of them, 
both male and female. Most were splendidly dressed, 
some even adorned with gold rings and precious stones. 
But the three chief gods, Odin, Thor, and Frey, who 
sat in the midst of the semicircle, drew the spectator’s 
chief attention. In the centre' was enthroned Thor — 
here, as in many other places in Norway, the chief ob- 
ject of worship. Thor sat in his thunder-chariot, to 
which were yoked painted goats with gilded horns. 
The goats were on wheels, as though on the point of 
drawing the chariot from its place in the chief pro- 
cession at Thor’s festivals. In his right hand Thor 
held his short-handled hammer high uplifted. He had 
an awe-inspiring aspect. Straight in front of him was 
a thin slab of rock with a sharp upper edge, placed 
edgewise. 

On the right of Thor sat Odin in a waggon, both 
larger and more magnificent than Thor’s, but without 
animals to draw it. Odin sat on a chair adorned with 
runes and sacred signs. He held a long spear in his 
hand, and stared threateningly with his one eye. 

On the left of Thor sat Frey. His platform was a 
great stone, covered with a parti-coloured carpet. In 
contrast to the other gods he sat naked, holding a stag’s 
horn, his only weapon, high in his right hand. 

In the midst of the semicircular space, on a special 
elevation, stood a great stone basin in which the blood of 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 87 
the offerings was collected. In the bowl lay a rod, used 
to stir the blood and then to sprinkle it around. On 
the mound lay, besides, the Sacred Bracelet, a heavy, 
open circlet of gold, inscribed with sacred signs, on 
which all oaths were taken. 

When the people had assembled in the temple, Atle 
Jarl the Slender entered, followed by his assistants. 
He wore white clothes with red borders. His assistants 
were also dressed in white. 

When Atle Jarl entered, carrying a broad-bladed, 
long-handled ax over his shoulder, taller by head and 
shoulders than most of those present, thin and erect like 
the branch-lopped stem of a fir, he caused a gasp in 
many a young breast, and even old, hardened Vikings 
felt a slight shudder in their backs. This man stood 
at that moment in covenant with the gods. They were 
brought into touch with the Unknowable. There was a 
death-like silence in the temple. 

Atle Jarl walked with dignity between the thick- 
packed masses of men on both sides. At the partition- 
wall his assistants remained standing for a while; only 
the priest could go within. He placed the ax on the 
mound where the basin stood. He saluted the three 
chief gods with a slow and solemn bending of the knee 
before each, and then included the other gods in one. 
Then he went back muttering secret words, took the 
sacrificial bracelet from its place, and drew it on his 
right arm, seized the ax with his left hand, and raised 
his right arm in command. That was a signal to the 
door-guard. 

The most splendid of all the sacrificial animals, a 


88 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
coal-black ox with shining head and large, crooked 
horns, was brought in by serfs, and led to the partition- 
wall by other serfs, chosen as sacrificial helpers, and 
consecrated to the service. At the same time two of 
the priest’s assistants came forward, lifted the bowl 
from the mound, and placed it a little way off. The 
ox resisted violently when led in, and uttered angry 
bellowings. It foamed with frenzy, and showed the 
whites of its eyes. 

Atle Jarl stood with his left foot advanced and his 
ax lifted in both hands. At the instant the ox was 
placed in the proper spot the ax fell with a powerful 
and practised aim on its neck. The beast gave a bellow 
and sank on its knees. Immediately the serfs stood over 
it with long knives. A stab in the neck and a cut 
between the neck arteries, and then down with it to the 
basin, so that the precious sacrificial blood should not 
be spilt. Meanwhile, one of the assistants kept stirring 
the blood in the bowl with a rod so that it should not 
coagulate. 

When the last drop of blood had been drawn off in 
the bowl, the assistants raised the dead body by a rope 
and carried it beyond the partition-wall. There it was 
received by other serfs, who carried it outside and 
immediately set to work to skin it. 

Other animals were now brought forward. One by 
one they were killed, and their blood emptied into the 
bowl. But their bodies were not carried out after- 
wards, like the ox’s. They were thrown on one side, and 
left to wait till the sacrifices were over. 

A speckled bull was offered to Frey. All the other 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 89 
animals were offerings to Odin, the god of battle, so 
that he should give success and victory to the Viking 
expeditions which would take place in the summer. 

Last came Thor’s only offering — the serf-woman, 
Trude, was brought forward. A pair of serfs dragged 
her to the wall, where two assistants received her and 
stripped her rags from her body. The crowd waited 
breathlessly. But not a groan or a gasp came from 
the serf-woman, Trude. She was dragged by her hair 
before the Hammer-wielder, lifted up, and laid with the 
small of her back crosswise over the sharp edge of the 
stone altar. Then Atle Jarl made the sign of the 
hammer over the offering, and the serfs pressed her 
down. A scream of unspeakable terror tore through 
the air, and died away in a blood-curdling low, quiver- 
ing wail. With broken back the serf -woman, Trude, lay 
across Thor’s sacrificial stone. 

The bowl filled to the brim was now lifted by the 
assistants and set on its mound again. Atle Jarl drew 
the sacrificial bracelet off his arm, rubbed it in the 
blood, and drew it on his arm again. Then he took 
the rod and began sprinkling the steaming blood around. 
First he sprinkled Odin, then Thor, then Frey, and 
afterwards each of the gods. Also the walls, ceiling, 
and floor he sprinkled with the protective sacrificial 
blood. When Atle Jarl had finished the ceremonies 
within the partition-wall, the assistants lifted the bowl, 
and, sprinkling the blood on the right and the left, he 
went out of the temple, followed by the assistants bear- 
ing the bowl. When it had been emptied of the last 
drop, the bowl was carried back and set in its place. 


90 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

But the sacrifices were not yet over. Odin’s chariot 
was now drawn out of the temple, and two splendid 
white horses were yoked to it. Then a serf came for- 
ward, chosen for his stature for the part, and was 
dressed in the ox’s skin, with the horns and hoofs hang- 
ing down and the tinkling bells attached to it. 

The procession to Odin’s grove was arranged, with 
Atle Jarl at the head bearing the bloody ax over his 
shoulder. After him came the serf with the ox-skin and 
bells. Then came Odin in his car drawn by white horses 
and surrounded by white-robed assistants. The rear of 
the procession was brought up by the crowd. Silently, 
the creaking of the car and the tinkling bells being the 
only sounds audible in the bright night, the procession 
went forward to Odin’s grove. There were waiting 
already the nine serfs and the criminals, who, by being 
strung up as sport for the winds, should appease the 
storm-god, each tied to his death tree. 

Odin’s car was driven forward to an open space, 
surrounded by sharp stones. Only the priest and his 
consecrated helpers ventured to enter the ring of stories. 
When Odin’s car was brought to the place, and the 
crowd had arranged themselves, the assistants went, two 
by two, to the waiting victims. One fixed the cord and 
made sure that both it and the branch were strong, the 
other loosed the victim’s bonds. One of the serfs wailed 
and begged for his life. He met only contemptuous 
glances, and was kicked and thumped by the assistants. 
As he would not be quiet, they forced a stone in be- 
tween his jaws. 

When Atle Jarl saw that his assistants had finished 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 91 

their preparations he gave a sign. At the same instant 
the victims were strung up all together. Just before 
they had ceased their struggles a whistling sound came 
through the wood. A gust of wind imparted a swinging 
motion to the dangling bodies. A thrill of satisfaction 
mingled with awe went through the hearts of those 
assembled. Odin had accepted the offering. Slowly 
the procession wound its way back from Odin’s grove. 
When they reached the temple, the dead bodies of the 
sacrificed animals had already been carried away by 
serfs, to be flayed and divided. The body of the serf- 
woman, Trude, had also been removed. It had been 
sunk in the holy well by the gable-end of the temple. 
This was not the first victim it had swallowed. 

Odin was drawn to his place on the right hand of 
Thor. A tie Jarl took the sacrificial bracelet off his 
arm and laid it on the mound by the side of the bowl. 
This concluded the first part of the sacrificial feast — 
the slaughter night. The people went to their tents 
and crept under their skins, to get a little sleep. The 
early spring day was already dawning in the east. 


XII 

Ingolf and Leif went silently towards the tent. In- 
golf was pleasantly fatigued, and felt cheerful. He 
enjoyed the mental relaxation and dreamy sleepiness 
which follows when an inner excitement has found its 
natural relief. He went from the ceremony confirmed 
in his faith with strengthened will. He felt himself in 
covenant relation with his ferocious gods. 


92 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

With Leif the case was opposite. He had been 
sickened by the sight and smell of the blood of the 
sacrificed animals. All the rest, and especially Ingolf’s 
behaviour, had had a repelling effect upon him who 
did not believe in the gods, nay, who had a profound 
contempt for these ugly, bedizened images of wood. 
Ingolf’s thorough absorption in the ceremonies had 
made him sick at heart. Here was something he did 
not understand. How could Ingolf quietly watch help- 
less men being ill-treated and murdered in honour of the 
gods? How could he worship gods whom he believed 
he could appease by hanging serfs and criminals in their 
honour? Leif did not understand it. He felt himself 
suddenly alone, and an eager longing for Helga took 
possession of him. There was something about Ingolf 
which was beyond his comprehension. In relation to the 
gods there would always be something to divide them. 
Hitherto this had possessed such a slight significance 
for Leif that he had not given the matter a thought. 
Now it grew suddenly, assumed a shape, and was not 
to be got away from. Ingolf must certainly not become 
aware how great a difference there was between them in 
this respect. For if he did, how could he think of 
entering into brotherhood with him? 

Leif’s emotion seethed and fermented. With every 
step his inward excitement rose higher. To speak out 
to Ingolf would never do; if once he began to speak, 
wild and uncontrolled words would stream from his 
tongue. And he had vowed to himself never to let 
his fiery temperament discharge itself in evil words 
over Ingolf. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 93 
But, on the other hand, the excitement in his mind 
gradually became uncontrollable. And now they were 
so near the tents, that only a few steps more would rob 
him of the opportunity of relieving himself. He stop- 
ped, perplexed, without knowing what he should say or 
do. 

“ Ingolf ! ” he broke out suddenly, as if in bewilder- 
ment ; his voice was hoarse and unrecognizable. Ingolf 
stopped, surprised, and turned towards him. In an 
instant they were confronting each other, Ingolf with an 
astonished, questioning expression in his eyes and face, 
Leif quivering in every limb with an excitement which 
bid fair to derange his mind. He rushed at his cousin, 
flung his arms round him tightly, and hissed from be- 
tween his clenched teeth : “ Look out ! ” 

Ingolf did not understand what he was about, and 
had no time to consider. He needed all his presence of 
mind to keep on his legs, for Leif attacked him with all 
his might, and his strength seemed to increase with his 
exertions. Ingolf was not long in discovering that this 
was serious; he had to defend himself or fall. Leif 
hissed and groaned and bellowed like a maniac. Ingolf 
thought it was best to make an end of it, and passed 
gradually over to the offensive. But it took him time, 
and he needed to exert all his strength to overcome Leif. 
At last he succeeded. He took advantage of a slip on 
Leif’s part, slowly deprived him of his foothold — then 
came the decisive moment — Leif overbalanced and fell. 

Ingolf remained lying on the top of him. He had a 
good grip, and held him fast. Leif’s face was purple 
and swollen, and he foamed at the mouth. His eyes 


94 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

were bloodshot, and were so furious that Ingolf suddenly 

fejt pity for him. 

“ Cousin, be reasonable now,” he begged persuasively. 
But to be overcome in such a purely physical way had 
been too much for Leif. He struggled hopelessly to get 
one arm loose, and when he did not succeed he hissed 
with suppressed rage : “ I could kill you ! ” Ingolf let 

him go at once and sprang up. But Leif did not do 
the same, as he had expected. He had discharged his 
emotions now and had given up. He remained lying 
with his eyes closed, while the shame scorched and burnt 
in his soul. 

Ingolf stood for a little while looking at him. He 
felt the wrath lurking in ambush within himself, and 
bravely fought with it. “ What have I done? ” he asked 
at last quietly. 

Leif did not answer, but remained lying there, quiet 
and motionless, with closed eyes. Within himself he 
was silently and hopelessly wondering how he should set 
about opening his eyes and rising. Ingolf stood look- 
ing at him. He began gradually to understand him, 
and to enter into his feelings. Leif had madly set him- 
self against the gods. But what was the use of so 
attacking him, he would like to know? Well, Leif had 
his peculiarities in everything. Now he lay there and 
was ashamed, and could not bring himself to open his 
eyes. The best thing was to give him a little time to 
collect himself. Ingolf remained standing awhile and 
waited. “ Come now, Leif ! ” he urged, in a friendly 
tone, and Leif rose. Slowly he collected himself and got 
on his legs. Ingolf stood and looked at him with curi- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 95 

osity. His features were relaxed, and his eyes were 
dull and troubled. 

“What was the matter with you?” asked Ingolf 
earnestly, and could not suppress a little laugh. 

Leif stood a short while without answering, as though 
searching his memory for something he had forgotten. 
“ You needn’t trouble yourself about it,” he answered 
in a weary and rather shy tone, but not without a 
certain defiance. “ It was not you I hated, but your 
gods.” 

“ So it was not very strange you could not win, 
cousin,” answered Ingolf cheerfully. “ You are still too 
slight of build to fight with the gods.” 

“ I shall not go with you to a feast any more,” an- 
swered Leif, unaffected by Ingolf’s cheerfulness. “ This 
once I may be allowed to say it, and I beg you not to 
forget it. Your gods and your worship of them are an 
abomination to me, and will always be so. Even if it 
should lose me my brother, I must say it.” 

There was a smothered warmth in Leif’s words which 
made Ingolf serious. 

“ It is just with you, as you are, that I wish to enter 
into brotherhood, Leif,” he answered quietly. “ Your 
relation to the gods is a matter between you and them. 
What you think of my worship of them is your own 
affair. But I am anxious that you should understand 
that I belong with all my soul and will to the gods. 
They were my fathers’ gods ; if I were false to them, I 
should be false to my fathers. Rather would I this 
very moment sacrifice myself to Odin than that that 
should happen.” 


9 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

44 But then it is a sacrifice on your part,” answered 
Leif quietly, “ when you enter into brotherhood with me 
who despise the gods, and so have been false to my 
fathers.” 

Ingolf was silent for a while. 44 It is another matter 
with you than with me,” he answered. 44 I cannot ex- 
plain it, but I feel that it is quite another matter with 
you. I should become weaker by not believing in the 
gods ; you would become so by believing in them. We 
are so different, Leif. And I wish to be your brother 
as you are.” 

44 I will do my best that you may never regret that,” 
answered Leif quietly. 

They went to their tents. It was already nearly day- 
light. In the east the sky was faintly red ; there was 
only a short time to the sunrise. Ingolf and Leif did 
not talk any more. They crept silently into their 
sleeping-bags. But neither of them could close an eye. 
They remained lying quiet till nearly midday. When 
the sun was at its zenith that day, their brotherhood 
was to be sealed. 

Leif was the first who rose. When he had met In- 
golf’s open eyes, he said in a low, cheerful tone : 64 Let 

us run to the stream.” 

Ingolf sprang up. 44 Yes, we will.” They ran to a 
place outside the encampment, where they were in the 
shelter of a cliff, and where they had been accustomed 
to wash themselves when, as small boys, they visited 
their friends at Gaulum. Ingolf dipped his head in the 
water, rubbed hard with both hands, and snorted cheer- 
fully. But Leif flung away every stitch of clothing 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 97 
and lay down in the running water. When Ingolf saw 
it, he immediately followed his example. And so they lay 
side by side in the stream, and let the cold running 
water stream over their bodies, as when they were little 
boys. 

Leif looked at the sun. “We shall have to hurry.” 
They sat for a little while, squeezed the water out of 
their hair, and let the sun and the wind dry their skins. 
But the water remained in drops on their skins and 
would not be dried. Then they took their shirts and 
rubbed each other, and then dressed in a trice. “ Let 
us go slowly back,” said Leif, when they had their 
clothes on, and Ingolf had to look closer at him, for 
such a proposal was very unlike him. Leif answered 
his questioning look. “ Otherwise we shall be so breath- 
less, and we are getting too big now to run like chil- 
dren.” 

When they came up from the little valley in which the 
stream ran, they saw that the people were already 
gathered, and hastened their steps. Leif looked up 
hastily at the sun. “ It is not yet quite midday,” he 
said, relieved, but went on. 

They arrived at the place at the same time as Atle 
Jarl, who as high priest was to conduct the proceedings. 
Atle Jarl, generally a mild and amiable man, wore his 
severest expression that day. He had the sacrificial 
bracelet on his arm and a spear in his hand. A serf 
followed him bearing two turf-cutters and two bright, 
sharp-pointed knives. The people had gathered round 
a circular space, marked out with wooden pegs. They 
readily made way for the two cousins and Atle Jarl. 


98 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
When they reached the place marked out, Atle Jarl 
curtly bade the two future brothers take off their shoes 
and stockings and step into the ring. While they were 
doing so, he himself stepped into the ring, and with his 
spear marked off a semicircle within it. Then Ingolf 
and Leif each received his turf-cutter with orders to 
begin, each on his own side of the semicircle, and cut a 
turf loose, taking care, however, that both its ends re- 
mained firm. The turf that was to be cut loose was to 
remain a living part of the ground. Ingolf was set to 
cut on the outside of the semicircle, Leif on the inside. 
They each dropped on one knee, stuck their turf-cutters 
into the ground, and began to cut. Their task was to 
cut a solid piece of turf which would hold fast when it 
was raised. Ingolf cut with an even, straight stroke; 
he was quiet and undisturbed by the people standing 
and looking at him. Leif, on the other hand, was nerv- 
ous. He began cutting with all his might ; his edge be- 
came bent and uneven, and sweat was pouring from him 
before he had got half through. When the spectators 
saw their different ways of working, they smiled and 
winked at each other. 

Orn and Rodmar stood just outside the ring. Orn 
did not look happy, but he concealed his displeasure 
under a mask of indifference. Rodmar stood and looked 
angrily at Leif. He could hardly restrain himself from 
shouting to him and correcting him. He saw, however, 
clearly that it would only make bad worse, and con- 
trolled himself. But he leant towards Orn and whis- 
pered as though making an excuse. “ Ingolf will need 
all his quiet and strength before he can get Leif tamed.” 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 99 

“ He cannot be tamed,” answered Orn in a low tone, 
but with emphasis in his voice. “ A horse with the 
staggers cannot be broken in ; it is a useless animal, and 
brings ill-luck.” 

“ He is my son,” answered Rodmar, who always found 
fault with Leif but could not bear others doing so. 
66 You judge him too severely.” 

“ He is your son and my kinsman,” Orn whispered 
back sombrely, “ otherwise this ratification of brother- 
hood would not have taken place — at least as long as 
I had a breath left in my body.” 

Ingolf and Leif had now cut loose the piece of turf, 
and went together to lift it. They raised it carefully 
till it stood straight up and formed an arch. Then Atle 
Jarl stepped in and placed his spear in the middle of the 
arch to hold the turf up. He himself stood and sup- 
ported the spear while Ingolf and Leif cut loose an ob- 
long turf under the arch. Their blood was not to run 
on the greensward, but was to mingle on the bare earth. 
When they had finished they gave up their turf-cutters, 
and at Atle Jarl’s command stepped in under the turf 
arch, each on his own side of the spear-shaft. Atle 
Jarl now ditcated the oath, and they vowed mutual 
brotherhood, each with his right hand on the sacred 
bracelet. When the oath had been taken, serfs came 
with knives. Atle Jarl received the knives and handed 
them to the newly-sworn brothers, with the command to 
confirm the brotherhood they had just inaugurated by 
letting their blood flow jointly on the sacred earth. 
Atle Jarl showed them briefly where they should pierce 
their calves with the knives. 


ioo THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Ingolf and Leif both did so at the same moment. 
Ingolf thrust his knife-point well in and cut a deep 
gash. Leif put his knife right through so that the 
point projected a couple of inches on the other side of 
his calf. He had difficulty in drawing it out again. 
The blood ran down in red streams. The spectators 
felt a strange shuddering thrill at seeing how it oozed 
out from under the naked soles of their feet. Leif 
watched the course of his blood attentively as it ap- 
proached Ingolf’s on the brown scar of earth between 
them. As it seemed to him to go too slowly, he stooped 
down, directed the streams of blood with the point of his 
knife, and stirred the blood and earth round between 
him and Ingolf. A laugh then rang out in the air from 
hundreds of throats. Even Orn smiled, though against 
his will, and Atle Jarl’s eyes assumed a milder expres- 
sion. 

Leif looked hastily up and straightened himself with a 
jerk. He looked round, a little astonished, and his eyes 
rested on Ingolf. A very pleasant smile lay on Ingolf’s 
face, and there was a moist glimmer in his eyes. 

Atle Jarl now proclaimed that Ingolf Arnarson and 
Leif Rodmarsson had entered into legal brotherhood, 
and named the witnesses. With that the solemn cere- 
mony was at an end. The grass-turfs were carefully 
laid down again in order that they might grow firm and 
be incorporated with the earth’s life. 

Ingolf and Leif were now joined together by the 
strongest bonds that exist — the blood-tie between 
brothers, the most sacred and inviolable of all blood 
and family ties. The earth by which they had been 


THE SWORN BROTHERS ioi 
formed in different mothers’ wombs had now drunk 
their blood mingled, and had at the same time given 
them new birth, since they had passed together under 
the turf arch, a part of earth’s living frame. The 
earth knew now, and had recognized their covenant — 
a covenant no power could break. The sons of Atle 
were the first who approached to tender their good 
wishes on the occasion. 

Haasten pressed Ingolf’s hand and whispered con- 
fidentially: “ You have in Leif made a brother who at 
any time and without hesitation will give his blood for 
you to the last drop. Keep always a watchful eye on 
him, for his mind is as easily moved as a willow, but it 
has also the willow’s toughness.” 

Holmsten handed over to Leif a broad-bladed, long- 
shafted battle-ax with a handle inlaid with gold, a 
splendid weapon, which made Leif colour with joy. 
“ Here is an ax for you, friend Leif,” he said cheer- 
fully. “ Swing it bravely, but take care that you do 
not absent-mindedly come to cleave your friends’ heads 
with it ! ” 

Leif was moved to tears. He kissed Holmsten for the 
ax. Leif and Holmsten’s friendship lasted for whole 
days, to the great joy and relief of Ingolf and Haasten. 
They had never before been able to keep the peace for 
even a few hours at a time. Ingolf began to believe that 
the costly gifts which had been exchanged between 
Holmsten and Leif must have some special significance. 
He felt unusually cheerful in spirits that day. Leif also 
felt a peace and sense of security which was strange to 
him. It was as though the responsibility which he had 


102 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
assumed in entering into brotherhood evoked his man- 
hood. He seemed to have suddenly grown adult. His 
mind had found an equilibrium, which acted beneficially, 
and was plainly traceable in his bearing. 

Evening came, and the second night of the sacrificial 
feast was about to commence. As people began to go to 
the temple, Leif said to Ingolf : “ I shall not go. I 

shall remain at home in the tent.” 

“ Very well, I won’t go either,” said Ingolf, and tried 
to appear as though it were a matter of indifference to 
him. 

But Leif would not hear of that. “ Those who know 
me will not be surprised that I remain away,” he said. 
“ It is another matter with you. If you won’t go alone, 
you will oblige me to go with you, and I don’t much like 
going there.” 

At last Ingolf went alone. When he entered the 
temple the people were already assembled with great 
jubilation and much noise. On the floor there was 
burning a fire from one end of the temple to the other 
outside the partition-wall. This fire, named Langildene 
(“ the long fires ”), could be crossed at various points, 
though only by going through the lambent flames. 
Over it hung great cauldrons, whence the fumes of the 
meat of the sacrifices filled the air with vapour and smoke 
tempting to hungry stomachs. 

Tables and benches were arranged on both sides of the 
fire. It was some time before each man had his horn. 
Then Atle Jarl rose, consecrated the drinking, and 
proposed the toast in honour of Odin. It was a toast 
for Victory and Might, and everyone had to empty his 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 103 
horn to the bottom. Some made the sign of the hammer 
over the horn of mead. They were those who trusted 
in their own power and might. They consecrated their 
drinking to Thor. Now other serfs entered, bearing 
great dishes. They fished the meat out of the cauldrons 
with hooks, filled the dishes, and bore them round. 
Then began a festive battle for the best morsels, with 
shouting and laughter which shook the temple. 

Women now entered, lifted the gods down from their 
platforms, took off their dresses, and began to rub them 
with the fat of the sacrificial animals. This was a very 
solemn ceremony. 

When the guests had appeased their first hunger, full 
horns stood again before them. Atle Jarl blessed the 
drinking, and they all emptied their horns in honour of 
Thor. Then they ate again, but now quietly and de- 
liberately. The dishes were emptied and filled anew. 
There was no scarcity of food or of beer. 

They drank horns to Njord and to Frey for peace 
and fertility. They drank a horn to Brage, with which 
they pledged solemn vows. Last of all, Atle Jarl rose, 
always steady on his legs and firm in his voice (he had 
tasted mead before), blessed the drinking, and proposed 
a toast in memory of their deceased kinsmen. That 
toast used not to be very widely observed — by that 
time many lay under the table. Others had gone out- 
side, and the rows of the feasters grew thinner. 

When Ingolf had gone to the temple, Leif’s newly 
found mental equilibrium suddenly forsook him. He 
was overcome by a feeling of disquiet, strong and not to 
be shaken off — a fit of impatience which rankled in his 


104 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
breast, and made him perspire and feel unwell. Some- 
thing must be done, he knew not what, until it suddenly 
became clear to him that he could not do without Helga 
any longer. He ran home to the house and got hold of a 
serf, whom he sent with a message to Ingolf. Then 
he took a bridle in his hands and a saddle over his 
shoulders and went off to find his horse. There was a 
strange feverishness in all his proceedings, but he was 
cheerful and light of heart, as was always the case when 
he had overcome uncertainty and betaken himself to 
action. He found his horse, caught and saddled it, 
and went straight homewards at full gallop. He dared 
not think at all, for it was plain to him that it would 
be too long before he could see Helga, and the thought 
made his heart sick. A feeling of longing was on him, 
a longing of the strong kind, which grows in force if 
one gives way to it. His rapid riding gave him relief, 
and released him from thinking. He entered into a 
strange relation with the paths he rode by, and every 
stone and bush which he passed on the way. A pasture 
which he went by reminded him of the horse, and he 
dismounted, took off the saddle and bridle, and lay 
down. The horse rolled on its back awhile, then rose 
and began grazing eagerly. This haste seemed to quiet 
Leif’s longing, and he lay comfortably there. He al- 
lowed the horse to still its sharpest pangs of hunger, but 
soon his patience was over, exhausted and vanished. 
He saddled the horse again and went off at full gallop. 
Daylight came, and he was forced to stop and let the 
horse breathe and graze a little. This time Leif could 
not lie still, while it was grazing. He sat a little, walked 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 105 
a little, and was restless. Long before the proper 
time he saddled the horse again, but before mounting 
this time he patted its neck and head, scratched it be- 
hind the ear, and spoke kindly to it : “If you hold out, 
I will remember you as long as we both live ! ” 

So it carried him forward again, over hill and dale, 
over smooth, grassy plains and stony tracts, over clear 
streams and roaring rivers. The horse’s clattering 
hoofs awoke in the air alternately falling and rising 
echoes. So the incredible was accomplished, and the 
length of the way slowly overcome. One morning at 
sunrise Leif arrived home. Helga stood outside the 
house as though she had expected him, and the world 
seemed new. 

“ It is you, Leif,” said Helga, and did not conceal her 
gladness. Leif had already sprung from his horse. He 
ran to her and flung his arms around her. “ Helga,” 
he said, and kissed her. “ I had to come home all at 
once.” Helga laughed. 

“ I dreamt of you last night,” she said, and kissed 
him. “ That was what I dreamt.” 

“ What ? ” asked Leif. 

“ That I kissed you.” 

And she kissed him again. That was a happy day. 


































BOOK II 











I 


Y EARS passed and nothing happened. There was 
much talk of disturbance and disquiet in the 
north of the country. The young King Harald and his 
uncle, Guttorm, were continually engaged in warfare. 
Various raisers of disturbance had already been sup- 
pressed, but new ones were continually starting up. 
The latest rumour current was, that the young King 
purposed, as soon as he had given peace to his King- 
dom, to extend it. It did not look as if he had peace- 
ful intentions. Dalsfjord as yet was ravaged only by 
rumours. No events themselves, only the faint thunders 
they aroused, came near there. 

Orn, however, was always of opinion that it was safest 
for Rodmar to remain; especially as Leif had now 
undertaken the management of the property, and Rod- 
mar might as well remain in one place as another. 

Much beer was brewed in Ora’s house. Perhaps it 
was not without some connection with this that Orn and 
Rodmar’s talk took all the more a prophetic tinge. 
Obscure and rather disconnected wisdom flowed liberally 
from their lips. Leif called this wise talk nonsense, and 
was not ashamed to laugh openly in his father’s face 
when he was more wise and obscure than ever. Ingolf, 
on the other hand, although with some difficulty, con- 
tinued to invest Orn with a halo of dignity, and showed 
109 


no THE SWORN BROTHERS 

him all possible filial reverence. He always consulted 
him in important questions, although certainly only 
for form’s sake. And he never brought forward a 
matter without having first procured permission to* 
speak. This pleased Orn in a high degree, although 
he sometimes felt somewhat embarrassed by it, and al- 
most always showed peevishness to his son. 

Orn was by no means easy to deal with. For ex- 
ample, Ingolf, at the beginning of the spring when he 
completed his nineteen winters, went to him to hear his 
opinion regarding the sowing plans he had made for 
the summer, and also about a necessary enlargement 
of the salt-kilns. Orn looked up at him with a scornful 
and malicious look in his drink-swollen eyes, heard fully 
all he had to say, and at last broke out harshly on him. 

“You are only a peasant! A good-for-nothing you 
are, although you are tall and heavy enough ! Yow 
wear the family bracelet! What honour have I from 
you? There is no energy in you. Do you think one 
finds honour in the fields? Do you think one can 
plough it out of the ground? Food you find, but never 
any honour. Do you think a man keeps fresh by burn- 
ing salt all his life? Keep away from me with your 
salt-burning and your sowing-plans. Would any one 
believe you were a free man’s son, and soon full grown? 
Speak with the serfs about it. No — Harald, Halv- 
dan the Black’s son — there is a fellow with some stuff 
in him ! You’ll feel his knuckles one day — wait and 
see ! He’ll mark you all with the brand of slavery — 
every man of you. Each and all of you will have to 
pay tribute to him, if you do not want to be shorter 


THE SWORN BROTHERS hi 
by a head or to have your necks stretched ! It is said 
that he intends to subdue all Norway and to become 
sole King. How old are you now? Nineteen winters? 
He is four years younger ! You are no King — no ! 
You are right in that. But your forefathers were 
chiefs, and ruled themselves, and ruled others as the 
King’s peers. Go off to your fields and your salt- 
burning — I won’t listen to you any more. I won’t 
see you! Go! Ha! Wait a little. Go first to the 
smith, and have your fathers’ weapons smelted down 
into meat-axes! Have you not increased your stock? 
Are you not in want of meat-axes ! No, it was some- 
thing different in my youth. If I had been in my 
prime now, the good Harald would have found at least 
one neck he could not break. Unless, indeed, I had 
deemed it wisest to assist him. That also might be a 
way to honour. But you have only thoughts for your 
fields and your salt-burning. Go ! ” 

Thus Orn spoke, and was very irritable. Ingolf 
listened to him patiently without moving a muscle. 
And when he received the command to go he retired with 
a respectful salute. He honoured the family in his 
father, and did not wear the family bracelet in vain 
on his young arm. Ingolf looked after his property; 
Leif neglected his. For the first two years Leif had 
managed remarkably well alone. But when it no longer 
amused him to rule and give orders to the house-ser- 
vants, he began to become somewhat careless. It was 
to his advantage that his people were reliable and 
fond of him — remarkably so, in fact. He might scold 
them thoroughly, using the whole of his copious vocabu- 


1 1 2 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
lary until his voice failed him. He might beat them 
and abuse them, and bid them ten thousand times to 
go the straight way north or down to hell. They 
admired his readiness of speech and energetic irrita- 
bility. It was always enlivening to see him in a rage. 
And it was characteristic of him that his wrath was 
forgotten as soon as it had blazed up. It flashed up 
like a fire of pine-needles and burnt out at once. Be- 
sides, he was not small-minded, and let every one manage 
his own affairs, so long as he minded his work. He 
was a kind and cheerful master to serve under. Many 
plants grew in his track, but never the plant of dull- 
ness. 

Ingolf had another way with his people. He imme- 
diately became a father and providence for them. He 
was considerate towards the old, and let them have 
an easy time. They were never weary of blessing him. 
He visited them often, and his visit was always like 
a gift. He showed an equable temper with his people, 
demanded a certain amount of work from them, and 
expressed in encouraging words his satisfaction with 
work well done. On the other hand, no one had ever 
heard a threat from his mouth. He had his own way 
of showing displeasure by a certain indifferent silence 
which did not fail of its effect. No one liked to feel 
himself the object of that quiet taciturnity. His peace- 
ful manner diffused a peculiar sense of security around 
him. He was careful in his choice when he engaged 
new people, which rarely happened. Those whom he 
had once engaged remained with him. 

Leif could not alter his nature; he was just Leif, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 113 
once and for all. When he had managed his property 
with diligence and watchfulness for three years it 
amused him no longer. He began to slacken, and let 
things go at haphazard. And since they did not seem 
to go altogether badly that way, he gradually pre- 
ferred not to look after them at all. So Ingolf found 
him going idle for whole months at a time. Ingolf 
wondered at him. How could he choose to go on and 
undertake nothing? No, that was going too far. In- 
golf secretly kept an eye on Leif’s property, and saw 
that it was managed in some way without him, although 
not thoroughly. So there was all the less reason for 
him to interfere in Leif’s way of living. There re- 
sulted a good deal of restraint between the two sworn 
brothers which was unavoidable. Ingolf tried his best 
not to let himself be irritated by Leif’s idle ways. He 
exerted himself to meet him as unconstrainedly as before. 
But his openness was not natural as it used to be, and 
seemed forced. Leif noticed it without thinking about 
it, and the feeling of restraint between them continued. 

Only seldom did Leif follow Ingolf to the fields or to 
other business. Their unconscious inner tension robbed 
their intercourse of all outer comfort or heartiness. 
The sense of brotherhood and family feeling between 
them decreased greatly, and threatened to vanish. 

Ingolf betook himself to work as a defence. He 
wrapped himself in business as in a coat of mail, and 
work shielded him to a certain extent. But the un- 
avoidable vacant hours were like rents in his armour. 
And the weapons Ingolf had to fight against imme- 
diately found every exposed place. 


1 14 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Leif was not the man to notice that something had 
happened when nothing had really done so. He only 
felt boredom and emptiness, and the difficulty there is 
in making time pass when like a refractory horse it 
begins rearing on its hind-legs. Either he sat alone 
with Helga and let the hours fly, or he simply lay 
and lazed somewhere, staring into space and wonder- 
ing what purpose there can be in a useless day. His 
mind became every day more unbalanced, and his 
temper was like a sportive squirrel. Sometimes his 
restlessness and impatience impelled him to tease and 
vex those who surrounded him. Not even Helga es- 
caped; on the contrary, just because she was the most 
helpless before him, it was she who suffered most. Not 
rarely his words made her cry. Afterwards he sat 
silent and helpless, unable to repair what he had done, 
and feeling intolerable pain. 

Leif’s only excuse was that he was Leif and had lost 
his balance. The hopeless melancholy of youth was 
upon him. 

Years passed and nothing happened. Hitherto each 
year had had one event. They visited Gaulum, or 
Atle’s sons visited them. One winter Leif and Ingolf 
were invited to the feast at Gaulum; the next winter 
they were the hosts. Hitherto in Leif’s mind there had 
been a halo about these feasts ; he had awaited them 
with eagerness and taken part in them with a happy 
fervour of abandonment. Now he hardly cared to 
think of them any more, and had quite ceased to take 
pleasure in them. 

For there had gradually risen in Leif’s mind, al- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 115 
though he carefully concealed it, a strong ill-will against 
Atle’s sons, especially Holmsten. Holmsten had al- 
ways been a thorn in his side. Holmsten’s voice and 
vocabulary, his smile, his way of being silent, and his 
whole character had an irritating effect on Leif. At 
times, when he was not especially sensitive, he could, as 
it were, lock such feelings out. But there were other 
times when he stood and actually shivered with irrita- 
tion merely at seeing and hearing Holmsten. But, 
faithful to his oath of brotherhood and promise to In- 
golf, he suppressed all feelings of that kind as best he 
could. In any case, they never broke out. Thus it 
happened that Holmsten once in a humourous mood 
made merry over Leif’s appearance. He meant noth- 
ing serious by it, but an innocent remark about Leif’s 
large nose slipped thoughtlessly out of his mouth. 
When he saw what effect it had upon Leif, who became 
quite red in the face, he was immediately sorry, and 
said nothing. When Leif had thus come to know what 
he looked like, his eyes were suddenly opened to see 
how handsome Atle’s sons were. From that day it was 
that he began to hate them in his heart, especially the 
youngest. He now noticed also how they looked at 
Helga, when they were on a visit. He did not like those 
looks. Of course he could well understand that they 
could scarcely keep their eyes from Helga. But Helga 
was his, and that made a difference. And although 
Atle’s sons could not know that, yet at any rate they 
ought not to look at Helga so. It was especially 
Holmsten with whom Leif found himself angry — 
Holmsten, whose existence from the time that Leif was 


ii 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
a boy had rankled like a thorn in his mind. Holmsten 
was undeniably the handsomest of the brothers, per- 
haps because he, as the youngest, was now at the 
handsomest age. Moreover, it was Holmsten whose 
look fastened on Helga with the greatest pertinac- 
ity. 

Leif was pained, and suffered. The most intolerable 
part about it almost was that it was impossible for him 
to let Helga notice his jealousy. She did not give the 
slightest occasion for it, but that did not comfort Leif 
at all — on the contrary. This made Leif’s behaviour 
towards her rough and unintelligible. She was almost 
obliged to believe that he was no longer as fond of her as 
he had been, since he at times could do without her. It 
was only the pain in his look, even when he behaved in 
the most capricious way, which quieted her doubts. Yet 
she went about sometimes with such pensive eyes. 
There sat Leif, with a feeling of emptiness like a man 
who must see the most precious thing he possesses slip 
out of his hand, and cannot move a finger. Leif could 
at times become so anxious about Helga that all glad- 
ness and pleasure in life forsook him. Often she looked 
at him with a questioning and troubled look, and shut 
herself within herself. 

The summer after Leif had completed seventeen and 
Ingolf nineteen winters, Atle’s sons for the first time 
went on a Viking expedition. That summer was the 
worst Leif had ever experienced. The want of occupa- 
tion, and the complete absence of all events, became 
doubly intolerable now that he knew that other young 
men, who were not much more than his own equals in 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 117 
age, were sailing out on the wide ways of the sea, mak- 
ing the acquaintance of foreign people and lands, 
trafficking or fighting with those whom they encountered 
wherever they went, and, in any case, having new expe- 
riences every day and every hour of the day. These 
thoughts were so painful that Leif at times became 
quite poorly and depressed when they attacked him. 

That summer there arose besides in his distracted and 
uneasy mind a besetting idea, which, when it had once 
taken root, was not to be shaken off. Suppose Holm- 
sten should be killed that summer, how would Helga 
receive the news when she heard it? He could sit 
silent and watch her for hours at a time in order to 
discover an answer to this question. Sometimes he 
introduced the Viking expedition of Atle’s sons as a 
topic of conversation before her. She did not seem 
specially interested in it, but talked willingly, though 
without great interest, about it. These conversations 
gave Leif a strong impression of woman’s falsity ! 

At last there came a day when he could hold out no 
longer, threw away all shame, and went to Helga and 
told her that news had come from Atle’s sons that 
Holmsten had fallen. Helga sat for a while pensive 
and serious. “ So we shall never see him more,” she 
said, with a slight tremor in her voice. “ I cannot 
really imagine Atle’s sons without thinking of them all 
three together — so I remember them the first time I 
saw them, so one always saw them. His brothers will 
be very grieved at losing him.” 

Leif listened breathlessly, but her words and tone 
made him no wiser. “ Was it Haersten — or Haas- 


1 1 B THE SWORN BROTHERS 

ten ? ” he thought. “ I should have told her that all 

three had fallen.” 

Utterly discomfited by this frustration of his attempt 
at surprise, he gave it up altogether. Now he was 
reckless. “ That is not true,” he confessed wearily. 
66 There has come no news from Atle’s sons.” 

Helga became quite silent from surprise. Her aston- 
ished look rested almost anxiously upon him. “ How 
can you take it into your head to say such things ? ” 

Leif looked maliciously and despairingly at her. 
“ It is still too early to weep for Holmsten,” he said 
coldly and scornfully. Then he rose suddenly and went. 
As he stepped out of the door, a burst of cheerful, 
rippling laughter broke out behind him. “ Why does 
she laugh?” he thought, anxious and angry at the 
same time, but did not turn round to examine her face. 
The rest of the day he kept puzzling about her laugh. 
Did she laugh because it was not true that Holmsten 
had fallen, or did she only laugh at him, because she 
had discovered that he was jealous of Holmsten? For 
the rest it seemed to Leif that neither was a laughing 
matter. So morbid had he gradually become that all 
laughter seemed to him suspicious and unbecoming. It 
took Helga several days to eradicate the effects of her 
laughter from Leif’s mind. Even kisses and embraces 
seemed ineffectual. He suffered from his peculiar ob- 
stinate temper, insisting that he had been insulted, but 
unable to overcome it. It required a severe effort before 
he could bring himself to repay Helga’s gentleness with 
the same. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 119 

But then he seemed all at once to have become quite 
different. It seemed as though the exposure he had 
made of himself had cured him. He felt an immense 
relief. Now he had, at any rate, proof that Helga 
would neither become white as snow, nor fall dead, even 
if she should hear that Holmsten had fallen. He began 
gradually to surmise that his jealousy was only a cob- 
web of the brain. 

Besides this, a thought had taken possession of him 
which drove all spiteful spectres out of his mind. As 
early as the next summer he would go on a Viking 
expedition himself. He would not remain here and 
become prematurely old and peevish. It was true that 
at summer-time he would still be two years short of the 
regular Viking age. But Ingolf would at that time be 
of the right age and could get his going legalized — 
for Ingolf would go too, as a matter of course. They 
could not go about at home for ever and become moss- 
grown without and mouldy within. 

“ Look at the old men ! 99 he broke out, when in words 
that stumbled over each other he made Helga privy to 
his plan. “ Must one not be sorry for them? Yet 
they have been young once. This is what age makes of 
people. It is better, when one is good for nothing else 
but boasting, to have something to boast of, than for 
want of experiences to become a wretched liar.” 

“ Do you think that you will some day become like — 
like your father? ” asked Helga, smiling. She thought 
Rodmar was worse than Orn. 

“ Without doubt,” answered Leif decidedly. “ I can 


120 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
certainly not realize it. But why should I become 
otherwise? Must they not have once been young and 
full of life? Now they drivel!” 

Helga sat for a little while and thought. And while 
she thought, her expression changed and became pensive 
and serious. 

“ You are so imprudent, Leif,” she said, with anxious 
eyes, “ I fear you w r ill be killed in your first battle.” 

Leif laughed arrogantly. “ Have you not noticed 
that I am invulnerable,” he outbroke, with a beaming 
smile, “ that nothing can injure me? There is some- 
thing or other which protects me. I have thought 
about it. It can only be your love, Helga. What else 
should it be? ” 

Helga kissed him. She had tears in her eyes. “ If 
my love can protect you, Leif, you are invulnerable. 
My own friend, do whatever you will, only do not quite 
forget me.” 

Leif hurried from the place to meet Ingolf. And 
when he found him he as so completely the old Leif, 
with body and soul intent upon a definite object, that, 
with the stream of his talk and the irresistible absolute- 
ness of his manner, he swept all ill-humour out of In- 
golf’s mind. Now that Leif had become quite himself 
again, Ingolf needed no more to be on the watch regard- 
ing his own attitude towards him. Ingolf stood quite 
quietly, listened to him, and allowed him to talk freely, 
without the slightest attempt at interruption. He 
merely stood and looked at him, and enjoyed feeling 
how his eagerness infected his own mind like a happy 


1 2 I 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
excitement. Ingolf felt at that moment a gladness 
which he had forgotten. He could have embraced his 
brother. 

While Leif spoke further and developed his plans, 
Ingolf pondered. He only followed Leif’s stream of 
talk with one ear, only to ensure that nothing important 
escaped him. Meanwhile, he subjected the project to 
independent consideration. Perhaps it was, at any 
rate, over early to join in a Viking expedition just now. 
Perhaps they ought rather to wait a couple of years ; 
Leif was so young, and was still not of the warrior’s age. 
But, on the other hand, Leif needed a change just now. 
And he was quite self-reliant, though not of the proper 
age. They could also train themselves in the use of 
weapons in the winter. If they waited, Leif would again 
become strange and not to be understood or put up 
with. For Leif’s sake they must go. How completely 
he was again the old Leif, even in his thoughts ! 

Ingolf concluded his considerations by saying : 66 1 

will talk with my father about the matter,” in the middle 
of Leif’s stream of words. Then Leif became uncon- 
trollable for a while. He seized hold of Ingoff and 
whirled him round. He knew that with this sentence 
the matter was decided. But it seemed to him when, 
out of breath he let his laughing brother go, that he 
absolutely must say something about Om. 

“ The old blusterer ! ” he snorted contemptuously. 
“ To think that we should guide ourselves by his opinion. 

Well, do as you like. Only forget not to say that we 
shall bring wine home for him — much wine. Then you 


122 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
will see how tractable he will become. I will promise 
my father the same, in order to make him willing to 
give up the keys of the weapon-chest.” 

Ingolf went to his father, put the matter in a few 
words before him, asked him for ships and merchandize, 
and first and foremost for his consent to their making 
an expedition the next summer. 

While Ingolf talked, Orn sat with a dull look and an 
unwilling expression in his face, as if it was with diffi- 
culty that he heard him to the end. “ Ships and mer- 
chandize are your own,” he answered peevishly, when 
Ingolf was silent. “ You can do with both what you 
will, and it would not surprise me if you returned home 
empty-handed. Leif will still prove a costly brother to 
you. He will be captured, and you will have to pay the 
ransom. Keep a good watch on the ships, and don’t 
let yourself be cheated in trafficking. When they offer 
you one cask of wine for a bear’s skin, you should ask 
three, then you will get two. For the rest, you can go 
anywhere in the world as far as I am concerned, if only 
you do not disgrace your father. Go ! No, wait a 
little. If Atle’s sons go again on an expedition in the 
summer, show that you have a little intelligence, and 
go with them. Then you will be five together, and can 
better hold your own where you go. But if you return 
home without a good stock of red wine from the land 
of the Franks, I will never see you before my eyes, or 
hear so much as the sound of your voice. Go ! ” 

Leif also talked with his father. He was extravagant 
in his description of the matter, and lavish in promises. 
He simply told his father that now in Ireland and the 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 123 
British Isles grape-wine from all the lands of the earth 
could be bought. When the old Rodmar, made young 
again by the thought of earth’s flowing glories, began 
to talk of travelling with them, Leif changed his tone, 
and pictured the dangers and fatigues of the journey 
in vivid colours. Then Rodmar shrivelled into himself 
again and gave up the thought of travelling. 

But Leif got the keys of the weapon-chest, and for 
the first time obtained his father’s blessing. 

Ingolf told Leif that his father had proposed that 
they should join with Atle’s sons in the expedition. At 
first Leif was a little annoyed, but his joy was so great 
that everything else became of secondary importance 
in comparison with the prospect that he was going out 
— out on long journeys in the wide world. He saw at 
once the reasonableness of the proposed arrangement. 
They gained in strength by joining with Atle’s sons, and 
would be invincible. Besides, there would be more ships, 
and the expedition would be a grander thing all round. 
And there was, moreover, something enticing in the idea 
of being with Atle’s sons and witnessing what good and 
evil befell them. 

Perhaps he would have the experience of seeing one or 
more of them fall by the enemy’s hand. That would 
be an experience worth bringing home. When he had 
got so far in his considerations, he gave Ingolf’s pro- 
posal his unconditional approval. 

There was much joy in Om’s house. The old men 
were enlivened, their stories became more cheerful, and 
they were not quite so peevish as before. They already 
anticipated beforehand in their thoughts how the barrels 


124 THE sworn brothers 

of red wine from the land of the Franks would be 
trundled up to the house from the landing-place. They 
knew how a barrel of wine should be handled from the 
moment the bung was drawn out till it stood empty. 
They already became fastidious and difficult to please 
with their thoughts of the red wine. 

From that time they drank only mead. All other 
beer tasted sour, they said, and wrinkled their noses. 
One day Orn summoned Ingolf and reminded him in 
an imperious tone of honey : “ From henceforth only 

mead will be brewed here in the house. Go ! ” 

Ingolf smiled to himself when he came out from his 
father. When no one saw it, he permitted himself now 
and then a smile. Ingolf and Leif had their ships 
examined, and made other preparations. 

Leif spent most days down below at the boat-houses. 
He was indefatigable, and showed a reflectiveness and 
care in his preparations which both surprised and re- 
joiced Ingolf. 

They were to equip three ships, so there was much 
to do in taking goods on board and arranging them, 
especially as the ships had not been used for many 
years, and had therefore to be made taut, tarred and 
thoroughly overhauled. 

Ingolf and Leif divided the work: Leif looked after 
the ships and their equipment, while Ingolf managed the 
properties of both, and arranged for obtaining by ex- 
change goods for the expedition. 

Leif was indefatigable. Neither the autumn’s 
clammy rain nor the winter’s keen frost and furious 
snowstorms overcame his energy. The whole day long, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 125 
and sometimes far into the night, he was at the water- 
side. Helga had to seek him there so that he should not 
be quite apart from her. She was glad to see him so 
happy and absorbed. She was very warm-hearted, and 
when he could spare her some time, it was as though 
he gave her a treasure. When he thus for a time had 
forgotten his work, Helga’s exuberant feeling, mingled 
with the desire to see Leif at work, made her occasion- 
ally remind him that he forgot the time. The energy 
with which he set to work again could be a song of 
secret gladness in Helga’s heart for the rest of the day. 

That winter it was Ingolf and Leif’s turn to visit 
Atle’s sons. Already during their first day at Gaulum, 
Ingolf brought up the subject which was to him at the 
moment of greatest importance. Turning to Haasten, 
he told the brothers that he and Leif had resolved to go 
on an expedition in the summer, and proposed to join 
them under Haasten’s leadership, provided the brothers 
also had determined on a cruise. 

Atle’s sons had had a prosperous summer and were 
going out again. Haasten considered it self-evident 
that they should go in company. He asked his 
brothers’ opinion. Haersten agreed with him. “ Leif 
is two winters short of the regular Viking-age,” an- 
sered Holmsten, with so little reflection that he hardly 
knew he had said it, before the words were out of his 
mouth. 

Leif coloured. And as was always the case when he 
became angry, he involuntarily straightened himself. 
“ Let us see if I stand back in any matter, when occa- 
sion arises,” he answered, keeping calm successfully. 


126 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
“ If not, is there any reason for setting me aside on ac- 
count of my youth? ” Ingolf stood pale and resolute. 
“ Leif and I go together,” he said slowly. “ I did not 
think this objection possible, or I would not have 
brought forward any proposal for fellowship. Yet 
we all know how common it is that the elder lawfully 
take the younger. Now, yet us talk no more about it. 
We brothers are men enough to make our way for our- 
selves.” 

“ I for my part am willing to go in fellowship with 
you both,” answered Holmsten quietly and undisturbed, 
“ and willing to take Leif. I only meant by what I 
said to draw attention to the fact that he is not of the 
legal age.” 

“ Then your words were incautious and liable to be 
misunderstood,” said Haasten reprovingly, in a severe 
tone which he seldom used towards his brothers. Then 
turning to Ingolf he continued: “We brothers offer 
you our fellowship, and beg you earnestly not to de- 
cline our offer. We have been friends since we were 
boys. We belong together on sea and on land. I will 
answer for it that we brothers keep our agreement to the 
last drop of our blood and the last farthing in our 
possession.” 

Thus they agreed to sail together on a Viking expedi- 
tion under the leadership of Haasten as the eldest. The 
place and time of their meeting would be further dis- 
cussed with Ingolf at the time of the spring sacrifice. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 


127 


II 

One sunny day in the fresh early summer, when airy 
white clouds were passing across the bright blue sky and 
a cheerful breeze w T as blowing over the dark blue sea, In- 
golf and Leif sailed with their six ships from Dalsfjord 
to meet Atle’s sons at Hisargavl. 

Busy days had preceded their departure. Ingolf had 
in the course of the year collected a quantity of goods. 
They had to be divided among the ships, put on board, 
stowed away, and secured carefully. There were dried 
fish in quantities — some which they had caught them- 
selves, and some bought from Lofoten. There were 
dried skins. There were large bales of wool. There 
was also a quantity of furs, obtained from inland by 
commerce with the Finns ; light wares, minever, and 
other varieties of skins. When the goods had been 
stowed together amidships, the whole heap was covered 
with skins for protection against rain and sea, and well 
secured besides by long ropes and straps of hide. 

The two largest of Ingolf’s and Leif’s six ships were 
dragon-ships. Each had five-and-thirty oars on board, 
in all, seventy oar-holes, and were remarkable warships. 
Splendidly carved dragon-heads, which could be taken 
off and put on at pleasure, towered high over the sharp 
prows, showing their teeth in war-like fashion and with 
tongues stretched out contemptuously against sea and 
sky, storms and enemies. The stern of the ship formed 
the dragon’s tail, was artistically carved, and was, as 
well as the gunwale, adorned with ingenious intertwined 
devices. 


128 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

The other ships were smaller. Two of them had 
thirty oars on board, the others five-and-twenty. They 
were also ornamented with animals’ heads on the bows, 
and devices along the gunwale and stern, although not 
so splendidly as the leading ships. 

Ingolf and Leif stood each on the poop of his dragon- 
ship when the little fleet rowed out from the landing- 
place by Orn’s house. On the higher ground were 
gathered all those who were to remain behind at home. 
While the ships were still near the land, loud shouts 
of farewell were exchanged between those who stayed 
behind and those who were departing. But very soon 
the long, slender ships with their rows of oars crept out 
of hearing. They could then only make signs to one 
another. 

All this fuss about departure annoyed Ingolf. As 
soon as they were in somewhat open water, he had the 
striped, four-sided, square sail hoisted. There was 
only one sail to each ship, but this one could be turned 
round the mast and managed with great ease and skill. 

While they were still near land Leif often turned and 
looked back. He only saw one among the figures of 
those left behind — a girl whose fair hair floated in the 
breeze. She stood so still. Every time he saw her, his 
eyes filled with tears, which blotted her from his view. 
He did his best to refrain from weeping, but was on the 
verge of tears. For the moment the expedition lost 
all its attraction for him. He felt suddenly that wher- 
ever Helga was not, there was only triviality and tedi- 
ousness. If he could have done so honourably he would 
have turned back. He felt the separation so acutely 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 129 
that he was neither aware of the blue sea nor the sunny 
day. He could not understand why he had not before 
considered how impossible it really was to be parted 
from Helga for a whole summer. He suffered, more- 
over, from a painful consciousness that in his joyful 
absorption in the prospect of going on an expedition 
he had not thought of her at all. He hoped that she 
would not feel the separation so severely as he did, but 
immediately retraced the wish. For there was a certain 
consolation in being missed. His distress and inner 
confusion were great. Rapid oars were rowing away 
from Helga and home, which had always made bright- 
ness in his soul, and had now increased indescribably 
in value and attractiveness — rapid oars were rowing 
him away, and he had to let it be so. He was also 
obliged, in order not to let himself fall behind, to pull 
himself together and, following Ingolf’s example, give 
command to hoist the sail. 

The striped sail bellied out joyfully before the breeze. 
The heavily loaded ships pitched moderately. The 
water foamed around their bows and splashed against 
their sides. It was a voyage of the kind which makes 
a man feel peaceful and comfortable. The sting of 
grief in Leif’s consciousness was dulled* His bereave- 
ment was mollified by the joy of journeying. The fjord 
opened out, and angry-looking waves spoke seriously 
with the ships, though always in the most friendly way. 
Willingly and yieldingly, if only they were able to float 
and advance, the ships obeyed the movements of the 
waves. 

The crews on board were very cheerful. Sailing was 


130 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
a pleasure. They raised their ringing voices in a loud 
song, while they looked to the weapons, ground their 
axes, fixed spear-points firm in their shafts, sharpened 
knives, and tested the strength of their bows. The oars 
lay in piles on the forks hung up for that purpose, and 
the wind was friendly enough to do the work. It was 
all as it should be; it was a happiness to live and a joy 
to think that they would soon have use for their weap- 
ons. Arms and legs were stretched out, and muscles 
were carefully and critically felt. Yes, they were all 
right. Some had specially hard and round knots of 
muscle to show, which were felt by all the bystanders, 
and the owners were both congratulated and secretly 
envied. The youngest, and those who had the most 
copious vocabulary, swore by the salt water and the 
golden bristles of the holy boar that they would neither 
admire nor envy. Secretly they promised themselves 
that they would take good swigs from the train-oil 
barrel. 

Thus the day passed, and it was a glorious day. 

By the evening there was only a certain, not alto- 
gether uncomfortable, depression remaining from the 
pain Leif had felt at parting from Helga. The rest 
of it he threw off in sleep. As he saw before him coasts 
which he did not know and had not seen before — per- 
fectly new coasts in varied beauty — his mind took its 
last and decisive turn. Henceforth it only looked for- 
ward. 

“ Is that Norway, too? ” he asked, rubbing his eyes. 
“ And have we sailed the whole night? Norway is great 
and beautiful! It must be splendid to live here.” 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 131 

He swallowed every new view with greedy eyes. 
These strange coasts aroused an intense desire to live 
in him. Here life was lived and many things happened 
— many things which one had no idea of. 

The sworn brothers met A tie’s sons, who also had each 
three ships, at Hisargavl, as they had agreed. And 
carried by a breeze, which had increased to what Vik- 
ings would call a good wind, the fifteen ships steered 
westward over the sea. They intended to go to the 
British Isles and greet the chiefs there. The ships 
glided smoothly over the water, keeping together as 
much as possible. Acquaintances were made between 
the ships, accompanied by mutual promises of beer and 
wine. The new friends swore to drink each other’s 
healths in horns as soon as opportunity offered. There 
was much merriment on board. Here young and old 
felt in high spirits. On the sea they were at home, as 
everywhere where there was a prospect of adventure 
and the clash of weapons. And as the wind increased 
in strength their spirits rose. 

When, next day, there came a storm, their expres- 
sions of joy were not quite so boisterous and demon- 
strative ; now each had something to look after with his 
oar or scoop, but the air on board was full of courage 
and contentment with events as they might arrange 
themselves. A demand was made on their strength, and 
that was not bad, since they had it. They would show 
the old storm-god, Aegir, that they too would gladly 
have a brush with him. “ Come on, Aegir’s daughters, 
whose kiss is wet and salt and in its way burning! 
Come on, you white-tufted, seaweed-adorned young 


132 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
maidens ! The Vikings will not shrink from any em- 
brace, not even when willingly offered. Even Valkyries 
and Aegir’s daughters they will embrace with joy. 
Come on! You will see our fellow’s strength! ” Thus 
they sang and boasted. This voyage made the old feel 
young in soul again and matured the young. Gliding 
along with oar and scoop, they chewed their dry fish. 
They had a long time to wait for any real sleep and rest. 
In the light nights a healthy man sleeps only like the 
birds. If he is on a sea voyage, he closes one eye, takes 
what rest he can get amid the waters, and enjoys the 
night air. For the rest, he chews his dried fish and is 
content. One must take the wind and water as it 
chances. If neither sun nor stars are visible, one sails 
by instinct, which is easy. Odin the All-Father has had 
his offerings, and Njord also is at hand. Perhaps the 
gods guide when the stars fail. And, anyhow, the 
Norns have not lost them from sight. They received 
what was due to them, and that was as it should be. 

After some days and nights of sailing in storm and 
cloudy weather the Vikings sighted land. One sleety 
•morning, after a night of rain, some bare, bleak islands 
emerged from the fog; otherwise they seemed quite com- 
fortable. The sea sang them lullabies, and bordered 
them with white foam along the cliffs, like a certain 
other land. Broad billows broke in mighty abandon- 
ment against rugged coasts. 46 It must be splendid to 
live here,” thought Leif. He stood and stared at the 
land with longing in his eyes. Now they knew where 
they were, and could confidently sail farther. One 
group of islands succeeded another, all equally bleak 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 133 
and bare. The old experienced Vikings informed the 
ignorant that there were the Hjaltland and Orkney 
Islands. The two brothers had heard the names before. 
Now they knew where they were situated. The Ork- 
neys, the Hjaltland Islands — here they lay. 

Ingolf was almost disappointed, though he regarded 
the islands with interest. He said: “ They are desert 
islands ; what good is there in them? ” “ They are easy 

to defend,” an old sea-dog answered him. Immediately 
the islands gained in Ingolf’s estimation, but he did not 
want to live there. 

They sailed farther, and came to other islands, 
equally bleak and bare — - islands with small, narrow 
valleys, and here and there a crooked, worn, storm- 
hardened fir. Those who had not voyaged before, 
learned that these were the South Islands. They lay 
here in the midst of the sea, exposed to everlasting 
storms, roared around by unwearied billows, veiled in 
rain and fog. “ Here the sun seldom shines,” one of 
Leif’s company informed him, “ and certainly never 
for a whole day.” Leif thought that it was a strange 
and melancholy country. There was something in his 
mind which responded to these islands. He would 
gladly live here. 

They sailed on, and found blue sky and sunshine on 
the sea. 

At last they approached the shore of England. 
When Ingolf and Leif saw it, each remained standing on 
his poop dumb with delight, and a song arose in both 
their souls. This was certainly a rich and glorious 
land! Such fertility they had never thought possible 


i 3 4 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
on earth. Did the vine grow here? Leif asked his 
fellow-countryman, with quiet awe in his voice. The old 
greybeard answered him, and said that as far as he 
knew, when he reflected, the vine did not grow in a land 
so far north. “ This land’s fertility and wealth is cer- 
tainly great, but nothing compared to that of the land 
of the Franks,” he concluded. Leif willingly believed 
him, but did not understand. Here it must be good to 
live. In spite of all bedizened wooden gods, here he 
would dwell. “ Or let me first see many lands,” he 
added at once with a ravenous, hungry consciousness 
of not being able to live everywhere. 66 Ah ! The glori- 
ous lands of this earth — there a life is lived which 
one has no part in ! ” he thought to himself, and felt 
empty in soul. 

Haasten had the peace flag hoisted, and they sailed 
towards the land. This would be a good place to trade 
in. They anchored their ships in a little bay among 
wood-covered hills and heights. A crowd of armed men 
had already gathered on the place on the shore where 
they were preparing to land, and stood gazing towards 
the ships. There was evidently a great deal to find out 
on both sides. Yet they seemed, in spite of their weap- 
ons, quite peaceful, and in consequence they also hoisted 
the trade flag. 

The ships arranged themselves side by side, according 
to Haasten’s directions, the first so near to the land 
that it could be made fast by a rope to a rock on the 
shore. 

Men with long hooks stood at the ship’s sterns and 
kept them stationary, till the anchor-stones fell in their 


135 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
proper places, and it was clear that the ships were 
secured. Then a long, slender plank with steps cut in 
it was pushed towards the land. By it Atle’s sons and 
the two sworn brothers with them went ashore. 

The chiefs of the district inquired of them in cour- 
teous language what they had to sell. Haasten told 
them, and asked them in turn what wares could be 
bought here. When all information had been given it 
was clear that both parties wished to trade, and they 
quickly resolved on a two weeks’ peace for that purpose. 

When the peace was made, and hostages given on both 
sides, serfs dragged cauldons and iron stands on shore. 
Other serfs were sent to collect fuel. How good it 
would be to taste hot food again! On board the ships 
no fire could be made ; there one lived on dried fish, dried 
and smoked meat, and bread which gradually became a 
trial to their teeth. That was luxurious fare on board, 
and tasted well in hungry mouths. On land it was an- 
other story; there they liked to sit round a smoking 
pot. The first thing they bought was an ox. There- 
with that day was finished. 

Leif was very restless ; he had to go out and look 
round the neighbourhood. He chose a number of his 
best men, obtained leave to kill game, and gave him- 
self up to roaming about the woods, not so much to 
hunt as to see. He feasted his eyes on the mighty 
forests and the beauty of the calm lakes. He drank 
in joyfully the foreign air, and let his mind be charmed 
by the contours of the foreign landscape. 

But the unrest in his blood would not be quieted. The 
wonderful perfume from all the growths of the earth, 


136 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
the sight of the luxurious overarching fruit-trees in 
blossom, the fragrant scent of the meadows, and the 
profusion everywhere of brightly coloured flowers — 
all these combined to intoxicate him. Besides, he ob- 
tained wine, which he had never tasted before, and was 
transported in gladness and forgetfulness. He also 
looked with restless curiosity in the bright, promising 
eyes of many delightful young women — eyes which 
tempted like ripe fruit. 

When a week had passed in this way, Ingolf spoke to 
him in a friendly and smiling fashion, and reminded him 
that he was forgetting to trade. Leif was a little em- 
barrassed by his smile, and suddenly became very busy. 
It was true he had completely forgotten to trade. He 
went to the market and looked at the wares. And 
when he saw there a quantity of silk goods and richly 
elaborated ornaments of gold, silver, and gilded bronze, 
he remembered Helga, gave himself up to trade, and for- 
got to chaffer about the things. He bought many 
ornaments. As soon as he had bought one, he fell in 
love with another. He bought precious stones, costly 
clothes, and delicate silks. Then his eye fell on some 
artistic gold-embroidered stuffs he had never seen the 
like of, and he bought a quantity of them. Glasswares 
of different kinds, goblets, vessels, and pearls were also 
a speciality ; of them he had to make a copious selection. 
He enjoyed this new experience of looking at things 
and then buying them. An article which he had never 
seen before, and had not the faintest idea that it existed 
in the world, became suddenly his property, and as- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 137 

sumed life and significance. That gave expansion to 
his mind. 

Ingolf kept an eye upon him, and amused himself in 
his quiet way at his method of trading. In commerce 
as in everything else Leif was simplicity itself, and never 
learnt to use his reason or to keep within bounds. In- 
golf let him go on till he found he had gone far enough ; 
then he put the brakes on. 

“ Give me now rather power to trade with your 
wares,” he proposed to him. “ You are no good at 
trade ; you only buy the most unnecessary things, and 
let yourself be cheated into the bargain. In the winter 
you cannot satisfy your hunger with clothes or allay 
your thirst with empty glass goblets.” Leif saw that 
he was right, and willingly granted him the desired au- 
thority. He had bought many things, and felt like a 
king. Already he pictured to himself his homecoming. 
First he would give Helga a single article such as he 
did not possess many of. She would kiss him, and her 
face .would be tinged with a delicate red, as was the case 
when she was happy or emotionally stirred. Then he 
would come with another thing and still another, till 
Helga stood speechless with her eyes full of tears. 
Then he would draw her to himself. . . . 

It seemed to him a very long, dreary summer he was 
approaching. As he was in the act of leaving the mar- 
ket his eye fell on an ornament with carved figures of 
gilt bone. He felt he must have it, even if it cost three 
bear-skins. Ingolf intervened in the matter, and Leif 
obtained the ornament for one bearskin. So he was at 


138 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
length satisfied and gave up all further trading. Then 
he roamed round again in the woods with his little fol- 
lowing, or simply lay and dozed, and let longing and 
delight pass like swift breezes through his mind. “ Ah, 
England,” he thought, “ your land is fertile and your 
women are beautiful.” 

He wished gradually that he could live and be mar- 
ried in all the lands of the earth — preferably all at 
once. He dreamt much of women at that time. He 
imbibed their various charms with much appreciation. 
But sometimes his longing for Helga drove all others 
out of his mind. Helga sat at home and was faithful to 
him, and awaited him with longing. How did the days 
pass with her? His heart began to beat heavily and 
with a feeling of guilt regarding her. She possessed 
him once for all. She was his. Yes, she was like the 
year, and the other women were like days — the fleeting 
days. He compared in his thoughts all the different 
women, who had made an impression on him, with 
Helga. One by one they faded and disappeared as he 
remembered Helga, who was his. They disappeared — 
yes ! But it is to be observed that this lasted only till 
he saw them again, when they again kindled his restless- 
ness and manifold longing. 

The day came when the trade-truce was over. Haas- 
ten did not think there was any reason to prolong it, 
and consulted Ingolf on the subject. Ingolf answered 
that they had bought what they wanted, and agreed 
with him. So the hostages were returned on both sides 
with many precautions, and the Viking-ships, disbur- 
dened of their cargoes, rowed out of the bay and hoisted 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 139 
sail. But they only sailed away for appearance’ sake. 
By night they ran into another bay. They had a 
great desire to get some spoil along the fertile coast. 
But they did not return unexpected. The chief of the 
district, foreseeing this possibility, had collected all 
his people, and now stood ready to meet them on the 
shore. Haasten thought it safer not to attempt a 
landing where so many opposed them, and ordered the 
ships to row out of the bay again. 

The old Vikings grumbled, his brothers were silent, 
and Leif foamed with rage. But Haasten did not care 
at all. He remained lying outside the bay for two days 
and nights. The weather was calm, and not suitable 
for sailing. He held the chief and his people bound 
to the spot. Then what he expected happened. A 
powerful wind made it possible to set sail at once, to 
run down along the coast quicker than the people on 
shore could follow, to anchor up the mouth of a river, 
and to have the crews drawn up on land in battle-array 
before the main force of the people of the district could 
get there. 

Haasten had only allowed a few men to remain on 
board, but his force was far inferior in numbers to that 
of the defenders. The fight took place in a flat meadow 
along the river. Haasten quickly saw that he had 
undertaken more than he could manage. These native 
troops had obviously encountered the Vikings before. 
Haasten quickly gave his people orders to take refuge 
on board ; he did not wish to run the risk of losing men 
so early in the summer. 

Leif and Holmsten happened to be near one another 


i 4 o THE SWORN BROTHERS 
in the fight. Each quickly discovered how bravely and 
boldly the other fought, and that fact, together with the 
circumstance that they here stood side by side in a battle 
for life and death, drew them nearer to each other, and 
banished for a while all hate towards Holmsten out of 
Leif’s mind. They were vexed at the order to go on 
board with their task unperformed, but obeyed. 

When they were safe, Holmsten said : 44 Listen, Leif ; 

let us take a pair of the smallest and swiftest ships, and 
make a trip on our own account along the coast.” 

Leif immediately agreed. Haasten bade them do as 
they liked, but to be careful not to be too long away. 
But Ingolf gave his vote against the expedition. 

44 Let the boys amuse themselves a little,” Haasten 
said, with a smile. 44 It will do them good. They fight 
smartly by themselves. And we will give them some 
good men.” Since Haasten promised that the other 
ships should follow them as soon as a great part of the 
enemy’s forces had dispersed in order to follow the two 
game-cocks’ movements, Ingolf yielded, although with 
reluctance. 

When the chiefs on shore saw two small ships separate 
themselves from the fleet and sail away, they believed 
that it was a stratagem, and dispatched only a small 
force from the place to keep an eye on them. Haasten 
had reckoned on this, and now Ingolf’s anxiety was 
partly quieted. 

Leif and Holmsten sailed up along the coast, and 
succeeded in landing. But they had no experience in 
drawing up men for battle, and when the land forces 
sent to watch them suddenly attacked, there was no 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 141 

order among their men. There followed a confused 
struggle which soon developed into a number of single 
combats, man against man. Leif was opposed by an 
older fighter than himself, who did not leave or afford 
him the least opening for an attack. He had enough 
to do to ward off his rapid and heavy blows with shield 
and sword. Leif already thought that that day would 
be his last under the sun ; he felt a paralysing fear steal- 
ing slowly over him and robbing him of strength. He 
noticed that he had become wet down to his legs, which 
had begun to shake violently, and shame and fear con- 
centrated themselves to a wild frenzy in his soul. He 
suddenly saw red. If he were to fall, his opponent 
should at any rate carry away marks of the battle. 
He flung away sword and shield, and took hold of his 
battle-ax. How he killed the other he never understood, 
but at last he had him stretched flat on the ground. He 
picked up his sword and shield, completely out of breath, 
and shaking in his whole body, and looked around for a 
new opponent. Not far away the leader of the land- 
force was exchanging powerful blows with Holmsten. 
Holmsten had had his shield hewn in pieces, but there 
seemed to be something the matter with his opponent’s 
sword. When Leif had stood for a moment looking on, 
his eye fell on a man who was approaching Holmsten 
from behind with uplifted ax. It was impossible for 
Leif to get near in time, but purely instinctively he 
grasped his spear, and as instinctively hesitated a mo- 
ment before throwing it. Holmsten’s head cloven by an 
ax was what he in his heart longed to see. But it was 
as impossible to let it happen as it was desirable. It 


142 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

must not happen ! The spear whistled through the 
air, and a man with lifted ax fell over on his face just 
behind Holmsten’s back. Holmsten’s opponent had be- 
come aware that something was happening, and became 
for a moment off his guard. Holmsten took advantage 
of that moment, drove his sword into his stomach, and 
thrust hard. The other tottered and fell, with the 
greatest astonishment in his distorted face. And now 
that their leader had fallen, the rest of the force fled. 
Some of them were cut down while flying. Holmsten 
and Leif gave themselves no time to draw breath. 
They ran towards the town, followed by their men. 
The women and children fled in great confusion when 
they saw the Vikings approaching. Some of the men 
wanted to go after them, and Leif felt his heart thump 
in his breast when he saw the young women flying. Es- 
pecially one of them, whom he clearly recognized, and 
who did not seem to be taking very much trouble to es- 
cape, and certainly had set her eye upon him, attracted 
him. But when he heard Holmsten call the men back 
sharply, he gave up following her. Holmsten was ob- 
viously strongly excited, though outwardly quite calm. 

“ First work, then play ! ” he commanded, in a tone 
which permitted no opposition, and the Vikings directed 
their course further against the deserted town. Holm- 
sten and the other sons of Atle had not bought anything 
but corn, honey, and wine. What they wanted in the 
shape of articles of luxury and clothes, they expected 
to get without further expenditure. It was plain that 
there was plenty to take in the town. A rich booty of 
ornaments, silks, clothes, precious stones, and other 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 143 
similar things was collected in bundles and carried to 
the waiting ships. When this had been seen to, Holm- 
sten gave as many of his men as he could spare leave to 
go on shore. Now they could go and flirt with the girls 
if they liked. Holmsten remained on board and stowed 
away the booty. So Leif could not manage to go on 
shore, though he greatly wanted to see what was up 
there in the wood. 

When sunset approached, and it began to be evening, 
Holmsten told Leif to go on shore and blow the signal 
with the horn for the crews to go on board. They had 
collected plenty of booty, and there was nothing more to 
wait for. Now they had been long enough on shore. 
Leif had from the ship marked a little height which lay 
apart, and from which the horn could be heard far 
around. Upon it he meant to stand and give the sig- 
nal. The ascent to the height was covered with low 
bushes. In one of these bushes Leif’s eye fell on a girl. 
He looked more closely, and knew her again. Her eye 
was soft and timid, and she was very young. Leif 
forgot what he had gone for, and remained with her. 
He cooled his hot face in the profusion of her dark 
hair, and lost himself. First he was taken with her ex- 
travagant wildness; then he was scared, and rapidly 
cooled off. When he left her, she wept. Leif went 
slowly farther up the ascent. When he reached the top, 
he set the horn to his mouth and blew hard. Its tones 
reverberated angrily over the landscape. Leif was de- 
pressed in mind by disappointment and weariness. It 
was not a pleasant weariness like that after a battle. 
He had toyed with the British girls, and dared not think 


144 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
of Helga. The remembrance of Helga was like a wound 
in his soul — a wound which he dared not touch lest he 
should tear it open. It must have time to heal, which it 
might by forgetfulness. He felt a great relief when they 
rowed out from the bay and set sail. He never wished 
to come here again. Up on the height a girl sat and 
wept. In self-defence he hardened himself. Let her 
weep! What was it to him? He was not hers, and she 
had sought him herself. 

Holmsten and Leif were greeted with loud shouts of 
joy when they returned to the fleet. They gave an ac- 
count of the battle, showed their booty, and reaped 
much praise. When Haasten and Ingolf heard that 
Leif had saved Holmsten’s life, they exchanged a look, 
and were both very glad. Haasten praised Leif for his 
prowess in battle, and it was a great honour to be 
praised aloud by Haasten. But it gave Leif little 
pleasure now. His unstable mind had lost its balance. 
Now he wished that he had never thrown the spear. 
Ingolf was not long in discovering that a change had 
taken place in his brother. He knew Leif, and guessed 
the reason. A long sea voyage would be the best for 
Leif now, he thought, and he induced Haasten to alter 
his plan and to sail first to a place on the Irish coast 
which he knew lay far away. Haasten complied will- 
ingly. He had been successful in trading, and had se- 
cured a rich booty. Perhaps it was the most prudent 
course not to visit at once the nearest coasts. It was 
never certain what connections there might be between 
the different chiefs of the district. So they hoisted sail 
and directed their course towards Ireland. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 145 

It was soon evident that Ingolf’s insight was correct 
with regard to what Leif needed to restore his mind to 
its balance again. 

They encountered a lively summer storm in the chan- 
nel. That was beneficial. The warmth and the fine 
weather had begun to make the crews somewhat slack. 

The sea journey ventilated Leif’s mind. He again 
became his former self : a young Viking with desire for 
adventures of all kinds and an insatiable thirst to see 
new lands and to exchange blows with foreign chiefs. 


Ill 

The Vikings travelled far that summer. From Eng- 
land they sailed to Ireland, past the Isle of Man, whose 
cliff-lined coast they could only salute on that journey. 
Later on they meant to renew and deepen their acquain- 
tanceship with it. 

They had successful trade with Ireland. Leif saw 
many new things which he could not resist. Ingolf 
looked after the purchase of corn, honey, wine, wheat, 
and the more useful articles of metal for both of them. 

Atle’s sons were excellent traders. At first they 
made considerably more out of their goods than the 
sworn brothers. But Ingolf gave close attention to 
their proceedings, and learnt the art from them. And 
when he had learnt all that Atle’s sons could do in the 
matter of trade, he did not remain stationary at that 
point. He developed himself further on his own ac- 
count. Instead of doing trade in single articles, he be- 


146 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
gan to deal with considerable quantities. This brought 
in greater gains. Soon the sons of Atle had something 
to learn from him. 

The five Viking leaders had remained on the best 
terms together. Haasten, with his self-control and 
sense of fairness, was distinctly marked out as leader. 
Leif had still fits of hatred towards Holmsten and of 
ill-humour towards the other brothers, but he kept his 
temper under restraint. And whenever they encoun- 
tered foes he became, as it were, at once their brother, 
and fought bravely on their side. 

He much admired Atle’s sons’ skill in handling their 
weapons and their composure in battle. They fought 
as coolly and calmly as if nothing at all serious was 
intended. Only when they attacked was a certain ex- 
citement apparent. An attack by one of Atle’s sons 
meant generally a swift death for the opponent. They 
played, to be sure, but there was seriousness in their 
play. It meant nothing less than life or death. 

Leif was greatly taken by the immovable calm with 
which they let their weapons talk. He did not under- 
stand how they could fight and yet at the same time be 
as it were spectators. He understood Ingolf’s method 
of fighting much better. 

Ingolf attacked at once with his full strength and 
remained steadily on the offensive. His figure seemed 
to increase in weight. His blows clove shields, and his 
thrust penetrated where it struck. He never let him- 
self be forced into a defensive attitude, but attacked 
fiercely, though always under control. His mode of 
fighting was not so supercilious as that of Atle’s sons ; 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 147 

he gave himself more away, but preserved his composure. 
This quietness and assurance of Ingolf and Atle’s sons 
remained a riddle for Leif. For him, composure in 
battle would have meant simply death. He handled his 
weapons very awkwardly till he began to see red. From 
that moment he became so sure in his use of them that it 
was a pleasure to watch him. But he fought uncon- 
sciously, and did not know what had happened before 
his opponent lay prone. Then for the first time he took 
breath and collected himself. It was fine to see him, 
when he let himself go, tall and disorderly, crouching 
in the indomitable display of his strength. It seemed 
easy to take his life, and as if his enemy had it in his 
hand. Leif did not care how many openings he gave 
his opponent. But it was not easy to take advantage 
of these openings, for he never remained long in one 
place. He danced round his enemy, confused him with 
his apparent want of plan in attack, and pierced or 
slashed him before he was aware. Haasten enjoyed 
watching Leif fight. He insisted that Leif was invinci- 
ble, for he was so thoroughly absorbed in the battle that 
even a superior opponent must give way before his wasp- 
ish attack. “ Leif could only be killed by accident — 
only a mistletoe branch could strike him,” Haasten 
said. He came to be quite fond of Leif. 

The Viking expedition sailed farther along the coasts 
of Ireland, and Leif was fascinated with the remarkable 
country he found there. Ireland, that unquiet, ever- 
changing land, appealed in a peculiarly intimate degree 
to his heart. Every time that he thought he knew it, 
he discovered that he did not. He was continually 


148 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
coming across something new. Wild, stony tracts were 
suddenly succeeded by fertile plains. Desert heaths, 
dark woods, narrow valleys with black rivers at the 
bottom, friendly coasts, rugged lines of cliff, peaceful 
towering mountains, placid lakes, roaring rivers — all 
these Ireland had. Most wonderful of all, perhaps, 
were the abruptly changing lights. Ireland had its 
own sky, full of whims like itself, rapidly changing from 
lofty pure blue depths to a watery layer of clouds over 
the land. There might be a blazing festival of sunshine 
over the landscape, and the next moment it was over- 
shadowed by heavy masses of cloud. A tract of coun- 
try which had been like a brilliant smile was suddenly 
completely changed, and became dark and threatening, 
filled with a special sense of discomfort, deep and un- 
escapable as a dream. Ireland played with one’s heart, 
filled it with joy, to oppress it the next moment with 
fear and foreboding. 

And Ireland’s people were like Ireland’s land and 
light. They were wild men whose soul was a mixture of 
gentle dreaminess and fierce rage. People who devoted 
themselves to fighting with their whole soul and did not 
know how to give or expect quarter. Their polite 
friendliness, nay, even brotherliness, in peaceful inter- 
course stood in glaring contrast to the savagery in 
battle and their cruelty towards fallen or captive ene- 
mies. They could amuse themselves by opening a man’s 
stomach and letting him wind the entrails out of his 
body by leading him round a tree. They counted that 
a delightful amusement, and their gaiety was enhanced 
if the captive groaned. They were a nation of singular 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 149 
enthusiasts, bards and warriors, swarthy or red-haired, 
and alternately irascible or quiet. 

Never in his life had Leif seen so many remarkably 
beautiful women as he did here. There were women 
with rich red hair, soft gleaming skins, quiet and invit- 
ing beings. They aroused his longing. There were 
also dark women, who were in themselves not less taking. 
Their pale skins and dark eyes- filled Leif’s dreams. 
There were other dark women with golden skin, pliant 
and slender. There was abundance of women of all 
complexions, and nearly all were beautiful. 

The Vikings were enthusiastic about them, but their 
enthusiasm was moderated by the fact that the women 
carried daggers hidden in their clothes, so that now and 
then there was only a step between love and death. 
Generally speaking, the Vikings were not unpopular 
among the Irish women. And not seldom an originally 
loose connection between a Norwegian chief and an Irish 
girl developed into marriage. 

Besides these people, the Vikings in Ireland came 
across another type still more savage in manners and 
shape, with tattooed bodies. It was a matter for aston- 
ishment to see the contrast between the land and the 
people. The sworn brothers and Atle’s sons traded 
and ravaged far and wide in Ireland and the British 
Isles that summer. On the whole, they had had good 
luck, made good trade, taken much booty, and only lost 
few men. The last was especially due to Haasten’s 
wise moderation and always vigilant foresight. 

Haasten had often since employed the stratagem, 
which had succeeded so well the first time, of sending 


150 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Leif and Holmsten out on a foray with two of the 
smallest ships, while the rest of the fleet detained the 
land defenders at another spot. Holmsten and Leif 
both equally enjoyed these excursions. And as they 
always took the best men with them, their expeditions 
generally succeeded, and brought in rich booty. 

Once, however, it had nearly gone hard with them. 
A Swedish Viking-fleet consisting of five well-manned 
ships came across them as they were rowing out of a 
bay, where their ships had lain while they made a foray 
on shore. The Swedes inspected them a little, and 
thought that they could make use both of the ships and 
of what might be found on board. So they hoisted 
their battle-flag and set after them. Leif and Holm- 
sten were obliged to accept battle with the superior 
forces of the enemy. It was impossible to escape. 
They cleared their ships for the combat, determining 
not to surrender. But before the battle had begun, 
the other ships came rowing round a neighbouring 
promontory. Leif and Holmsten had been longer away 
than usual that time, and Haasten, and especially In- 
golf, had at last become uneasy, and determined to go 
and look after them. 

When the Swedes saw the other ships approaching, 
and perceived that they were many and large, they 
turned sharp round and rowed away as rapidly as pos- 
sible, but the wind was slack and unreliable, and the 
Swedes were lucky to find a fog-bank, which they ran 
into and escaped. When this happened, the summer 
was already approaching its end. The Vikings had by 
that time sold all that they had brought with them from 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 151 
home, and were well provided with foreign goods of every 
kind. There was really nothing more to wait for. 

The sea began to ,awake gradually from its summer 
lethargy. It was plainly shown by the ships’ move- 
ments that the waves were already aware of the ap- 
proach of winter. 

The ships were all heavily laden. And as they were 
warships they were not very well adapted for voyaging 
in the autumn. So the Vikings sailed home over the 
sea, the same way as they had come, under the colour- 
less skies of late summer by day and the clear golden 
stars by night. 

They had prosperous winds, and reached Norway 
about the time that the leaves were beginning to fall. 

Leif was full of longing for Helga during the voyage 
home. He counted the days and could not sleep. It 
seemed to him suddenly that in the course of the summer 
she had come very close to him. Absence and separa- 
tion had, as it were, intimately united them. His long- 
ing, however, was considerably mingled with fear — a 
fear without shape or distinct substance, yet none the 
less painful. 

At Hisargavl, Atle’s sons took leave of Ingolf and 
Leif. They thanked each other for the summer they 
had spent together, arranged to meet there next sum- 
mer, drank each other’s health in dark wine from glass 
goblets, and swore eternal friendship. Ingolf and Leif 
invited Atle’s sons to come to the feast the first day of 
the month of Goi, with as large a retinue as they liked 
to bring, and Atle’s sons promised to come. Holmsten, 
half-intoxicated, happened to mention Helga’s name, 


152 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
and Leif listened with all his ears. But for the rest he 
could make nothing out of Holmsten’s confused talk, 
except that he now knew that Helga was in his thoughts. 

That evening Leif threw a spear overboard. So the 
sworn brothers and Atle’s sons parted, and each sailed 
home with the rich booty of the summer. 


IV 

Helga awoke in the night and heard the sound of oars 
in the fjord. She dressed hastily and went down to the 
landing-place. It was full moon, but the sky was 
covered with dark masses of clouds. Out on the dark 
surface of the fjord the ships looked black and ghostly. 
A sudden fear made Helga’s heart tremble. The ships 
came rowing so silently in the night. The stroke of the 
oars sounded so lonely in the stillness. Was Leif with 
them? She counted the ships and found they were not 
the full number. But she could not distinguish them 
clearly, and the larger ones might overshadow the 
smaller. How silently they rowed! Would it not be 
better if she went home to bed? That would be where 
she would lie if she came to know that she would no more 
see Leif. She would never wish to get up again. The 
foremost ship rowed into the somewhat broken moon- 
light on the surface of the fjord. Helga thought she 
could recognize it. Was that not Leif’s dragon? She 
strained her eyes till they smarted, and ran down to the 
edge of the water. The ship over there was so dark and 
indistinct she could make out neither colour nor shape. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 153 

It glided nearer like a shadow. The water dripped in 
silvery drops from the oar-blades. 

A rift in the masses of clouds let the moon’s pale 
light illumine the shore. Helga stood in it thinking in- 
tently. Was Leif with them? That would be an al- 
most incomprehensible happiness. And even if he were, 
still there would come a day when his ship would return 
without him, or his people would come some winter day 
carrying him on a bier, and there would be blood upon 
the snow. A time must come when Leif would be no 
more. Then she must die. 

Helga stood there bathed in the wan light of the 
moon, and gave herself away to her last breath. She 
embraced Leif with her soul, alive or dead. When the 
ships came quite near she stepped quickly into the 
shadow of one of the boat-houses. She would see if 
Leif was with them before she made a mistake. 

Rapidly the ships approached, rowed by long oars, 
keeping regular time. Yes, the foremost was Leif’s 
dragon-ship. Majestically it glided over the water, 
and there — yes, there on the poop stood Leif. Ah, 
Leif ! Leif ! Helga wept. She wept and was happy. 
But she quickly dried her eyes. See how Leif had ex- 
erted himself. He wished to be the first on shore. She 
could hear the excited tone of his voice when he gave 
the order : “ Inboard ! ” Leif was impatient now ; his 

movements were abrupt and hasty. He urged on his 
crew, and his voice became sharp. He could not wait 
— he could never wait the last moments. Leif ! Leif ! 
He did not guess that she stood there. 

Helga did not go out of the shadow and down to the 


154 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
ship. She saw the crew working with the long boat- 
hooks and pushing the landing-plank out over the ship’s 
side. She could just catch a glimpse of a man who 
went down it. And then came Leif running. How like 
him i* was. When he was right opposite her, she went 
forward to meet him. Leif started, stopped, and stood. 
All his impetuosity ceased. 

“ Could you not see me? ” asked Helga, with a smile 
that quivered. She felt so rich and happy, and came 
gradually nearer. Leif was not in a condition to an- 
swer or to say a word at all. He stood there, and that 
was all he could do. He could not even collect himself 
and kiss her. Helga came slowly close up to him and 
laid her arms quietly round his neck. They drank a 
long kiss from each other’s mouths till their lips were 
sore. 

Leif wished to say something, but there was a lump 
in his throat. When he discovered that, he began to 
weep. Helga smiled and kissed him more fervently. 
Her fearless Viking was only a long, ungainly boy who 
wept. He stood and embraced Helga violently but 
helplessly, and tears ran down his freckled, weather- 
tanned cheeks. Helga turned gently in his embrace. He 
thought she wished to be released, and let her go. But 
Helga did not wish to be out of his arms. She only 
wished to turn so that they might walk side by side. 
She did not wish that any one should find them there, 
and led him away. She wanted to have him for herself 
now that she had at last got him again after an end- 
less summer. And Leif let her have her way; he had 
forgotten everything else except that he had her again. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 155 

They did not talk much. Only some hasty questions 
and quiet, hasty answers were exchanged between them. 
They had, as it were, no time for more talk. There was 
silence between them — a good and happy silence. 
They had each other. 

In the house there was great excitement. Morning 
broke on an apparently hopeless confusion of men and 
women, who chatted together, kissed, or only sent each 
other embarrassed and happy glances. There were 
also children of all ages who jumped and sang and 
quarrelled together in little private combats, and men 
who carried loads from the ships to the house, and saun- 
tered back again in knots, talking vigourously. 

Ingolf went quietly to and fro and saw that the work 
was done. The ships had to be unloaded and the goods 
carried home to the house, and it was best to get it done 
soon. At this time of year the weather and the sea were 
not to be relied upon. Ingolf felt a sense of happiness 
and confidence at being home again. He relaxed a little 
the strict discipline which he generally maintained in all 
work, and granted each man sufficient time for embrac- 
ing friends and for confidential talk. But if any one 
did not go to work of his own accord, when a reasonable 
time had passed, he called him by name in a friendly 
way and aroused him. No more was needed. The 
work went on vigourously. The men wanted it done as 
soon as possible. Ingolf had promised them a few days’ 
holiday when the goods were in the house and the ships 
in the sheds. 

Orn came out, bent and aged, blinking with inflamed 
eyes in the garish light of morning. He gave such an 


156 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

immense yawn that his shaggy jaws cracked and 
shivered, chilled by the cold autumnal air. Old age had 
come upon him, bent his back, and gnawed the flesh from 
his limbs. When Ingolf saw him, he hastened to him. 
Now that he saw him again, after not having had him 
daily before his eyes for several months, he suddenly 
realized how old and decrepit his father had actually 
become, and was seized by a strong feeling of sympathy. 
He whispered something as he passed in a man’s ear. 
The man smiled and nodded, and ran down to the ships. 
Then Ingolf hastened to his father and greeted him with 
reverence and tenderness. 

The old man was always on his guard against too 
much friendliness. Old age had increased his mistrust 
of people. He was peevish and gruff. He returned 
his son’s greeting very nonchalantly, and began with 
noticeable haste to question him concerning purely 
practical matters. Had he all the ships with him? 
How much had he allowed himself to be cheated? He 
had not, it was to be hoped, brought an Irish wife home 
with him? How many of his men had fallen? He had 
probably nothing creditable to report? 

It seemed to Ingolf that his voice had become remark- 
ably high-pitched and strident. 

And when Ingolf had answered, the old man repeated 
his questions time after time. It suddenly occurred to 
Ingolf that his father could no longer hear as well as 
before. He had to raise his voice, and he found it try- 
ing and embarrassing to have to change it. Orn 
noticed the change, and shouted: “Yes, I no longer 
hear so well. It is especially this ear here which is 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 157 
affected. But it is worse with Rodmar! He is alive 
still. But he has gone blind ! ” Orn laughed with a 
snort. 44 That is still worse ! 99 His laughter filled 
Ingolf with discomfort. Then Orn suddenly stopped 
laughing. He had happened to cast a glance down to- 
wards the ships. Now he stood, his glance became fixed, 
and his eyes widened. Then he suddenly began to count 
and point at the same time with a crooked finger. 
44 One, two, three . . .” 

When he had counted up to twenty, he broke off 
and said to Ingolf, with a voice trembling with joyful 
emotion : 44 How many are there altogether ? 99 In- 

golf smiled. 44 There are many,” he answered, in a 
friendly tone. 44 1 took care that you should not want 
wine, father.” 

From the landing-place below there came a long line 
of men up towards the house, each one trundling a 
barrel. As though guided by his sense of smell, Rod- 
mar came at the same moment tottering out of the 
house, supported on two sticks, and carefully feeling 
his way forward with his legs. Orn turned towards 
him, and shouted in a high and excited voice: 44 Now 
the barrels of red wine from the land of the Franks are 
coming in a long line rolling up to the house, Cousin 
Rodmar ! 99 

44 Ah, my eyes ! 99 answered Rodmar, in a trembling 
and weak voice. 44 Gladly would I have seen that sight. 
But keep silent, so that I can at any rate hear the wine 
slopping inside the barrels ! 99 

There was a great restlessness in Orn’s blood. He 
took short steps, and could not stand still. With his 


15B THE SWORN BROTHERS 
crooked fingers he took hold of Ingolf’s cloak, drew him 
down towards him, and gave him a hasty kiss on his 
forehead. Then he tottered on stiff legs up to Rod- 
mar and clapped him on the shoulder with a trembling 
hand. 44 1 cannot hear, and you cannot see, cousin. 
But let us thank Odin that we can both still taste. 
Isn’t your tongue dry with knowing that there is so 
much wine close by? Mine rolls in my mouth like birch- 
bark.” 

It was not long before the two aged kinsmen sat side 
by side in the high-seat and tasted for the first time 
the red wine from- the land of the Franks, which they 
had been waiting for during a whole long summer. 
They drank the wine noisily, let it fill their mouths, 
and tasted it with satisfaction. 

“ How do you like it? ” asked Orn between gulps. 
Rodmar gave himself barely time to answer. 44 It tastes 
good,” he answered hastily, and drank, 44 but I miss 
seeing the colour.” 

44 Splash a little in your eyes, cousin,” Orn answered, 
and laughed. 

There they sat, and became very cheerful later in the 
day. Long before the sun went down they were asleep, 
and snoring loudly. Drink had come to Dalsfjord. 

Not till towards evening did Ingolf find Leif and 
Helga. Ingolf embraced Helga, and kissed her with 
much tenderness. 44 Are you pleased with all the gifts, 
sister? ” he asked, with a smile. 

Helga loked with wide-open eyes first at him and 
then at Leif. Then she smiled without comprehension 
and a little uncertainty. Leif looked unhappy. 44 1 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 159 

quite forgot them,” he stammered, blushing and embar- 
rassed. 

Ingolf laughed loud and heartily. But Helga threw 
her arms round Leifs neck and kissed him tenderly be- 
fore the eyes of her brother. 


V 

There was a chief and Viking named Olmod the Old, 
son of Horda-Kaare. He was a kinsman of Leif. 

Olmod the Old was popular with all. He was a wise 
man, quiet and circumspect, a warrior in battle and a 
hero where drinking-horns were emptied. No one 
would have guessed that Olmod the Old concealed a 
great restlessness under the mask of quiet and imper- 
turbability which he outwardly wore. He talked will- 
ingly, and had a flow of cheerful conversation, but was 
not lavish with his confidence. All thought that they 
knew his mind, but no one did. 

Olmod the Old seldom remained long in one place. 
In the summer he went on Viking expeditions ; in winter 
he was a guest in various places. He had many friends, 
and wherever he stayed he brought cheerfulness with 
him. 

He was very fond of his kinsman, Leif, whose charac- 
ter resembled his own. It was a significant fact about 
Olmod that Leif was unaware that he possessed a friend 
in him. Leif would have been rather inclined to believe 
the opposite. Olmod seldom talked to him, gave him 
no presents, did not show him favour or friendship in 


160 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

any degree. But in secret Olmod kept an eye on his 

kinsman, Leif, and knew all about his affairs. 

That winter Olmod visited Atle Jarl at Gaulum. In 
doing so he fulfilled an old promise. He knew that 
Leif and Ingolf had been on a Viking expedition with 
Atle’s sons the previous summer. It had suddenly oc- 
curred to him that he knew Atle’s sons too little. 

During his visit to Gaulum, Olmod gave such close 
attention to Atle’s sons that he actually came to over- 
hear a conversation between Haersten and Holmsten 
which they did not intend him or any one else to hear. 

66 1 hear that Helga and Leif are fond of each other,” 
said Haersten. 

“ That sounds hard to believe,” answered Holmsten. 

“ Women’s taste is often strange,” continued Haer- 
sten. “ Did you see, also, brother, that Leif threw a 
spear overboard at Hisargavl? ” 

“ Why did you not tell me that before? ” 

“ Because it has only just occurred to me that Leif 
regretted the use he had once made of that spear.” 

“ With my good will I shall not give Leif reason to 
deprive himself of many more weapons,” said Holmsten 
gloomily. “ It would be rather after my mind to take 
care that he finds full use for all his weapons.” 

Olmod had heard enough. Now he knew what Leif’s 
friends were. Shortly after overhearing this conversa- 
tion he departed. He directed his way towards Orn’s 
house, and was welcomed by Orn and the brothers. 
When he had stayed a week in the house, he prepared 
to go farther. Before doing so, he talked confidentially 
with Ingolf. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 


161 

44 Don’t take it ill if I mix in your affairs, Ingolf. I 
begin to get old, and old men are talkative. I only 
wish to remind you that Atle’s sons, whom you and 
Leif have invited to the feast this winter, are powerful 
chiefs, and that it will be advisable for you to show them 
all possible honour — among other things, by inviting 
as many of your kinsfolk and friends to the feast as 
} 7 ou can.” Ingolf remained silent after Olmod had 
spoken. He looked attentively at him. Olmod met his 
look with a smile. His smile was quiet and experienced. 
Ingolf became suddenly aware that he had more than a 
guest in Olmod. 

44 You come from Gaulum,” he said in a low tone and 
thoughtfully. 44 Is that your advice? ” 

44 That is my advice,” answered Olmod, with a firm- 
ness in his voice which left no doubt as to his serious- 
ness. And he added, as though casually : 44 Haasten 

is only one of Atle’s sons.” 

44 Have you talked with Leif on this subject?” In- 
golf asked suddenly. 

Olmod the Old said only : 44 1 know my kinsman, 

Leif. And I know you, too, Ingolf.” 

Ingolf gave Olmod some handsome presents on his 
departure and escorted him part of the way. 

On the first day of the month of Goi, Atle’s sons came 
with a large retinue to Orn’s house. Ingolf had fol- 
lowed Olmod the Old’s advice, and invited a large circle of 
his own and Leif’s friends to the feast for Atle’s sons. 
When Haasten saw how many were invited to the feast, 
he said to Ingolf, with a smile: 44 We sons of Atle are 
not accustomed to receive our friends with such a great 


1 62 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
force.” Ingolf looked at him and answered seriously: 
“ One can never show one’s friends too great an honour, 
Haasten.” 

Haasten became silent and thoughtful. Involun- 
tarily he looked at his brothers. They stood there 
talking confidentially together. There was something 
in their bearing which made Haasten uneasy. He no- 
ticed also that Ingolf was watching his brothers. 
Haersten and Holmsten had withdrawn themselves from 
the rest, and stood whispering together. 

“We have never been received in such a magnificent 
way here before,” said Haersten, with a smile. “ There 
must be something behind it.” 

“ I should not be surprised,” answered Holmsten, “ if 
Olmod the Old had been here. Where did he go to 
when he left us? It occurs to me all at once that his 
bearing was different when he left than when he came.” 

“What can Olmod the Old have told any here?” 
asked Haersten thoughtfully. 

“ Something which he possibly heard,” replied Holm- 
sten dryly. 

“ What will you do now, brother? ” 

“ I don’t know yet. But some time Leif shall come to 
miss the spear which he threw overboard at Hisargavl ! ” 

Orn became quite another man as soon as guests came 
to the house. He livened up and became young again. 
He did not gulp down his wine, but drank deep and was 
none the worse for it. He was still capable of filling the 
high-seat with dignity and of presiding over a festival. 

Rodmar, on the other hand, preferred to remain in 
bed when anything unusual was going on. The restless- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 163 
ness which the sound of many voices produced in his 
state of blindness made him unwell. When he could 
not sit quite peacefully with Orn he liked best to be 
alone with his wine. 

Orn beckoned Haasten to a place beside him on the 
high-seat. Outside it he seated tlie other sons of Atle 
and the sworn brothers, and then the remaining guests 
according to their age and rank. When the guests had 
taken their seats the hall was completely filled. Orn 
set great store by such feasts. He liked sitting as 
chief in his hall. He stinted neither food nor drink. 
It filled him with inward satisfaction to see people eat 
and drink and be merry. 

He became cheerful and resumed something of his old 
dignity. 

The fire burnt pleasantly on the flat stone of the 
hearth. When the guests at last were satisfied, the 
bowls and wooden dishes were carried out, and the real 
drinking festival began. The youngest and handsomest 
women in the house went about in festal attire and 
poured out beer. Among them was Helga. She 
served at the high table. Holmsten’s eyes followed her 
wherever she went and stood. He had never shown his 
liking for her so openly. 

Helga could not help noticing his persistent gaze. It 
made her afraid. She would rather have remained 
away from the hall, but, on the other hand, she dared 
not leave Leif out of her sight. Leif sat with his mouth 
compressed and a gloomy expression in his eyes, and 
drank but little. That was not his usual way at a 
feast; he was accustomed to drink rather too much 


1 64 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
than too little. Only seldom did Helga succeed in 
catching his eye. He did not return her smile. She 
went to and fro in great alarm. She took care never 
to look at Holmsten, and she did not smile at him as at 
the others when she filled his horn. 

Holmsten pretended not to notice it. His eye glowed 
with the same warmth, and his look followed her with 
the same persistence about the hall. 

Orn proposed the toasts to the gods. He was still 
equal to emptying horns in their honour. When he 
proposed the toast of Brage, Holmsten rose and struck 
on his horn. “ It is the custom of high-born men,” he 
said in a loud and cheerful voice, “ to make vows when 
B rage’s toast is called. I have a vow to make which I 
will beg you kind friends to witness.” 

Holiristen stopped and looked round him. He caught 
a warning and slightly anxious look from his brother, 
Haasten. He saw Leif’s bowed head and caught a 
glimpse of his serious face; he saw Ingolf’s face grow 
rigid with quiet expectation. And he saw Helga stand- 
ing anxious and uncertain and looking at Leif. 

Holmsten smiled. For a while he stood with his 
burning gaze fixed upon Helga, as though waiting to 
catch her eye. Then he lifted his horn and said in 
loud tones : “ I make this vow with Brage’s toast, that 

I will marry Helga, daughter of Orn, or no other 
woman.” There was silence in the hall. Helga re- 
mained standing still for a while. She looked intently 
at Leif, and saw the blood mount to his face and his 
shaking fingers grip the foot of the horn. When she 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 165 
saw that he would succeed in controlling himself, she 
silently left the hall, her face very pale. 

Haasten had sprung up from his place when Holm- 
sten made his vow, but had sat down again without say- 
ing anything. Ingolf sat with a smile on his face but a 
look in his blue eyes that was as sharp as a knife. Orn 
smiled graciously at Holmsten, and Haersten laughed 
contentedly. 

At last Leif looked up. There was a hard and hostile 
look in his usually cheerful eyes. He looked slowly 
round, and let his glance dwell for a while on each of 
Atle’s sons, and finally on his sworn brother, Ingolf, as 
if he were considering him especially. He looked almost 
as if he would not be sorry to encounter them all at once 
should that be necessary. To Orn he only vouchsafed 
a hasty and contemptuous glance. 

Holmsten quite understood the effect his words had 
produced on each of those whom his speech concerned. 
He looked round with composure and continued cheer- 
fully: “ Now I have begun this game. Now it is your 
turn, friend Ingolf.” 

Ingolf gave no sign of rising. He turned his face 
towards Haasten and said in a quiet and firm voice 
which was heard over the whole hall : “ It seems to me 

it is now Haasten’s turn to continue the game. He is 
our leader, and the wisest of us all besides.” 

Haasten met his look and rose slowly. He did not 
find words at first, and remained standing silent for a 
while, looking down. A hush of expectation spread in 
the hall. When Haasten at last spoke his voice was 


1 66 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

quiet and troubled. 44 1 make the vow,” he said, 44 that 
I will judge justly and impartially, if a judgment should 
ever be demanded from me.” 

Haasten sat down with a melancholy air after speak- 
ing. Holmsten said cheerfully: 44 Your obscure vow 
does not seem to me to bear out the assertion that you 
are the wisest of us all. How will you act, if it is be- 
tween your friends on one side and your enemies on the 
other that you must pronounce judgment? ” 

Haasten answered in a severe and discouraging tone: 
44 That I intend myself to determine.” 

Ingolf rose. He smiled no longer ; his look was seri- 
ous and his tone firm and quiet. 44 With Brage’s toast 
I make the vow that I will not divide my inheritance 
with any one but my sworn brother, Leif. May all 
bright gods and all good people present hear it.” 
When Orn had^ heard that vow, he rose with some diffi- 
culty. Suddenly he seemed very old. The look which 
he cast at Ingolf was not friendly. In gloomy silence 
he left the hall. 

Holmsten was still cheerful. 44 1 don’t understand 
that vow,” he said, and laughed. 

44 It is not difficult to understand,” answered Haasten 
severely. 44 Ingolf will give his sister, Helga, to Leif, 
and no one else.” 

Holmsten laughed incredulously, and looked at Leif 
in challenge. 

Leif rose awkwardly with a jerk, and stood erect. 
44 1 make the vow,” he said in a voice that shook with 
suppressed anger and emotion, 44 to show that in noth- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 167 

ing do I stand behind my ancestors and other good men 
of my race ! ” 

“ That may be an easy vow to keep,” shouted Haer- 
sten. “ Have you forgotten that your grandfather had 
to leave Telemarken like a criminal? ” 

Leif met Ingolf’s look and controlled himself. Ingolf 
rose slowly. He was just as quiet as before, but those 
who knew him could see that now he was angry. He 
directed his words to Haasten. “ When I invited you, 
Atle’s sons, to this feast, I believed that you were my 
own and my brother Leif’s sincere friends. From what 
has happened here this evening, and from the words 
which have fallen, I can see that I have made a mistake 
— not as far as concerns you, Haasten, but your 
brothers. Holmsten has done us a doubtful honour. 
His whole behaviour does not show exactly such an atti- 
tude towards us brothers that I should like to have him 
as a brother-in-law — even if no one else were in the 
way. As regards Haersten, he has spoken insulting 
words against my family here in the hall. You, Haas- 
ten, will always be welcome in the place which you now 
occupy as my guest and friend. But your brothers I 
cannot ask to remain. Only with my friends will I 
continue this feast.” 

Haersten and Holmsten had sprung up from their 
places. Haasten also rose. “ I had no share in, and 
could not prevent, what has happened this evening,” he 
said quietly, and in a tone of sadness, “ otherwise it 
would not have happened. But I cannot remain here 
as your guest, Ingolf, when you send my brothers 


1 68 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

away. We, Atle’s sons, have always kept together.” 

When he had spoken, he left the hall silently, followed 
by his brothers and all their retinue. But no one else 
followed them on the way. 

When they had gone, Ingolf set guards on all the 
roads. He wished to be prepared, in case any more 
surprises awaited him on the part of Atle’s sons. It 
had become clear to him now that Haasten had no 
longer such complete power over his brothers as before. 

Ingolf was depressed in spirits. That which he had 
long feared had happened at last. But this breach with 
Atle’s sons had come in another way than he had 
thought. He had expected that Leif would be a direct 
cause of it, not, as now appeared, an indirect one. Leif 
had surprised him by his self-controlling bearing. Now 
he knew he h^d a brother in Leif he could completely 
rely on. Ingolf guessed that it was not the first time 
that Leif for his sake had controlled himself in the pres- 
ence of Atle’s sons. But, on the other hand, he could 
not betray Leif. He must stand by his side anywhere, 
and against any one — even against Haasten, if neces- 
sary. Ingolf observed, to his wonder, that he did not 
really miss Atle’s sons, now that he was confronted by a 
breach with them. He had Leif ; he had on his side only 
one man. But that was a man he could rely upon, and 
knew that he could. Ingolf felt himself in some degree 
richer than before. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 169 


VI 

For some days after the feast, which had been so 
abruptly broken off, Orn did not speak to any one. A 
cloud hung over his face. His look was like that of a 
mad bull. He ignored Ingolf entirely ; and if Ingolf 
tried to talk to him, he paid no more attention to what 
he said than to a breath of wind. Even the blind Rod- 
mar spoke in vain to his kinsman. To Rodmar it 
seemed that the world had become very strange. Did 
Orn not hear when he spoke to him? Had he become 
deaf, or perhaps dumb also? He gave up trying to 
make it out. He did not like trouble of any kind any 
more. There was always the resource of lying in bed 
and having wine brought. Rodmar retired deeper into 
his darkness and drank himself into a state of stupor 
and oblivion. When Orn had carried about his fit of 
wrath in solitude long enough, he began to get tired. 
Wrath also disturbed his intoxication. He did not find 
the same happiness in wine as before. He considered 
the matter closely, and found a new standpoint to view 
it from — a more manly and less troublesome one. 

He sent for Ingolf. “ I understand well,” he began 
in a harsh but not unfriendly tone, 66 that you do not 
wish to let yourself be cowed by Atle’s sons. I have 
considered the matter, and I must confess that it was a 
verjr challenging way that Holmsten chose in which to 
appear as a suitor. It was, however, impossible for 
him to know whether Helga had been already promised 
in marriage, and how far his vows might cross our plans. 


170 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
I think that the answer you gave him was good, and be- 
coming a chieftain. We of our race can afford to 
marry our children to whom we like. We certainly do 
not need to trouble about marriage with Jarl’s sons. It 
has pleased me to see that you are not afraid to give 
even such people as Atle’s sons the rough side of your 
tongue. I do not deny that till lately it was my idea 
that a marriage connection with them would be an 
honour for our family. But now I see that it is no less 
honour for the family to refuse such a connection. 
That shows to all and each that we reckon ourselves at 
least equal to Jarls. You are wise, my boy. You may 
go.” 

It was a long time since Orn had spoken so gently to 
his son. Ingolf went about the rest of the day smiling 
now and then to himself. He felt a great relief. His 
father’s attitude had pained him more than he had been 
willing to admit to himself. 

After his conversation with Ingolf, Orn went to Rod- 
mar, who was very glad to observe that he had not be- 
come dumb or deaf. A joyous time recommenced for 
the two kinsmen. They drank copiously of the red 
wine, and boasted more than ever. It became to them a 
source of much arrogance that hostility had broken out 
between their sons and Atle Jarl’s. They even took 
Leif into favour, and willingly listened to his account 
of his exploits in the Viking expedition of the previous 
summer. Leif was in their eyes still a little, loose- 
minded fellow, but at any rate a man. One could ac- 
knowledge him both as a son and a son-in-law. He had 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 171 
split various heads, and saved Holmsten’s life. There 
one had a proof that even the worst good-for-nothings 
could become something if only they had good folk, to 
look up to. 

Leif was ungracious enough to care for their praise 
no more than he had cared for their blame. But they 
behaved magnanimously to him in that respect. They 
excused him by recollecting youth’s general want of 
proper respect for age. 

When spring aproached, the old uneasiness came over 
Leif. He became very restless, and his eyes took an 
absent expression. One day he went down to the boat- 
houses and began to inspect his ships. As he did so, it 
suddenly came into his mind that during the last part 
of the winter Ingolf had not troubled himself at all 
about goods for the summer’s Viking expedition. It 
was not like Ingolf to forget a thing of that kind. 

Without delay he sought Ingolf and began to speak 
on the subject. Ingolf stood and looked attentively at 
him while he spoke. When he had finished, Ingolf an- 
swered with composure : “ It seems to me, Cousin Leif, 

that it would be better for us to remain at home in our 
house during the summer than to sail out on a Viking 
expedition. Do you remember the vows which were 
made here in the winter at the feast we gave to Atle’s 
sons? ” 

“ The vows were not of the kind to be hastily 
forgotten,” answered Leif, and looked in his brother’s 
eyes. “ You are, I suppose, not afraid of meeting 
Atle’s sons on the sea ? ” 


172 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

“ I am not afraid,” answered Ingolf, in a sharper 
tone ; “ but I would rather avoid hostility with Atle’s 
sons.” 

Leif stood and looked down gloomily. When he had 
considered a little he said : “ Atle’s sons could easily 

suppose that we were afraid if, after what happened 
here in the winter, we gave up the Viking expeditions we 
had planned for the summer. I do not intend to give 
Holmsten reason to call me afraid. Do you, brother, 
decide for yourself what you will do. I shall go.” 

Ingolf was silent and considered the matter. He was 
in great perplexity. He hardly dared to let Leif go. 
On the other hand, he dared not hinder him either. He 
knew well that when Leif had once got restless he must 
get away. For himself, he did not like to run the risk of 
meeting Atle’s sons. He had a presentiment that a 
collision was inevitable if their way crossed that of his 
brother. And in any case he wished to avoid lifting 
hand against Haasten. But the reason which especially 
kept him at home was, that he no longer trusted Haer- 
sten and Holmsten. If both he and Leif went away, 
they might both use the opportunity to carry off Helga. 
On such an occasion both his father and Rodmar might 
easily lose their lives, or be exposed to indignities which 
he would have to avenge. When Ingolf had come to a 
conclusion, he said : “I do not wish as matters now 
stand to leave our family and property without some- 
one to look after them. I will no longer prevent your 
going since you have set your mind upon it. But it will 
cause me great anxiety to know that you are out on a 
Viking expedition with only three ships. For I cannot 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 173 
spare more men away from home. You may encounter 
Atle’s sons, you may meet other hostile Vikings, or you 
may through want of foresight get involved in an un- 
equal battle. I would rather, therefore, that you 
stayed at home, Cousin Leif. But if you will promise 
me not under any circumstances to engage in an un- 
equal battle, as far as it is in your power to avoid it, 
I will not oppose your going.” 

Leif promised that willingly. He never thought 
about promises. He grasped Ingolf’s outstretched 
hand and said : “ I promise you to proceed cautiously. 

If I meet with danger or superior force, I will escape as 
well as I can. You need not be uneasy for my sake, 
brother.” 

Ingolf, remembered that Leif had kept his word with 
regard to Atle’s sons. There was no longer any reason 
not to put full trust in Leif’s promises, even if, in ac- 
cordance with his whole character, they were given a 
little hastily, and apparently without thought. And 
if only Leif kept his promise, there was no special reason 
to be anxious about him. In a battle which was not too 
unequal, he was safe enough, unless the Norns had des- 
tined his death, or Odin had marked him out. For 
against the gods and goddesses of fate the best man 
fought in vain. When the matter had been thus de- 
cided, Leif began seriously to prepare for the journey. 
The goods which Ingolf had collected at the beginning 
of winter completely filled three ships. All that re- 
mained was to select the crews and to take care to keep 
the ships fit for sailing. 

When Leif told Helga that he was going, she merely 


174 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

nodded assentingly and smiled at him. But her quiver- 
ing smile concealed bitter grief and great anxiety. 
Helga knew Leif — ah ! she knew him. This Leif of 
hers was a man whom no bond could hold. That was 
his character. And she did not wish to spoil his happi- 
ness by seeking to hold him fast. Never should he guess 
what she suffered when she saw him sail away. Never 
would she mention her sense of loss and the anxiety she 
suffered during the time she must be without him. Sep- 
aration and longing were integral parts of the happi- 
ness she shared with Leif. So young Helga smiled 
bravely and helped Leif with his preparations for the 
journey, giving him cheerful words on the way. But 
she never showed him her anxiety, and concealed her 
grief till she was alone. 

One day in spring, when the wind blew freshly over the 
fjord, Leif sailed away with three ships. He stood on 
the poop and wondered that he had never thought before 
how hard it would be to part from Helga. 

His old countryman clapped him on the shoulder and 
said: 66 On a voyage it is best to keep the salt water 
outside the ship.” 

Leif smiled with a wry face. His heart had not yet 
been hardened. Helga stood on the edge of the shore 
and saw the striped sails bellying in the breeze. The 
ships lay slanting on the water. They glided along as 
if in play, and became so quickly smaller. 

Helga stood alone on the shore. All the others who 
had been down to bid farewell to those departing had 
gone back again to the house. Helga stood there alone 
with the breeze. Everything was green and cheerful 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 175 
around her. Trees stood covered with new leaves, and 
flowers grew again from the ground. And there sailed 
Leif, taking the summer away with him. 

When Helga could not see the ships any more, she at 
last gave up. Helplessly she let herself drop down on 
the young grass. All power had suddenly left her. 
She could not even weep. She remained lying there 
long with her heart beating violently. 

The day after Leif had sailed, Olmod the Old landed 
at Orn’s house. He had five ships, and was on a Viking 
expedition. He was able to inform Ingolf that of A tie’s 
sons Haasten was remaining at home that summer. He 
further said that he had heard that Leif was going alone 
that summer, and he wished to have joined him. When 
he heard that Leif had already sailed he hastened to go 
on, wishing to overtake him. 

That spring came young Ring Harald sailing north 
along the coast. He had made a vow not to let his hair 
be cut till he had reduced the whole of Norway to sub- 
mission, and was therefore by some called Harald Luva, 
and by others Harald Haarfager. Whatever part of 
the country he came across, he called his own. Kings 
and chiefs had to submit with a good or with a bad 
grace. All men from the lowest to the highest became 
his tributaries. He made laws, and appointed chiefs 
over districts to take care that the laws were obeyed. 
Harald met with no opposition either in the hills or the 
fjords. All the Jarls became his subjects. 

But there were other chiefs who murmured, and con- 
sidered that Harald paid scant respect to the law and 
ancient land-rights. These Llarald dealt with hardly. 


176 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
He killed them when he could lay hold of them, and took 
from them their property -without mercy. Many of 
these chiefs had no other resources, if they wished to 
preserve their lives and freedom, but to leave the coun- 
try. They sailed in numbers for the Faroe Islands, the 
Orkneys, Hjaltland, the Southern Islands, together 
with the British Isles and Ireland. 

King Harald found many a Norwegian neck that 
preferred to be broken rather than bend. Although 
himself the most obstinate of all, he would not endure 
obstinacy in others. There was but one King of Nor- 
way, and that King’s name was Harald! 


VII 

Leif had not sailed long before a great quiet came 
over him. Alone with the sea, and his own master ! 
No one to obey ! No one to consider! That was some- 
thing to his taste, and under such circumstances there 
was no room in his heart for care and longing. Suc- 
cessive days awoke him, each with its own voice. Hun- 
gry in soul and body he crept each morning out of his 
sleeping-bag. 

It suited his plans to sail to the British Isles ; accord- 
ingly he was on his way thither. Otherwise he might 
have sailed to the land far toward the west which a 
beggar had once told him of. The only objection was 
that, according to the narrator, there were no people to 
trade with there and no one to pillage. He was out on 
a trading and Viking expedition. Besides, it was an ab- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 177 
surd country, so entirely without inhabitants. If ever 
he had time and opportunity he might still wish to take 
a closer view of it. “ Iceland,” the beggar had called 
it, and had prophesied that he should some day see it. 
He wished to be certain about it, but it lay so far out 
of the way that he could not well include it in his voyage 
that summer. 

If he did, he ran the risk of being obliged to spend the 
winter there. And he could not endure the idea of a 
whole winter wuthout Helga. But he emphasized the 
fact to himself that if he now let Iceland alone, it was 
an act of his own free will. 

The land out there in the west would not run away, 
so whether one went there a summer earlier or later was 
a point of minor importance. Leif, now voyaging 
alone, came to be quite intimate with the sea. He en- 
joyed standing at the helm and feeling the ship under his 
hand. He liked best sailing with all sails spread, and 
cutting his way through the water as it foamed. It was 
to him a great delight to sail in such a way that even old 
and experienced Vikings opened watchful eyes. He tor- 
tured his dragon-ship till it seemed to him the sea held 
its breath, ready to close its foaming jaws round its 
prey. When he thus kept his ship rocking right on 
the edge of destruction, clutching the quivering tiller 
fast in his thin hand, his heart felt light in his breast. 
He felt himself like a ruler over the sea. 

The old Vikings watched Leif closely, and found that 
they had in him a guide after their own heart. They 
winked admiringly at each other when he sailed his 
maddest. His reckless courage filled them with expecta- 


178 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
tion. They showed great willingness in obeying his 
wishes and orders. His young voice sounded sharply 
and pleasantly in their ears. 

They took Leif’s measure secretly and thoroughly 
approved of him. Though he was not so strong in 
body as warriors generally were, yet men with such 
restless eyes were rare. And the strength he had lay in 
hard lumps of muscle in the right places. When he 
greeted or thanked a man he clutched his hand as with 
an iron claw. 

The Vikings found that they had reason to expect an 
eventful summer with much amusement and many dan- 
gers. They thought without regret that some of them 
might find their way to Odin before this Viking expedi- 
tion was over. They had not much objection to sitting 
round the golden-bristled boar, though it should be this 
very winter. 

Meanwhile, Leif had formed a fixed idea that he would 
show Ingolf he could trade and get on in foreign lands 
on his own account. Accordingly, when he got there, 
he showed a caution which was not really according to 
his own mind, and which the Vikings had not expected. 
He traded with great foresight, bought chiefly corn and 
other necessary commodities, including wine and honey. 
He was also, in pursuance of his promise to Ingolf, 
cautious with regard to engaging in battle. 

His men had expected great things in the direction 
of depredations on the coast, and were to a certain ex- 
tent disappointed. 

Leif had comparatively few men, and he did not en- 
gage in unequal warfare. In order, however, to get 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 179 

some booty, he practised unexpected attacks with quite 
a few picked men. With five or six followers he would 
row ashore in a boat in out-of-the-way spots. If they 
succeeded in getting on shore unobserved they began 
to steal forward by remote paths and through deep and 
dark woods. These were occasions of incredible excite- 
ment and secret joy. 

It was possible for days and nights to pass without 
so small a force. And when they had at last found a 
their finding a place adapted for making an attack with 
place, a considerable time might pass in watching for 
an opportunity. But when their well-prepared attack 
at length took place, it was overwhelming and irresisti- 
ble. Even old and experienced Vikings had to acknowl- 
edge that they had never before taken part in such bold 
and exciting expeditions. And they loved Leif for the 
happiness he provided them in their old age. There 
was constant emulation among Leif’s men to get leave to 
accompany him on these forays. But Leif showed an 
immovable firmness and foresight in choosing his com- 
panions. It was counted a great honour to be among 
those chosen. 

The summer passed in sailing to and fro along the 
coasts of England and Ireland. 

Leif diligently avoided collisions with other Vikings. 
There were, as a rule, many following him, and he never 
could be secure from an attack. It was therefore best 
to exhibit suitable caution. For the rest, he slept 
peacefully in his bearskin bag at night. Should it 
happen that he was involved in a fight without his own 
fault, he had nothing to do with that. In many places 


180 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
where he came, he found that Haersten and Holmsten 
had been just before him with their six ships. Leif took 
no real trouble to overtake them. He remembered his 
promise to Ingolf, and had resolved to put his trust in 
chance. Chance had before shown him considerable 
kindness. But when, towards the close of summer, he 
directed his course homewards, chance had not yet come 
to his help. It was therefore with a certain disappoint- 
ment in his mind that he turned homeward from his sum- 
mer expedition. It was indeed no small disappointment 
to him that fate had not allowed him to meet A tie’s 
sons. 

Olmod the Old, who, as has been related, was voyag- 
ing with a fleet of five ships, made inquiries about his 
kinsman, Leif, wherever he went. In many places Leif 
had been just before him, but had sailed again no one 
knew whither. 

Olmod the Old was continually on his scent, and sailed, 
so to speak, in his wake the whole summer, though with- 
out any success in overtaking him. He vowed offerings 
and gifts to Odin if he would, help him to find his kins- 
man. But Odin seemed to have turned his eyes from 
him. 

Olmod kept himself likewise informed concerning the 
voyage of Atle’s sons. From their movements he could 
not ascertain whether they intended evil against Leif or 
not. It did not really look as if they were following 
him. Perhaps they did not know what direction he was 
taking, but Olmod considered it best to be on the watch. 

Late in the summer, Olmod lost every trace of Leif. 
But as a compensation he so nearly succeeded in over- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 181 
taking Atle’s sons that he at last caught a glimpse of 
their ships making out to sea on their way home. It 
seemed to Olmod that they were sailing rather early. 
Were they thinking of concealing themselves among the 
rocks and islands off the coast and giving Leif a warm 
reception when he turned home? Olmod the Old was 
from his own experience not unacquainted with strata- 
gems. He kept a sharp eye on Atle’s sons. 

For some time he kept his ships hidden in a creek 
near the ordinary route in order to catch Leif, if possi- 
ble. At last he could wait no longer. Leif, he thought, 
must have turned homeward by some other way, and as 
good sailing weather just then set in, he directed his 
course towards Norway. He had come to the conclu- 
sion that the safest thing was to try to find Atle’s sons, 
or at any rate to get news of them. If he found that 
they had sailed the direct way home, there was scarcely 
anything to fear from them that autumn. 

On a dark and stormy autumn day, with clouds driv- 
ing across the sky and a tossing sea, Leif came sailing 
past Hisargavl. He was sailing along, thinking of his 1 
disappointment, when he suddenly found himself sur- 
rounded by ships bearing down upon him with their 
battle-ensigns hoisted. For the sake of his promise, 
Leif counted the ships ; they were six in number. He 
looked closer at them, and recognized them as those of 
Atle’s sons. Then Leif felt a great contentment fill his 
mind. Here at last came his friends, the sons of Atle. 
And luckily all chance of flight was excluded. It would 
have been vexatious if he had had to break his word, 
but now it was all right. For Ingolf could not expect 


1 82 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
of him that he should surrender unconditionally in order 
to avoid battle with Atle’s sons. He gathered his ships 
together and commanded them to lower sail ; quickly he 
had boards for defence fixed on the quarter-deck, and 
cleared the ships for action. He went about and be- 
came gradually agitated with excitement and happy ex- 
pectation. At last — at last the opportunity had come 
for seriously exchanging blows with Holmsten. One of 
them should in any case be a guest of Odin that evening. 
How he was to manage with his three ships against the 
six of Atle’s sons did not worry Leif much. 

While he issued his orders, he had only eyes for 
Holmsten’s dragon-ship. There Holmsten came, also 
in a state of excitement. Now the long boat-hooks 
could reach the gunwale on Holmsten’s ship. “ Pull 
hard, men ! ” Leif had a great longing to salute Holm- 
sten. The first spear whistled through the air. From 
both sides it was greeted with cheerful battle cries and 
gay laughter. 

At length the two dragon-ships lay side by side, rock- 
ing violently upon the grey sea. Blows and shouts were 
exchanged above the high quarter-deck boards. Leif 
pushed his men roughly to one side. He had set eyes 
on Holmsten. A spear whistled past his ear, and he 
heard Holmsten laugh and shout : “ There is a spear 

in place of the one you sank here last autumn.” 

Leif twisted himself to one side, seized the spear, 
aimed at Holmsten, and sent it back. 66 X have enough 
weapons, friend Holmsten I I will test the ax you once 
gave me on your own skull.” Holmsten avoided the 
spear at the last moment by a leap to one side. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 183 

Now Leif was close to the gunwale. The fight went 
on energetically on both sides of him. The ships reeled 
violently and crashed noisily against each other. Salt 
spray concealed now and then the hot faces. Leif held 
his ax raised and shook it towards Holmsten. “ Now, 
when I cleave your head before long, it will not be 
through carelessness ! Remember that, Holmsten.” 

Holmsten laughed derisively. He could not properly 
reach Leif because of his men. “ It will double my joy, 
friend Leif, to know you are lying cold at the bottom 
of the sea, by the side of your spear, while your friend 
Helga makes me comfortable.” 

Leif leaped up on the quarter-deck boards, swinging 
his ax high over his head, but was forced back. He 
tried again and again, but was met by a wall of weap- 
ons. One of Atle’s sons’ other ships hooked itself fast 
on to the other side of the dragon-ship. The battle 
raged furiously along both gunwales. 

During an involuntary pause in the battle, Leif found 
time to look round him a little. One of his ships was 
already overpowered, and the other surrounded by three 
of the enemy’s smaller ships ; his own was so hard 
pressed that it was obviously only a question of how 
long he could hold out. 

Leif saw clearly how untenable his position was. He 
did not envy Atle’s sons their victory. He called those 
who had followed him on many bold expeditions to him, 
and said in a choked voice: “ If we are going to Val- 
halla, friends, let us take Holmsten with us, and as many 
of his men as we can ! ” 

So he stormed the gunwale, followed by his best men, 


184 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

and succeeded in obtaining a foothold on Holmsten’s 
dragon-ship. And now Leif was at his ease. Gener- 
ously he dealt out blows and thrusts, and devoted him- 
self energetically to the battle. He saw his men falling 
round him, and he himself had several wounds which he 
had not time to think about. He was not afraid of 
death, but meant to take Holmsten with him. 

While Leif stood there, and dealt doughty blows 
around him in order to get at Holmsten, there came in 
sight a fleet of five ships by Hisargavl. The five ships 
were sailing swiftly, and the water foamed round their 
bows as they approached. At last Olmod the Old was 
about to overtake Leif. And he had bestirred himself, 
as it appeared. He gave himself no time to survey the 
situation, but drove his ships right in among the com- 
batants. In his green cloak, with a golden helmet on 
his head, he stood in a dignified attitude by the mast 
and issued his orders. 

“ It looks as if you wanted a little help, Cousin Lief l ” 
he shouted in the joy of battle. All other talking he 
left to his weapons. 

Haersten saw quickly that his position was untenable, 
and gave orders for flight. But it was by no means so 
easy to get away in a moment. Holmsten’s ship soon 
lay wedged in between those of Leif and Olmod the Old. 
Leif made use of the confusion which ensued among 
Holmsten’s men at suddenly finding enemies on both 
sides, and made his way close up to Holmsten. When 
Holmsten saw him coming, he prepared to receive him 
in his cool and quiet way. But now Leif had become 
quite wild. When it seemed that he could not get for- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 185 
ward quickly enough, he flung his ax at Holmsten’s face. 
Holmsten dropped his weapons, threw up his arms, 
reeled, and fell. 

Leif’s joy at seeing Holmsten fall was so great that 
he forgot to be on his guard. One of his men pushed 
a shield in front of him just in time. The shield was 
cloven by the blow of an ax, intended for Leif. But 
Leif was not to die that day. Now he was himself 
again, picked up his ax, and continued the attack. 
After Holmsten’s fall the opposition was soon broken. 

A couple of Olmod’s ships had recovered the ship 
Atle’s sons had won from Leif. Olmod secured for 
himself Holmsten’s ship as a reward for his trouble, and 
in order to be able to provide offerings and gifts to Odin. 
The remainder of Atle’s sons’ ships escaped in disorder. 

Olmod came across Leif where he was sitting and 
binding up his wounds. 

44 You are bleeding much, cousin, and can be glad that 
you still have blood to bleed.” 

“ That I owe to you, Cousin Olmod. What lucky 
wind was that which blew you here, just when you were 
most needed? ” 

44 Ask, rather, what freak was it of Odin’s that he did 
not let me overtake you before. I came to Dalsfjord 
the day after you sailed, and have pursued you in vain 
all the summer.” 

Leif looked up hastily. A sudden fear shot through 
him. 

44 What did you want me for? ” 

44 That you have seen.” 

Leif was quiet again. 44 Nothing more? ” he asked. 


1 86 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

“Don’t you think I had cause enough? Did you 
expect me to follow your tedious tracks, the whole sum- 
mer, merely to bring you a greeting from Helga? ” 

Leif rose and drew a bracelet off his arm. It was for 
Olmod. He brought forth his most valuable things, 
resolved to give Olmod all the best he had. Objections 
were useless. When Leif gave, he gave what he had, 
and kept nothing back till he had no more. 

“ Finally, don’t think that by killing Holmsten and 
putting Haersten to flight you have finished with Atle’s 
sons,” Olmod said warningly. “ I think, Cousin Leif, 
you had better come home and spend the 'winter with 
me.” 

Leif thanked him warmly for the invitation. “ It is 
such a short way home to the fjords that I don’t care 
about making a circuit. But what if you came home 
with me and remained with us for the winter, Cousin 
Olmod? ” 

But Olmod declined. A whole winter in one and the 
same place did not tempt him at all. “You brothers 
have enough friends round you, but be careful, cousin. 
I should be surprised if Haersten let the grass grow 
over the matter he has to settle with you. I am glad 
that this time I could be a little use to you, Leif. You 
have rewarded my help, as one might expect from you, 
spendthrift that you are! May good fortune follow 
you wherever you go.” 

Olmod and Leif parted with great friendliness', and 
each sailed to his own home. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 187 


VIII 

It was really a surprise to Ingolf when he heard from 
his brother what had happened at Hisargavl. He had 
gradually come to fear a collision between Leif and 
Atle’s sons. He did not trust Atle’s sons any more 
since the feast of the previous winter. With a gloomy 
and slightly absent expression he heard Leif’s account 
to the end. i6 1 do not grieve for Holmsten,” he said 
severely, when Leif finished. “ I am glad that both 
brothers did not escape alive from the game. The 
Noms often strike accurately.” 

“ It was by my ax that Holmsten fell,” Leif an- 
swered curtly. “ I will not share the honour of having 
slain him with any one, not even with the Noms ! ” 

Ingolf smiled, but there was no laughter in his mind. 

“ The most important point, Leif, is that you re- 
turned home alive,” he said cordially. “ Thank your- 
self for it, but allow me to thank the gods and goddesses 
of fate.” 

Helga was very quiet when Leif told her about the 
batle. There rose in her soul a yet greater tenderness 
towards him. Every day, yes, every hour, with Leif 
became precious. A foreboding told her that Leif was 
scarcely destined to live long. Her happiness was like 
the flying birds. 

Orn became quite enlivened by hearing of the fight at 
Hisargavl. Ingolf related it to him with much detail. 
As soon as he had finished, Orn demanded to have the 
whole told over again. It was entirely after his mind 


1 8 8 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

— a proof that the race was not extinct. He put many 
questions and asked for incidents. Time after time, 
when the talk concerned Leif, he nodded approvingly. 
When his curiosity was at last satisfied, he sat silent 
and thoughtful, and still kept nodding to himself. 

Rodmar sat in his darkness and heard the account 
through at one sitting. When Ingolf began again, he 
sighed deeply, rose, and, supported on his two sticks, 
tottered to his chamber and crept into bed. He could 
not understand that there was still so much disturbance 
in the world. 

When Ingolf came out again from his father he was 
silent and thoughtful. He sought Leif, and found him 
in Helga’s room. Ingolf sat down silently by his side 
and remained for a while without speaking. “ Now 
Haasten remains behind with one arm,” he said at last, 
in a subdued tone, more as though speaking to himself 
than to the others. 

Helga looked hastily at him. “ One must feel a 
great longing after a brother one loves,” she said 
quietly. 

Leif laughed sarcastically. “ It will scarcely be a 
one-armed Haasten who comes out to take vengeance 
for Holmsten.” 

Ingolf looked at him. There was a troubled, but firm 
and quiet, look in his eye. “ I should be surprised if 
Haasten took vengeance,” Leif laughed scornfully. In- 
golf rose quietly and said : “ But it would be best to be 

on our guard against Haersten.” 

Ingolf took home to the chief house as many of his 
own and Leif’s men as could be spared from the rest of 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 189 
their property. Moreover, he collected his friends from 
the surrounding district. He always had many people 
round him in the winter. He set guards on all the roads 
to secure himself against an unexpected attack, and for 
the rest watched events quietly. 

What had happened, had happened, and could not be 
altered. And whose fault was it? Neither his nor his 
sworn brother’s, it seemed to him. He made offerings 
to Odin and Thor, and relied on them and on the good 
luck of the family. 

Already, on the day after his arrival, Leif had to go 
to bed. For a considerable time he had to keep quiet. 
He suffered a good deal from his wounds. They were 
on various parts of his body, so that it was difficult for 
him to find rest. 

Leif was not good at keeping quiet. He was tor- 
mented by an intolerable impatience. Time after time 
when his wounds were on the point of healing up they 
opened again, because of his want of care. The fever 
which accompanied the wounds had a wearing effect both 
on his flesh and his temper. He became even more bony 
and thin than he had been before. Long and wasted 
he lay there in bed, and vexed himself over the loss of 
the days, of which he was unjustly deprived. 

Helga nursed him patiently, and always sat by him. 
That was the only thing which reconciled him with this 
kind of existence. He could not look away from her 
even for a moment. Leif discovered that there was a 
happiness and soothing effect in the touch of Helga’s 
hands, which he had not hitherto known. All the time 
he had to have her hands busy about him. Leif was not 


190 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
easy to manage. In vain did Helga beg and pray him 
to leave the bandages alone and not continually look at 
his wounds at the wrong time. At last she went in des- 
pair to Ingolf, and Ingolf found a means. On the same 
day that Helga had spoken to him, he said to Leif in his 
usual composed manner: “Your wounds are a long 
time healing, Cousin Leif. You will hardly be fit for 
fighting by the time Haersten attacks us.” That was 
effectual. Ingolf knew his brother. From that day 
Leif lay rigidly still and did not touch the bandages. 
With a mighty effort he kept his mind in control and 
curbed his impatience. With a mysterious smile in her 
eyes, which Leif could not understand, Helga continued 
to nurse him. Leif could not make out why her eyes 
had suddenly become so bright. Here he lay, tortured 
both outwardly and inwardly. One would think that 
was nothing to be amused at. At last he asked her 
plainly, and in a rather morose tone, why she was so 
cheerful. Helga laughed, and promised to tell him as 
soon as his wounds were healed; for now that could 
hardly be long. Leif sighed. It seemed to him that 
already the time had been incomprehensively long. 

At last the day came when Leif could go about on his 
legs again. But it was plain that he had quite got out 
of the habit of going with his head high and his legs 
down. His head was not so high aloft, and his legs 
tottered. He had to laugh at them. They were really 
silly legs — to speak plainly — miserable legs of dough. 
He went about laughing and waddling, and was obliged 
every minute to sit down and rest his legs. He had 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 191 
never guessed that such a simple thing as walking could 
become so difficult. 

But one day it was difficult no longer, and Leif 
rapidly forgot both his sickness and his weakness. 

What was Haersten about? It seemed to Leif plain 
that he had a claim that Haersten should come now, 
and quickly. Now that he was in a condition to receive 
him in a suitable manner, he began to long for him 
deeply. 

Leif went and exercised his arm-muscles by cutting 
logs for the fire. Ah ! So he intended to split Haer- 
sten’s head. But Haersten still kept them waiting. It 
was not according to Leif’s mind to go and wait for an 
attack, which did not come. Had he had sufficient hope 
that Ingolf would go with him on a journey to Gaulum 
he would have proposed it. In his leisure time Leif im- 
agined for himself an attack on Atle Jarl and his sons, 
picturing it down to the minutest details. He would 
himself strike down Haersten and Atle Jarl. But he 
would prefer to let Haasten escape with his life. It 
was a shame that such a splendid plan of attack should 
always be shipwrecked on Ingolf’s obstinacy. 

At last Haersten came. It was lucky that Ingolf had 
set guards upon the roads. Haersten did not come 
alone. He had planned his attack with care. He 
wished to wait till the brothers perhaps might not be 
so much on the alert. And he wished to come with a 
picked and numerous band, which it took time to as- 
semble secretly, as the sworn brothers had friends also 
in those parts. Haersten had resolved that one life 


192 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
was too little compensation for Holmsten. They should 
both die. Preferably he would strike them both to 
earth with his own hand. 

Haersten had to do without Haasten’s help in plan- 
ning and carrying out his attack. On the other hand, 
Haasten did not put difficulties in his way. Haasten 
gave his mind to taking what vengeance he could, and 
to the extent he was able. 64 But my mind and my sense 
of justice tell me,” he said, 44 not to go with you against 
the sworn brothers.” 

Haersten asked him whether his mind and his sense 
of justice did not also bid him to leave both his brothers 
unavenged in case he also should fall. Haasten an- 
swered him that time would show, but that it was con- 
ceivable. 

44 It might seem that you care more for Ingolf than 
for your own brothers,” Haersten said coldly. 

44 1 have a great regard for Ingolf,” answered Haas- 
ten. tfi You brothers were not afraid to profit by your 
greater force when you attacked Leif.” 

So the conversation ended. When Haersten had 
quietly collected as many men as he thought would en- 
sure a victory over the sworn brothers, even if he found 
them prepared, he started one night and took the way to 
Dalsfjord. He advanced by secret paths, and hid in 
the woods. He marched only by night, resting by day. 
But though he showed all possible caution, Ingolf’s 
guards got news of his expedition. They were able to 
inform Ingolf in time that Haersten was approaching 
with a numerous following. In great haste the brothers 
collected a still larger number, and marched against 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 193 
him to meet him before he expected it. The encounter 
took place one winter morning on the heath. Haersten 
and his men had spent the night on the outskirts of the 
wood. It was a still morning, with mild air, and the 
ground was heavy. The weather was admirably 
adapted for a battle, save that the snow became slippery 
when it had been trodden hard. Haersten and the 
sworn brothers prepared themselves, each on his own 
side, for a trial of strength, in all quietness and at 
their leisure. The result of the battle was of great im- 
portance to both parties, and they urged their men to 
be cautious and keep together. 

Haersten seemed to seek Leif. And Leif was not the 
man to avoid a willing opponent. It was not long be- 
fore they stood opposite each other, both fierce and vigi- 
lantly watching. But the fight between them was of 
short duration. They had only exchanged a few blows, 
and neither of them had yet been wounded, when Haer- 
sten slipped on the smooth ground. In the same instant 
Leif’s ax descended on his neck. Haersten fell and re- 
mained lying. Red blood streamed profusely out of a 
deep wound in his neck. Smoking, it oozed into the 
cold white snow and formed holes with reddish edges. 
Thus fell Haersten. 

When he had fallen, Ingolf had the trumpet blown for 
a truce, and invited Haersten’s followers to go in peace. 
As no one wished for more fighting, Haersten’s men 
marched, carrying his body, from their unsuccessful 
attempt, back to Gaulum. 

Leif was quite jubilant. He never remembered hav- 
ing been so glad. Now he had avenged the attack at 


194 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
Hisargavl, and settled all the rest of the account which 
he had with Atle’s sons. There was a high degree of 
intoxication in his mind. He composed and sang with 
a strong voice a victor’s song. 

But Ingolf did not show any joy at the victory. He 
was silent and thoughtful. As soon as he had returned 
home with his men, he went to his father and told him of 
Haersten’s fall. “ It will not be in the neck of Atle’s 
sons alone that Leif’s ax has struck wounds,” screamed 
Orn, with his heavy cutting voice, when he had heard 
Ingolf to the end. “ Trust me ! It is all over with our 
peace in Dalsfjord. Even though we have many 
friends, Atle Jarl and Haasten will in the long run 
prove too strong for us. Make peace with Haasten, my 
son, before it is too late. For old friendship’s sake 
he will be satisfied with taking your property and 
driving you away from this district. I am too old, 
I know, to leave Dalsfjord myself. But don’t you 
trouble about that. I am full of days, and will die 
soon. I had a foreboding that Leif would cause mis- 
fortune. But he is a plucky fellow. And what has 
happened has happened. Let me see him.” 

It had never been the case before that Om had 
wished to see Leif. Once the sight of Leif had been 
to him a plague and an unceasing source of annoyance. 
Now he wished to see him. Leif was called, and will- 
ingly let himself be inspected by Om’s red, inflamed, 
swollen eyes. His spirits were so cheerful that he felt 
impelled to show himself friendly even towards Orn. 

“Your appearance does not answer to your ex- 
ploits,” Orn exclaimed. “You are rather slight in 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 195 
body to be a warrior. But, at any rate, I will give 
you Helga since she wants you. Take her and marry 
her, but do it quickly. For I will gladly drink your 
health at your marriage before I die. And I shall 
die soon.” 

Leif smiled and thanked him and was very friendly. 
It amused him to think that the permission was really 
rather superfluous. But that day he did not wish for 
any trouble. Haersten’s death made him feel so pros- 
perous and benevolent. 

Ingolf had all day long been meditating. In the 
evening he asked Leif to speak with him in private. 

“ What do you think of sending messengers to Haas- 
ten and offering him an agreement on terms to be fixed 
by himself? ” he asked quietly. 

“ That seems to me to be unnecessary weakness to 
submit the matter to Haasten’s decision alone,” an- 
swered Leif arrogantly. “ If he wishes to pay us a 
call we shall know how to receive him.” 

“ You forget, brother,” said Ingolf calmly, but in a 
troubled voice, “ that only in the utmost extremity 
can I use weapons against Haasten. You have de- 
prived him of both his brothers. Even apart from 
the manner in which it happened it is a great loss for 
him. I, for my own part, will gladly purchase peace 
with Haasten at the price which he agrees upon.” 

The tone of Ingolf’s voice moved Leif to the heart. 
“ If you, for your part, wish to submit to Haasten’s 
decision, I dare say I can consent,” he said, in a com- 
pliant tone. “ Hitherto I have not lost by letting 
you decide matters.” 


196 THE sworn brothers 

Ingolf chose the men whom he considered best suited 
for sucli a mission, and bade them go to Gaulum and 
offer Haasten terms. Haasten received Ingolf’s en- 
voys silently, and without returning their salutations. 
They had, however, been his companions on a summer 
Viking expedition, and several of them had been his 
friends. They did not know Haasten again. He had 
aged, and all signs of youthfulness had been obliterated 
from his face. Though his skin was still soft and 
smooth it was deeply furrowed. His look was cold 
and solitary. When he had heard the object of their 
errand, he said in an icy tone : 66 1 will answer some 

day. Meanwhile I offer you shelter and food.” 

Haasten let them wait a whole week for an answer. 
He had a hard battle to fight first with his father and 
then with himself. Atle Jarl would at first hear noth- 
ing about an agreement. He demanded uncondition- 
ally, although coldly and without passion, the lives of 
the sworn brothers. He blamed Haasten for what had 
happened, because he had at the time refused to follow 
his advice and offer Ingolf and Leif blood-brotherhood. 
Haasten did not answer at length. But he did not give 
ilp till Atle Jarl agreed to lay the matter in his hand. 
When Haasten had thus become solely responsible, he 
had a hard battle to fight with himself. His family 
instinct demanded blood and not compensation. Even 
multiplied weregeld could not compensate him for the 
loss of his brothers. But could Leif’s and Ingolf’s lives 
do it either? The fact was that nothing could com- 
pensate for the loss of his brothers. But large fines 
might sustain the outward honour of the family. To 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 197 
bear weapons against Ingolf, who had not committed 
any crime, was in itself unthinkable. Besides, Haasten 
remembered his vow to decide impartially if at any 
time a decision should be demanded from him. 

When he had at last arrived at unity with himself he 
bade Ingolf’s messengers be called, and spoke as follows : 
44 The sworn brothers have desired me to judge between 
them and myself. My judgment is this. No compen- 
sation shall be asked for Holmsten because of his un- 
justified attack on Leif. But as compensation for 
Haersten, who went to take righteous vengeance for 
his brother, and by doing so lost his life at Leif’s hand, 
I adjudge to myself all the sworn brothers’ real 
property. Before three winters have passed they shall 
have left all their land and territory and fjords and 
hills. Otherwise they will be treated as outlaws wher- 
ever they may be found in the district.” 

The messengers went home and informed the brothers 
of Haasten’s sentence. When Ingolf had heard it, he 
said quietly : 44 That was to be expected.” 

Leif, on the other hand, was furious. He never re- 
membered to have heard of such an unreasonable sen- 
tence. Ingolf bade him take the matter quietly. 
44 The sentence is certainly hard,” he said, 44 but Haas- 
ten’s loss is harder. I would not willingly change my 
circumstances with his.” 

All bitterness against Haasten vanished compara- 
tively quickly from Leif’s mind. The question, where 
they should now go and settle, absorbed him, all at once, 
so completely that he had no thoughts to spare for 
anything else. Leif was glad enough to go and settle 


19B THE SWORN BROTHERS 
in a new country. One day he wished to go to Eng- 
land. Another day Ireland had suddenly assumed a 
great attraction for him. The Faroe Islands, Hj alt- 
land, the Southern Islands — at least once a day in 
his thoughts he settled in all these. All at once the 
idea of Iceland occurred to him; strange to think that 
he had not come upon it at once. 

Making a leap in the air, he went there in his own 
thoughts and settled in a strange land, and so sought 
Ingolf in hot haste. “ We will go to Iceland ! ” he 
shouted in his delight, and was already absorbed, body 
and soul, in his idea. “ There we shall have a whole 
country to ourselves.” 

“ Is it not somewhat lonely ? ” asked Ingolf, smiling. 

Leif thought over that, and conceded that in the 
long run it might be rather lonely. “ But you will see 
many will follow after us. Many in Norway are dis- 
contented with Harald, who will not tolerate any will 
by the side of his own. The best people will follow 
us thither — people who can no more find complete 
freedom in this country. Harald is already seeking 
to kill many of the best men. There his arm cannot 
reach them. Sooner or later the land will be colon- 
ized; it is said to be fertile. Let us be the first. In- 
golf, do you hear, let us be the first.” 

There was something in Leif’s plan which attracted 
Ingolf. If he had to depart and find himself a new 
dwelling, why not seek it in a new country? Ingolf 
the Imperturbable felt his heart beat. 

Leif was all fire and flame, and consequently not to 
be resisted. At last Ingolf yielded. “ We can journey 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 199 
there in the summer and survey the country,” he said. 

When Leif had got Ingolf so far, he became wild with 
joy and dangerous to approach. Ingolf had to wrestle 
with him ; there was no getting out of it. A little after 
they were both lying in the soft snow. When the 
wrestle was thus over, they began to pile snow on each 
other, till they had to stop for laughing. The boy was 
uppermost in each of them. They were happy, and for- 
got to be troubled and anxious at the loss of their 
property. Blood and life surged through them. They 
could still fight as in the old days. 


IX 

Ingolf kept deeply secreted in his heart the image of 
a young girl. Her name was Hallveig, and hers was 
the only woman’s look which had ever stirred his soul. 
Her grey eyes lived so vividly in his memory, he could 
see them before him when he wished. The thought of 
them made his usually quiet heart quiver. Her name 
was Hallveig, and her image was painfully and distinctly 
impressed on his mind. 

He had seen her for the first time in the preceding 
winter when, on one of his trading journeys, he had 
spent the night at the house of her father, Erode. And 
that first time had hitherto been the only one. 

He had made the acquaintance of her father, Erode, 
and her brother, Lopt, before, at various sacrificial 
feasts. Lopt and himself had much in common. Lopt 
was a quiet and rather reserved man. His whole ap- 


200 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
pearance bore the stamp of the well-to-do yeoman 
fanner’s firmness and self-possession. Lopt and Ingolf 
had always felt attracted by each other. They were 
both strong, high-born men without deceit or flaw in 
their minds. A mutual consciousness of their inner 
affinity had from the beginning brought them near each 
other. 

Thus Ingolf came to the house one winter evening 
and saw Lopt’s sister. Her name was Hallveig, and 
she was only eighteen. She was very serious. Ingolf 
never saw her smile like other young women. Already 
her inner seriousness roused great disquiet in his mind. 
Hallveig did not go about lavishing her smiles. Her 
look was watchful and critical. She looked at people, 
and had a scale to weigh them by. One became clear 
about one’s value under her look. And her look did 
not flinch nor change like that of other women when 
one encountered it. It met one like a man’s. It was 
in some degree a boy’s look, thought Ingolf. He sat 
there that evening and could take neither his eyes nor 
his thoughts from Hallveig. Lopt and Erode often 
had to repeat their questions to him. The whole of 
Ingolf’s listening faculty was turned inward and not 
outward. He sat by her side and forgot both them and 
himself. All that he knew was that now and then he 
cast a furtive glance at Hallveig. And yet he sat the 
whole time and looked at her. It was the first time 
that Ingolf had been in love, and it was of benefit to 
him. The next day was fixed for his departure, but he 
did not go. He was travelling with important objects, 
and it would be very extraordinary if he delayed his 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 201 
journey without special reason. But he remained all 
the same, and forgot to give himself or others a reason 
for it. He simply remained because it was impossible 
for him to go that day. 

He had a long talk with Hallveig, sitting by her side 
in the morning. A little after (so it seemed) he was 
surprised to find it already evening. How the day had 
gone was a puzzle to him. He was lost. 

Ingolf did not find it at all surprising that he found 
such a good opportunity to talk with Hallveig undis- 
turbed. He had neither time to notice nor to reflect 
upon the fact that Lopt and Frode had left them alone 
the whole day. He had no idea that any one could 
look at him and observe from his behaviour what impres- 
sion Hallveig had made upon him. 

The whole of that day, which he afterwards did not 
know what had become of, he sat and talked with 
Hallveig. Not once did she smile at him. But there 
was in her look a charm which surpassed every smile. 
There was a warmth in her look and a secret confidence 
which put him at his ease. Her nearness filled him 
with a peculiar quivering consciousness of security. 
He felt that there was already a deep intimacy between 
him and this woman whom he did not know and yet 
knew. 

The next day Ingolf went on his journey. When he 
gave Hallveig his hand at parting their eyes met. The 
look of both was firm and serious. Suddenly Hallveig 
smiled. Her eyes became bright with a beaming smile. 
All at once Ingolf perceived that there was something 
he had forgotten or neglected — something which could 


202 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

not be omitted. He stood there with her hand in his, 

uneasy and irresolute, quite otherwise than he was 

accustomed. 

But he now already held her hand at departure and 
must go. Confused and dissatisfied with himself, and 
yet at the same time filled with a tremulous happiness, 
he went away. Ingolf did not forget Hallveig’ s solitary 
smile. He reflected much whether she had ever given 
any other man her smile, in the same way as she had to 
him. He did not believe it. But if she had, the man 
must die. 

How Ingolf passed the year, before he returned to 
Hallveig, he did not know. It was quite unconsciously 
that he gave the memory of her time to grow and 
blossom in his soul. All that he knew about it was that 
every time he had resolved with himself that now he 
would go to Frode’s house and visit her, his mind was 
filled with anxiety and unrest. He found no solid 
reason for waiting. His longing urged him almost ir- 
resistibly to make the journey. He was also quite cer- 
tain that he ran a risk by postponing it. All the 
same he waited. 

At a feast at Gaulum the previous autumn he had 
met Lopt. During the three days of the feast they 
had been inseparable. Quite involuntarily they had 
kept together. Once, when the talk had turned on 
Lopt’s and Frode’s affairs, Lopt said, smiling: “We 
cannot get my sister, Hallveig, married. She rejects 
all suitors.” As Lopt spoke, Ingolf’s heart began to 
beat violently and joyfully. The day seemed to ex- 
pand around him and become beautiful. The colours 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 203 

of the heavens and earth crowded at once upon his sight. 
The air itself became fresh and reviving. He found no 
answer to make to Lopt’s remark, and therefore pre- 
tended not to have heard him. Soon afterwards he be- 
gan to talk of something else. But he did not succeed 
in deceiving Lopt, who, when alone, smiled to himself. 
Soon after Ingolf’s meeting with Lopt, Leif returned 
from his Viking expedition. Ingolf had enough to do, 
and was for a time cut off from all possibility of travel- 
ling. 

But when the agreement with Haasten was settled, 
and the journey to Iceland to look for a residence de- 
termined on, it became at once as impossible for Ingolf 
to postpone the decisive interview with Hallveig as it 
had been for him before to resolve on a visit. Ingolf, 
according to his custom, first spoke with his father on 
the subject. Om was highly pleased, and declared 
himself in every way satisfied with his choice. “ Frode,” 
he said, “ is rich and well-born. It is time that you 
settled in life. Leif and you can celebrate your mar- 
riage in the autumn. You should not put off the 
journey for a day. You can go, my son.” 

Ingolf went to Leif and asked for his companionship 
on a journey without disclosing further the object or 
the direction of it. Leif needed no pressing. He was 
always ready for a journey, he did not care where. 
If Ingolf did not reveal to him his object and the place 
whither he was bound, it was because he had good 
reasons for concealing it. 

The brothers left home with a select but not very 
numerous retinue. Leif received a strong impression 


204 THE sworn brothers 

that this mysterious journey was of great importance. 
Could it possibly be a wooing expedition? Leif studied 
Ingolf closely, and came to the conclusion that it was. 
It amused him to guess whom Ingolf had pitched upon. 
He could not make out. In that respect he knew noth- 
ing of Ingolf. Had Ingolf really fallen in love dumbly 
and silently? Leif could not picture Ingolf to himself 
as an enamoured suitor. In secret he was immensely 
amused at his brother’s seriousness and taciturnity. 
But he showed great caution in his behaviour towards 
him. He observed that a great deal was at stake for 
Ingolf. He surmised that his quiet demeanour was not 
so genuine as it usually was. 

When one evening they reached Frode’s house, Leif 
did not guess that they had already arrived at their 
journey’s end. But as soon as he saw Hallveig, he 
knew; and he was immediately filled with a warm and 
brotherly affection for her. 

When Hallveig heard that Ingolf had come, she at 
once knew the reason. She put on her finest dress, 
and displayed her most valuable ornaments. Any one 
might think what they would; for her it was a festal 
day. 

In this attire she went to meet Ingolf. Quietly and 
seriously she returned his greeting. Her whole manner 
told Ingolf that he was expected. 

One evening she led Ingolf to her room. The next 
day Ingolf spoke with Lopt and Frode, and asked Hall- 
veig in marriage. Frode gave him his daughter gladly. 
Lopt said that there was no one he would prefer as a 
brother-in-law. They quickly settled all the conditions. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 205 
The sworn brothers’ loss of their property was not men- 
tioned at the time. Hallveig was summoned and ques- 
tioned. Willingly and with deep earnestness she gave 
her mind to the matter. When, later on, she was alone 
with Ingolf, she wept and kissed him fervently. Ingolf 
was a constant surprise to her. Afterwards she smiled 
at him through her tears. There was a peculiar power 
and a complete abandonment in all her caresses. In- 
golf felt beyond the shadow of a doubt that she was 
completely his, and for the whole of life. And her de- 
meanour showed just as certainly that she was happy. 

Frode and Lopt celebrated the betrothal by a great 
feast. Ingolf and Leif remained a whole week in the 
house. When they left, the wedding was fixed for about 
three weeks later. In accordance with Ingolf’s wish it 
was to take place in Ora’s house, since his father felt 
too old to travel. 

Ingolf and Hallveig were agreed on having the short- 
est possible interval before their marriage. They did 
not wish to wait a day longer than necessary, now that 
they at last had each other. They found it almost im- 
possible to separate, though it was only for three weeks. 
They could not comprehend how they had hitherto been 
able to live without each other. Ingolf felt now that 
the two years which had passed since he saw Hallveig 
for the first time were as though lost for him. Yes, his 
whole youth seemed as though lost for him since he had 
not met Hallveig before. 

Never had Ingolf before reflected how short life really 
was. He had not measured it with love’s measuring- 
rod. 


20 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 


X 

Om was peculiarly restless during the first days after 
Ingolf’s departure. He became gradually alarmed, 
though he had considered it the wisest course to conceal 
his alarm from his son, lest Frode should perhaps make 
difficulties, now that the agreement with Haasten had 
deprived Ingolf of all his real property. It was quite 
clear to Orn that it was on this point the prestige of 
his family would be tested. If Frode did not refuse to 
give his daughter in marriage to a man who had been 
judicially deprived of all his landed property, it was 
because the man was Ingolf, Orn’s son. 

As the days passed, and it became evident that the 
brothers, at any rate, were not returning at once, Orn 
became quieter, and with every succeeding day his 
calm increased. The continued absence of the brothers 
could be only due to their having succeeded in their 
object. 

Orn and Rodmar celebrated this by a justifiable drink- 
ing bout. Before the fumes of their intoxication had 
quite passed off, Ingolf and Leif returned home, having, 
as was apparent, quite succeeded in their object. Orn 
and Rodmar went on drinking to celebrate the good news. 
Then Om went to bed and slept for a night and half 
the following day. When he had had his sleep out, he 
began to arrange everything for the double marriage 
which was imminent. He also wished to have a hand in 
the preparations for the feast. He let all and each 
know that since the gods had been so kind as to allow 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 207 
him to celebrate both his children’s weddings, and that 
at the same time, there should be a feast which should 
be known far and wide and be long remembered. He 
had the temple, together with every house and every 
cottage on the estate, swept from roof to floor, and all 
the woodwork cleaned. He himself selected the cattle 
and the swine which should be fattened for the feast. 
He tasted the liquors brewed, measured out the meal and 
the com, and was everywhere. 

Rodmar was homeless in all this disquiet. He tried 
his old device of going to bed and keeping himself to 
himself in his darkness. He counted the days and was 
morose. About three weeks were to be occupied with 
preparations for the wedding, and then a week with 
the festivities themselves. Rodmar drained his drink- 
ing-horn deep. The future looked very empty to him. 

Orn sent Leif and Ingolf out to invite people to the 
feast. They spent many days in travelling from house 
to house. Orn questioned them every evening as to 
where they had been, and made plans for the next day. 
He was indefatigable. A peculiar excitement, which 
he did not remember to have felt before a festival since 
his early youth, deprived him of his appetite for food, 
and partly also of his tendency to drink. He was about 
from early morning to late in the evening. All the 
same, it was difficult for him to sleep at night. 

Helga sat in her room and sewed at her bridal dress. 
Every hour of leisure which Leif found he spent there 
with her. He was considerate towards Helga, and 
avoided disturbing her with talk or caresses. He could 
stand for hours together and watch her, as she sat and 


208 the sworn brothers 

sewed, eager and absorbed, with busy hands and hot 
cheeks. Leif was very happy at that time. But as 
soon as he had not Helga before his eyes, he could not 
realize that in a few days they should be man and wife, 
and had to go in again and watch her sewing the bridal 
dress. 

Om had the banqueting hall draped with costly tap- 
estry, and shields hung up. 

At last the day dawned. And the same day spring 
made its entry with southern winds and genial tempera- 
ture. Already from the early morning guests began to 
assemble at the house. Somewhat before noon came 
Frode with his daughter and son and a splendid retinue. 
Then the wedding could begin. With eight days’ un- 
broken festivities the marriage bonds between Ingolf 
and Hallveig, Helga and Leif, were sealed. 

Frode showed great gladness at the connection, and 
celebrated his daughter’s marriage with all the custom- 
ary sports and pageants. Ora only celebrated his son’s 
with sacrificial feasts, with, as became a host, the usual 
meals and drinking bouts. The meals were many and 
luxurious, and the drinking bouts were long. Quan- 
tities of mead and wine were drunk, and many swine 
and oxen eaten, besides game and other food common 
at festivals. 

Once more Orn was able to sit in stately fashion in the 
high-seat and preside over a feast. During the days of 
this festival Frode shared the high-seat with him. They 
knew each other well by the wounds received in their 
youth and manhood. Many cheerful memories were 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 209 
revived, and they shared in great friendliness their 
drink and the high-seat. 

Orn had become an old man. Age had bent his back, 
made his face puffy, and dulled his hearing. Neverthe- 
less, he wore an air of dignity on such an occasion. 
The chieftain was uppermost in him, and his natural 
courage blazed up in one last victorious flame. Ingolf 
had rather feared that his father would not be equal 
to preserving his dignified bearing through such a 
trying festival, but his fear proved groundless. Orn 
rallied all his powers and held out. He took part in 
every meal. He emptied his drinking-horn at every 
health. He sat as host in the high-seat, and still on 
the last day of the feast his spirits were unequalled, his 
thinking power unaffected. He held out till the last 
guest had left the place. Then the spring had already 
done its work. The snow had gone. Everywhere one 
caught glimpses of the first signs of summer’s approach- 
ing splendour. 

The next day Orn lay dead in his bed. His right 
hand clasped the knife with which he had just succeeded 
in cutting the sign of the Hammer on his breast. He 
had secured his seat in Valhalla. 

Thus died Orn. His death did not especially surprise 
Ingolf or any one else. Age and debility had during 
the last years handled him roughly. In spite of all, he 
had been a chieftain to the end. 


2io THE SWORN BROTHERS 


XI 

It was very still in the house after Orn’s death. 
His harsh, irascible voice was suddenly lost in a great 
silence. And this silence was doubly impressive just 
after the concluded festivities. Ingolf at once set his 
people to brew drink, slaughter animals, and prepare 
for the funeral feast. Om should begin his last journey 
with all suitable honour. But this time the work was 
done without the noise which usually attended prepara- 
tions of that kind. In Ingolf’s soul there remained a 
special sense of bereavement. He had always shown 
his father reverence; now he realized that he had also 
been very fond of him. Ingolf selected with care a spot 
down by the fjord where a funeral barrow would look 
well in the landscape. He caused a little natural hollow 
to be filled with potter’s clay; then had one of his 
smaller dragon-ships rolled on logs thither and fixed 
on the bed of clay with its bow turned towards the 
south. Orn’s journey should be towards the south and 
the sun. When the ship was settled in its place and 
shored up, Ingolf traced a wide circle round it. Orn 
perhaps was the last of the race who should rest in the 
soil of his fatherland, therefore his funeral barrow 
should be a notable landmark. 

Ingolf collected a large number of workmen from 
his own and Leif’s estate, and set them to work at erect- 
ing the barrow. It was to be done quickly. For noth- 
ing is quite sure for a dead man till he rests in earth 
under the sign of the Hammer. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 211 

Ingolf sent messengers round to invite all those in the 
district and many distant friends and relatives to the 
funeral feast at a few days’ notice. He and Leif super- 
intended the work at the barrow, and it went forward 
rapidly. 

The voracious earth was not to be allowed to devour 
Orn’s ship, therefore stones were fixed everywhere be- 
tween the earth and the woodwork. Outside it were 
piled gravel, earth, and turf. 

Amidships, round the mast, which was hoisted as 
though for sailing and so that the roof of the barrow 
might form an arch over it, was the burial chamber, as 
broad as the ship and two fathoms in length, timbered 
with thick oak-beams. It was to resist the pressure 
both of the stones and the earth: there should Orn lie, 
warm and comfortable, ready for his journey. All 
was arranged with a view to a journey by land and by 
water. 

In the stern of the ship were stored up all possible 
articles which could be of use in cooking. There were 
iron cauldrons of various sizes, with the iron claws be- 
longing to them and swivels for hanging them up on; 
a large barrel for the supply of the ship’s drinking 
water, together with other larger and small oaken 
barrels with hoops of tough kinds of wood; different 
vessels with and without lids, together with wooden 
dishes, some in the shape of fishes ; pails with handles of 
iron and bands of bronze or wood; scoops of iron and 
of wood ; knives ; a stone hand-mill and a stick to turn 
it with; a frying-pan; a three-legged kitchen-stool; 
axes; and many other articles. Some of the wooden 


212 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
ones were splendidly carved, and on others many-col- 
oured designs were painted. In the stern was also the 
ship’s anchor. The rudder was, of course, fixed in its 
place. 

Ingolf further furnished the ship with all that was 
necessary: cordage, sails, oars, tent-cloths and poles, 
hooks, oar-forks, and other articles for a voyage. A 
landing-plank was not forgotten. 

In the forepart of the ship he placed a carved and 
fully equipped sledge, with the harness and bearskin 
bags belonging to it. Thither he had also brought a 
painted and carved carriage, with a driving-seat and 
harness. Om’s saddle was brought on board, together 
with bridle and reins, and all things needed for a horse. 
Orn should never be in difficulties regarding his land- 
j ourney. 

Ingolf had many things brought into the burial 
chamber. He filled several boxes with useful articles 
belonging to a chieftain’s equipment and placed them in 
it. A bed and bedding were brought in, and he gave his 
father costly coverlets for the journey. He did not 
forget to supply a comb, so that his father might ar- 
range his hair and beard when he presented himself be- 
fore the Ases. He gave him also rings, ornaments, and 
other valuables, so that all should at once know whom 
they had before them. Moreover, he provided him with 
thunder-stones, small Thor-hammers, and other sacred 
articles for his protection on the journey, together 
with a money-box to defray the possible expenses. Orn 
should certainly not want coin. Ingolf also had several 
barrels of wine and meat brought to the burial chamber, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 213 
together with costly drinking-horns to drink from and 
to proffer. An ox and a swine and many other animals 
had already been selected for slaughter. Orn should 
suffer neither hunger nor thirst on his long journey. 

When all these things had been arranged, and the 
barrow was already partially erected so that there was 
only a wide passage to the burial chamber, and all that 
remained was to pile stones and earth over the ship, the 
day came which was fixed for the funeral feast and 
committal to the barrow. 

A swarm of people had collected to do the last 
honours to Orn. Ingolf himself conducted the cere- 
monies, both at the temple and at the barrow. He had 
inherited the office of priest of the district from his 
father, and now himself discharged the priestly func- 
tions. With the sign of the Hammer he consecrated 
his father for the last journey. 

Stretched on a bier, clad in his splendid garments, 
Orn left his house for the last time. A golden-winged 
helmet crowned his white hair. A sword gleamed by his 
side. A shield painted in many colours covered his 
breast. Equipped for a chieftain’s journey, Orn was 
carried to his burial chamber. 

The serf who was selected and already consecrated 
to follow him, for it was not fitting that Orn should 
journey quite alone, stood ready, and only waited for 
the knife, with which he was to stab himself, to be given 
him. 

Then came Rodmar, who in these busy and restless 
days had been forgotten by all, tottering on two sticks 
hither from the house, led by two of his men and followed 


214 THE sworn brothers 

by another man carrying a chair. He was not dressed 
as a chieftain. Looking untidy, as he had just got out 
of bed, in clothes which he had not changed for a long 
time, and with his grey locks floating freely in the wind, 
came Rodmar, staring stiffly and blankly with his blind 
eyes. 

Rodmar had had a bad time in his darkness and 
loneliness since Om’s death. He had hoped that death 
would come and fetch him before the barrow over Orn 
had been finished. He would so gladly share the barrow 
with him, and follow him on his journey. 

It was impossible to remain behind now that his only 
friend had departed. The solitude became intense and 
oppressive around him, and the pain of his darkness was 
doubled. At last he took the resolve to follow his elder 
kinsman in death, as he had always followed him in life. 

Rodmar crawled over the gunwale on his crooked legs 
and groped his way forward to the opening of the burial 
chamber. Then he turned and spoke to the air. “ Is 
there wine on board? ” he asked in an impatient and 
peremptory tone. 

Leif sprang on board and led his father from barrel to 
barrel so that he could feel them with his own hands. 
Rodmar shook the barrels to see whether they were full, 
and sniffed them distrustfully. He chose one of them, 
and demanded to have one hoop knocked off. This was 
done. Afterwards he asked that the tool for opening it 
should remain with him and be close to his hand. He 
was also allowed to retain the tool. 

His seat was fixed in its place, and Rodmar sat down 
with a long sigh of relief, as it were. On one side of him 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 215 
he had an open barrel of red wine, on the other a horn 
filled to the brim, standing on a little table, which had 
been quickly brought to the place. 

Rodmar borrowed Leif’s sword, and, baring his breast 
with fumbling fingers, cut on it with his own hand the 
sign of the Hammer. Then he said farewell to Ingolf 
and the others standing round, and in a slightly morose 
and curt tone gave Leif his last blessing. Then the 
opening to the burial chamber was closed up. Rodmar 
sat, as long as they could see him, motionless on his 
chair. He had secured Ora’s society for ever. He was 
prepared for anything that might come. A man should 
be able both to live and die with a light heart. He had 
drink for the journey, and there is also wine in Valhalla. 

Ingolf killed with his own hand an ox that was laid on 
an oak-plank by the side of the kitchen utensils. Its 
mouth was held open with a wooden gag and turned 
towards the south. He also slew with his own hand 
four horses, two dogs, and a swine. The swine was laid 
by the side of the box ; the other animals were taken to 
the fore-part of the ship. The serf who was to have ac- 
companied Orn was now spared, as Orn had better 
company. 

Stones were heaped over the ship and all its contents, 
and then the barrow was hastily filled up. This closed 
the funeral ceremonies. Orn and Rodmar had departed 
to Odin. 


. XII 

It soon became evident to Ingolf that on that spring 
day he had not buried Ora only. He had also interred 


21 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

with his father his home-feeling, his peace and confidence 
in this region of his childhood and youth. Already, 
when on the first morning after the burial he stepped 
out of the house and saw his father’s mighty barrow lift 
its dome in the landscape, it struck him all at once that 
the district had assumed an alien aspect. The confi- 
dence in the contours and colours, which has its root in 
the child’s free look and strong, unconscious sense of be- 
longing to the spot where he has grown up, was gone. 
The landscape had suddenly lost its light in his eyes. 
He felt thrust out and lonely. It was not here that he 
should live his life. 

Hitherto it had not been really clear to him what a 
profound change his life would undergo because of 
Haasten’s sentence. The fact that he was now homeless 
had, as it were, not yet broken on him in its full extent. 
Now he saw suddenly what Haasten’s sentence really 
implied — a complete alteration of his whole life. 
First, years perhaps must be spent in search and inse- 
curity. And then a battle for life and death with inner 
and outer powers, in order to gain home-feeling and 
home-rights in a foreign land. 

Ingolf felt from his own experience that the race 
which has not its own soil to grow in is doomed to mis- 
fortune and ruin. The possession of land stamps the 
race. The man who could be sentenced to lose his pos- 
sessions was exiled from the earth — this was what In- 
golf felt now. Such a man must gain earth’s favour 
anew by his honest will to live in peace on earth’s fruits. 

Ingolf’s hitherto unconscious instinct of opposition 
to force of all kinds was now suddenly revealed to him. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 217 
That which had now happened to him was not unde- 
served, even if the blame for the outer cause of the mis- 
fortune could not be imputed either to him or to Leif. 

He had continued to ravage, foreign lands and to 
pillage people with whom he had not the least quarrel. 
From a kind of secret cowardice he had suppressed the 
unwillingness he had felt in doing so, as unworthy of a 
man and a Viking. But now he saw that law and right 
extend beyond the borders of one’s own country. They 
are valid wherever there is land and sea. The man who 
aims at living by force and pillage, not only sins against 
the law which he carries within him, but also against the 
earth — the sacred earth, which by the grace of the 
gods is so luxuriant and fruitful that every year it is 
ready to fill the peaceful barns. As long as the Ases 
had still reigned undisputed there was peace in their 
dwellings. The Ases had been driven to conflict and 
war by the dark powers who were responsible for all 
disturbance. Thus all disturbance and violence came 
from the evil power. Ingolf vowed to himself that 
from that day he would never lift a weapon against any 
man except to protect his own and his family’s life 
and property. That resolve somewhat soothed the 
disquiet and restlessness which had seized him when he 
became conscious of his homelessness, and suddenly felt 
himself exiled from the kindness of the earth. The 
bright Ases would still grant his family a home and 
prosperity when they saw his honest purpose and clean 
struggle. The earth would yet take him into favour 
again when he no longer defiled it with blood and 
violence, would fulfill his most sacred, yes, his only wish, 


2 1 8 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
that his family-tree might be leafy and strong-stemmed. 
Since fate had granted him Hallveig as a wife, it could 
scarcely intend to exclude him from the earth. 

Ingolf thought much of the far and foreign land away 
in the west which he was to travel to. Was it there that 
his family’s cradle for the future should be? Was it 
there that the pillars of his high-seat should consecrate 
the earth for him? 

He dared not believe it yet. Neither did he dare to 
go to the gods and ask them. He himself had to seek 
his future home. He must win again what had been 
lost here by his own fault. He wished to commit him- 
self to the power of the sky and sea without first seek- 
ing instruction from the gods. He would match his 
own strength and will against storm and sea as a pledge 
and sign. He would not beg ; he would gain by fighting 
the favour of fate and of the gods. 

Now that his father was dead, he was himself the 
eldest and chief of the family. The responsibility for 
the honour of the dead, and the honour and prosperity 
of the unborn, rested principally on him. For now he 
alone wore the family bracelet, and now the high-seat 
was also his. 





BOOK III 















































































I 


I NGOLF and Leif equipped themselves in great haste 
for their journey to seek the land which Raven- 
Floke had last visited, and which he had given the name 
of Iceland. They wished to be there as early in the 
year as possible, in order to be the better able to explore 
the distant and unknown island. Therefore there was 
no time to be lost. The first thing they did was to 
acquire a trading vessel, a strong sea-ship, in exchange 
for two of their smallest ships, which, in all probability, 
they would not want to use again. A trading vessel 
was just what they now needed. In the conflict they 
were proceeding to, there was no use for small, light 
battleships. Their new vessel was certainly neither 
little nor light. It was a regular ox to look at. High 
and broad, clumsy and solid, it lay, and the movements 
of the water only made it rock sluggishly. By the side 
of the long, slim, low-decked dragon-ships, it was seen 
to great disadvantage. Leif laughed at it, called it 
his rock and his old woman’s boat, said that it had a 
stomach like an old cow, and expressed his fixed opinion 
that it certainly cherished secret designs of going to 
the bottom at the first opportunity. But Leif did it 
great injustice. The vessel was good enough for its 
221 


222 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
purpose, even if it was a little slow in turning and no 
beauty to look at. 

It had a half-deck at prow and stern and a small side- 
deck along the gunwales. The rest of it was one large 
hold, in the midst of which towered a great, solid, 
strongly supported mast. It was exclusively built for 
the purpose of long trade- journeys, and therefore quite 
excellently suited for such an expedition in which the 
chief object was to convey as much as possible. There 
were but a few banks of oars fore and aft; one might as 
well try to row a rock over the sea. It was not adapted 
to be propelled by slender oars. The oars were only 
there to turn it and to facilitate going on shore. It 
was to sail, not to be rowed. Therefore it was entirely 
dependent on wind and weather. But, on the other 
hand, it took the wind and weather with a composure 
and immovability which came near to justifying its 
nickname of a “ rock.” It only had one enemy — lack 
of wind. 

It certainly did not dance on the billows like a 
dragon-ship. It was too contemptuous of the unstable 
element around it, whose humours it only yielded to 
when compelled, and then as little as possible. It en- 
tered into no brotherly alliance with the wind. That 
it took into its service and allowed to further its ob- 
ject. 

Such was the new ship, inspiring confidence in a high 
degree and independent, both in form and behaviour — 
free from all kinds of levity. Storm and sea were its — 
certainly often somewhat wayward — servants, but not 
its masters. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 223 

Hallveig took an eager part in the loading of the 
vessel and in all preparations for the journey, and 
showed Ingolf in numberless little ways that she had no 
intention of remaining at home. When Ingolf was 
aware of it, it seemed to him that he had all along 
known that Hallveig was like that. And yet it gave 
his happiness an increased fullness and weight. With- 
out inquiries of any kind, with a silent agreement, as 
though it were a matter of course, Hallveig prepared 
to follow him always and everywhere, to belong to him 
and to be near him. 

For Helga, who already went about with a hidden 
foreboding of coming separation in her mind, the spring 
suddenly became really spring when she saw Hallveig’s 
preparations. If Hallveig could travel with them, so 
could she. Of herself, Helga would never have hit 
upon so bold an idea, though not from want of courage. 
Her courage and readiness to sacrifice herself where 
Leif was concerned were boundless. Her backwardness 
was from an inherited fear of causing trouble and being 
inconvenient, and a deep anxiety not to displease Leif 
in any thing great or small. 

Helga wept for gladness when it was decided that she 
should also go with them. She did not often weep in 
the sight of others. Her weeping made Leif quiet and 
thoughtful. He guessed that he often, for the most 
part through thoughtlessness, caused Helga grief which 
she did not show. For some time his tenderness towards 
her knew no bounds, and Helga was happier than she 
had been for a long time. 

Hallveig and Helga had been at first somewhat shy of 


224 THE sworn brothers 

each other. Helga was in her own way independent 
enough. She certainly had a will, and knew in every 
case what she wanted. But Hallveig’s whole resolute 
way of behaving and acting alarmed her a little. It 
took her some time to understand that Hallveig was far 
from being inconsiderate and selfish, that, on the con- 
trary, she had a recklessness and warmth in her devotion 
which was apparent in each of her words and deeds in 
such a decisive way that to superficial observation it 
might look like want of consideration and self-will. 
Yes, in her devotion Hallveig was certainly reckless. 
Every one could easily see that she loved Ingolf and 
belonged to him with body and soul. The quiet and 
apparently cold Hallveig displayed a peculiar latent 
warmth and energy in all that she undertook. She did 
not lavish smiles and caresses ; that was not her nature. 
No one had heard her speak tenderly or lovingly to In- 
golf. But out of all her actions shone love and tender 
solicitude. An invisible fire burned around the appar- 
ently cold-natured woman. 

When Helga first became convinced that she had at 
the beginning mistaken her sister-in-law and done her 
injustice in her heart, a specially warm devotion for 
Hallveig broke forth in her soul. And from the mo- 
ment that Hallveig saw that the reserve Helga had 
hitherto displayed towards her had been a veil she had 
covered herself with in the presence of a stranger, she 
embraced her also with the latent warmth of her nature. 

Hallveig showed Helga that outside the house also a 
woman may be a benefit and do good service. Even 
when it was a question of loading a ship for a long 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 225 

journey there were many things a woman could help 
and participate in. Hallveig, who was never at ease 
when Ingolf was occupied with the ship, from this time 
always took Helga with her when she went down to it. 
She had an amusing way of walking, Helga thought. 
She took long, resolute, manly strides, and her legs 
were obviously legs under her skirts. Helga found it 
difficult to follow her when she was in a hurry, as she 
almost always unconsciously was. 

Hallveig examined even the smallest details that con- 
cerned the loading of the ship, with her husband and 
Leif, and did so in a matter-of-course tone which 
aroused Helga’s astonishment and admiration. In 
everything she said, Hallveig showed her practical sense. 
She did not hesitate either to give help where it was 
needed. Her help and advice were gladly welcomed. 
Her advice was advice and not child’s prattle. It was 
nearly always followed. 

Hallveig had a peculiar rapid way of surveying 
matters. This was the best place for this, and for that. 
She demanded that everything which might be needed on 
the voyage should be as easily accessible as possible. 
Ingolf and Leif had never given a thought to that. 
They only thought of packing things so that they fitted 
in, took the least possible room, and were so distributed 
according to weight and size that the ship might lie on 
the water as level as possible. Now Hallveig showed 
them that with a little reflection all these objects might 
be excellently combined. 

Hallveig’s and Helga’s presence and hearty partici- 
pation in the work — for Helga also quickly began to 


226 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
use both eyes and hands — put Ingolf and Leif in high 
spirits, which helped them over many difficulties and 
trifling annoyances. 

The vessel was loaded amid much merriment. Corn 
in chests, dried fish in great bundles, butter in small 
barrels, and boxes of dried flesh and salt meat, beer and 
wine in barrels — a whole year’s provision of food and 
drink — were brought on board and packed carefully 
in the great hold. But the vessel’s stomach had to find 
space for much more. Small compartments had to be 
made for the animals which were to be taken with them. 
A cow and a pair of goats ; they could not be entirely 
without milk. There was also an ox to be slaughtered, 
and a bull-calf to be company for the cow through the 
winter and grow large and fat and ready to be slaugh- 
tered in the spring. A sow with small pigs was also 
useful to have with them, together with some sheep, and 
a couple of horses were simply indispensable. 

And, at any rate, there was room for a hut for 
Hallveig and Helga. The hut was Hallveig’s idea. 
She did not wish only to be with them; she wished to 
live on board and to be comfortable. Leif jumped like 
a boy with delight when Hallveig put forward her pro- 
posal about the hut. From that day not even the small- 
est thing seemed to him quite right till Hallveig had 
expressed her satisfaction with it. He would rather 
have Hallveig’s help in counsel and action than that of 
most men, he declared decisively. And he was abso- 
lutely resolved to teach her to swing an ax and to hurl 
a spear. Hallveig did not often laugh, but she had to 
laugh sometimes at Leif. There was the same complete- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 227 
ness and power in Hallveig’s laughter as in all the rest 
of her character and behaviour. When Hallveig 
laughed, there was something to laugh at. She could 
never be imagined laughing at any one or anything she 
did not like. 

So these spring days passed. Liveliness and activity 
reigned everywhere. This journey to a foreign land, 
which at the beginning seemed so difficult to carry into 
effect, so improbable and unrealizable, became through 
all these preparations imminent and a matter of course 
for all those who took part in it. Here Ingolf now 
stood in the smithy and forged scythes to cut grass in 
a land which he had never seen and really only heard 
a tale about. Who was Naddod the Viking? Who 
was Gardar Svavarsson? Who was Raven-Floke? 
Or Thorolf Smor? Could one be sure they had not 
imagined that land over there? Or that others had 
imagined them and the whole affair? One might be 
foolish to believe it, but he was going to get a sight of 
it. And while Ingolf forged scythes to cut grass in 
that legendary land of the west, and made spades to 
dig in its soil, that fact became firmly fixed in his mind. 
In spite of all doubt, the land lay and actually existed 
over there in the sea. And, in fact, it became more 
than real to him. It lay there and spoke secretly to 
his soul; it waited for him almost like a friend. And 
thus it seemed at last to have a claim on him, which he 
could not disregard. For the land lay there and ex- 
pected to be taken in possession, as is the right of 
every land. Such and similar thoughts filled Ingolf. 
And yet he did not guess that while he stood there in 


228 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

his smithy and forged scythes and prepared implements 
with which to till the new land’s soil, the land took 
him in possession by help of the secret power a land 
possesses — never again to let him go. 

Ingolf and Leif had to prepare themselves to build 
winter dwellings and to store hay for their animals, 
therefore they took implements with them, without con- 
sidering what power the earth and implements together 
have over a man’s soul. They did not guess that only 
homeless men wander their free ways, which are no ways, 
or rather that secret earth-powers guide all other steps. 

Ingolf and Leif provided themselves with fishing- 
gear and nets for catching birds. They also took a 
pair of boats. 

When the boat was loaded and everything else was in 
order for the journey, Ingolf concluded his prepara- 
tions with a great sacrificial feast, at which he made 
abundant offerings to the gods, in order that they 
should grant him and his fellow-travellers good fortune 
and happiness on the voyage. Nevertheless, the days 
went by without the commencement of the hoped-for 
sailing weather. 

These days of waiting were hard for Leif to bear. 
He became morose. Any kind of waiting was the worst 
thing Leif knew. It made his hasty and adventurous 
spirit full of discontent. He cursed the vessel, called 
it a wretched old woman’s bath, and invented even worse 
names for it. 

Ingolf took the matter quietly. Certainly he had 
already made his offerings to the gods, and copiously. 
But it was a special voyage they were to make — the 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 229 
gods were to protect them, and on wide and strange 
ways. He therefore brought fresh offerings, and also 
secretly gave Odin and Njord private gifts, besides 
vowing yet greater ones if they would prosper his 
journey there and back and on the way. This expe- 
dient helped. There came a day with splendid sailing 
weather — a sunshiny day full of light and warm wind. 
Before midday all was ready — the animals brought 
on board, the crew in their places (Ingolf and Leif took 
only the smallest possible crew with them), and the 
vessel cleared for sailing. Under a heavily bellying 
sail it glided out between the skerries. Hallveig and 
Helga stood on the poop by their husbands and watched 
the shores glide past on either side. Hallveig was quiet 
in mind, and felt only glad at the fine day and the 
journey. Sea and land were all the same to her, if 
only she had Ingolf. Here they were sailing out to 
find a new land, to seek a new home. She was ready 
with all her soul to remain fixed in the spot on the earth 
which Ingolf might choose for them, no matter where 
it might be. 

But with Helga it was otherwise. She was calm and 
quiet enough, but her calm was, as so often on other 
occasions, only outward. The strong scent of the pines 
from the spruce- and fir-clad islands they were sailing 
by, roused a profound longing in her soul. This was 
the place where she was at home. There in the house 
down there by the shore, which seen from the fjord here 
looked so strange. There seemed to be a sob in Helga’s 
soul. She, the faithful, had only one home. She did 
not at all wish to turn or to remain behind, for she 


230 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
stood here by Leif’s side. But she felt as though her 
heart were being split asunder and her soul divided. 
For this place which she now left, to return to it next 
spring only for a time, had shared with her happi- 
ness and solitude. There was hardly a stone in the 
house which she had not patted with her hand and made 
her confidant in joy or sorrow. She was bound to the 
house and the surroundings of her childhood with ties 
which could not be loosed or cut asunder. She knew 
with certainty that she would always feel strange and 
homeless outside Dalsfjord. She reproached herself 
for this feeling — for she had Leif — but she could not 
overcome it. All she could do was to vow to herself 
never to betray it. Thus Helga took a secret with the 
scent of the pine trees from the islands. 

II 

Ingolf and Leif sailed by the guidance of the sun and 
the stars, and steered directly westward. For the first 
two days and nights a steady east wind filled the square 
sail and carried them steadily forwards. There were 
high spirits and much excited expectation on board. 
Indeed, it seemed as though the wind had been sent by 
Odin with the sole purpose of furthering their journey. 
But just as they had settled down in confidence that 
they were under the god’s special protection the weather 
began to shift and change. Now it seemed, for the 
most part, as if one or another of the divinities had set 
himself fiercely against them, or as if Odin had suddenly 
become busy elsewhere. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 231 

The wind took the wrong direction, and seemed unin- 
terruptedly occupied in settling private accounts with 
the towering waves of the sea. In the course of two 
days and nights it had gone several times round the 
horizon and varied through all degrees of strength from 
a moderate calm to what Vikings would mildly call a 
storm. And then all of a sudden it disappeared. They 
looked longingly for it — east, west, south, and north 
— for though they had cursed its vagaries heartily 
enough, it was still preferable to a dead calm. But it 
was absent, and remained absent. Unreliable as it had 
always been, it had gone off to other regions, and left 
them alone here in the midst of the sea. There lay the 
vessel, pitching lazily, and making no way at all. 
Where they were no one knew, and there was nothing to 
show them. Whither the wind had carried them, while 
it was still with them and blew alternately from all 
points of the compass, they could not find out. The 
sun and stars had only rarely been visible. The spirits 
of all on board were rapidly sinking. Matters were 
not improved when, after several days and nights of 
calm, there came gliding a cunning, silent bank of fog 
and swallowed them up, blotted them out from the eyes 
of heaven, swept all sight of sea and sky out of the 
world, and left the vessel lying, rocking lonelily, for- 
gotten by all good powers on a strange sea. 

There they lay while the days came and went — grey 
days which could only make marks on Ingolf’s time- 
stick. For even though Ingolf was displeased enough 
with these days he kept a steady count of them, marked 
each of them off on his stick with the little notch that 


232 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

was their due, and, for the rest, execrated them in 

silence. 

Leif had given up all hope now ; morose and aggrieved, 
he surrendered himself to the power of chance. He sat 
most of the days on the gunwale with his legs dangling 
outside, singing from sheer despair. Only now and then 
he interrupted his song to hurl a violent succession of 
sanguinary curses in a penetrating, angry voice into the 
damp, foggy air. 

With every day that passed, Ingolf became more 
silent and introspective. What was the obstacle in 
their way? Were the gods so much opposed to this 
journey that they were absolutely determined to pre- 
vent it? 

He did not like being questioned regarding the num- 
ber of days he had marked off. The days were quite 
bad enough without making them more by talking about 
them. And at last he flatly refused to answer questions 
regarding the number of the days. For long periods he 
would sit silent looking at his stick, forgetting to mark 
the days, with his mind full of inward longing and 
powerful exorcisms. 

He heard that the crew were talking about drawing 
lots for a sacrifice. Ingolf was not narrow-minded. 
But he remembered the offerings which before his 
journey he had made to Odin, as well as the vows he had 
made of further offerings if the journey prospered. 
Odin had often fulfilled his wishes for less sacrifices than 
those. He really did not understand what was the 
matter with Odin this time. 

Hallveig and Helga were the only ones on board 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 233 
who, to some extent, kept up their spirits. To Hallveig 
it seemed quite natural ; they were very well off, and the 
fog and the calm must some time come to an end. 
Every morning she awoke with the firm conviction that 
that day the fog would lift. Helga, on the other hand, 
had to pull herself together, iji order not to be infected 
by the depression of the rest. Yet she was accustomed 
to do this, and on this occasion she had, besides, Hall- 
veig’s good-humour to support her. But their good 
temper seemed almost to put the crew into a still worse 
humour. Even Ingolf — not to speak of Leif — could 
sometimes be impatient at their unconcern. And one 
day, in answer to a cheerful remark of Hallveig’s, he 
very curtly drew her attention to the fact that the 
water-casks were seriously near becoming empty. Hall- 
veig looked at him steadily and a little astonished. In- 
golf had never before seen that look in her eyes. She 
went to her hut without saying anything more. 

Ingolf looked round for Helga. She stood by the 
gunwale, playing with Leif’s hair. When Ingolf had 
thus ascertained that Hallveig was alone in the hut, he 
followed her into it. Hallveig was sitting and looking 
before her when he came. She did not meet his glance 
as usual, but remained sitting and staring into space 
with a troubled expression on her serious face. Ingolf 
stopped before her and laid his hand on her shoulder. 
Then Hallveig looked up at him. “ It can do no good 
to give up,” she said seriously ; “ that will not make 
things better. Have you not noticed how the men 
follow you with their eyes, and are disturbed by your 
looks? There is nothing left us, Ingolf, but to take 


234 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

things as they come. The fog may lift some time. 
&nd since it has not rained for a long time, it may 
soon rain, so that we can again have the water-casks 
filled. And we have also beer and wine on board, so 
that we can get along for some time.” 

“ What makes me uneasy,” answered Ingolf, “ is that 
we seem to be pursued by misfortune, and that I don’t 
know at all where we are. It might almost seem as if 
the gods had forgotten us, or as if we had fallen under 
their displeasure. If the fog and the calm continue, 
and there is no rain for some time, it will soon be all 
over with us. You and Helga ought never to have been 
taken with us on this journey. I have also heard that 
the crew are beginning to talk among themselves of cast- 
ing lots. Perhaps a sacrifice will be necessary.” 

Hallveig was silent for a long time. At last she 
sighed deeply and said : “ I have never been able 

properly to understand how the gods can desire human 
sacrifices. Perhaps, however, I would have agreed on 
this occasion if I was quite sure that the lot would not 
fall on you. But I cannot rely on the gods so abso- 
lutely. Let us rather wait awhile, Ingolf.” 

Ingolf left her with the firm resolve henceforth to 
alter his outward demeanour. He saw that the first 
and foremost thing was his duty and obligation to ex- 
hibit to the crew a calm and untroubled face, be the 
outlook never so hopeless. The first man he met he 
greeted with a cheerful remark, and after that day he 
was altogether more lively and communicative. 

When the crew saw what an alteration had taken 
place in Ingolf, they thought in themselves that he must 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 235 

in some way or another have received a token from the 
gods. Their desire for a sacrifice and drawing of lots 
ceased. Ingolf’s altered demeanour inspired them with 
hope and courage. 

But the days went on, and one day the supply of 
drinking water ran out. During the night following 
the day when the last scoop of water had been equally 
divided among all on board, Ingolf did not sleep. And 
he could easily see that Hallveig lay awake by his side. 
But they did not talk. Ingolf was more and more con- 
vinced that the gods had for ever withdrawn their fav- 
our from him. Perhaps it was their intention to let 
him miserably perish here at sea. Would they not even 
grant him to die on land? Could they not even spare 
a place for a funeral mound for him and his? Ingolf 
reproached himself severely that he had involved Hall- 
veig in his own and his race’s ill-luck. 

Towards morning they began at last to talk together 
in a whisper. Ingolf opened his whole mind to Hall- 
veig, and confided to her his most secret thoughts and 
anxieties. Hallveig said that she had married him be- 
cause she intended to share his fortunes whether they 
were good or bad. She feared neither life, nor death, 
nor the displeasure of the gods, if only she had him. 

While they were still lying there and whispering 
together, Leif stood suddenly in the doorway and 
shouted. He had kept watch during the night, and had 
good news to tell. The fog was gone and the wind was 
gradually rising. He had given orders to hoist the sail, 
and now only wished to ask whither they should sail, for 
he did not know. The sky was overclouded all the time, 


236 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

and the sun could not be seen. Would Ingolf come and 

see if he, perhaps, could scent out the right direction? 

Ingolf was on his legs in an instant. All anxiety and 
trouble was blown away from his soul by the first puff of 
wind. He took counsel with his deepest instincts, and 
found a direction to sail in. The wind was rather slack 
at first, but then it had got out of the habit of blowing. 
In the course of the day it freshened to splendid sailing 
weather. There were birds on the water; they must be 
near some land. Towards evening they caught a 
glimpse of a dark streak ahead, which showed distinctly 
against the fog-banks on the horizon. There rose a 
shout on board : 66 Land in sight ! ” Then Helga 

wept. No one was astonished at it. Some of the men 
also felt a flutter at their hearts this time on sighting 
land again. But Hallveig stood quiet and undisturbed, 
staring at the dark streak ahead. What sort of land 
was it? Were they already there? That night no one 
thought of seeking sleep or rest. 

Early in the morning they were among some pre- 
cipitous green islands which were divided by narrow 
straits with strong currents. From the vessel they 
could here and there catch sight of smoke from houses 
and huts. This, then, was an inhabited land, and not 
the one they sought. One of the old men on board had 
been here before, and was able to inform them that these 
were the Faroe Isles. That reassured Ingolf ; it meant 
they had not come out of their course. There was 
great joy on board. Here they could go on shore, 
feel firm ground under their feet, and provide them- 
selves with water. There were some among the crew 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 237 
who ventured to hint that the voyage had lasted long 
enough, but a look from Ingolf was enough to reduce 
them to silence. All depression and doubt had been 
swept out of his mind along with the fog. 

The brothers now had all tubs, buckets, together with 
the empty barrels and casks which were on board, filled 
with water from a spring on the coast. When that had 
been seen to, they were so fortunate as to get good 
weather with a stiff breeze. It was again possible to 
sail by the sun and stars, straight to the west. They 
left the Faroe Isles astern and made for the open sea. 
The weather remained fine, with a light breeze blowing. 
The wind was certainly somewhat capricious both as 
regards force and direction. But it blew all the time, 
and that was what was needed. Only seldom could the 
vessel hold on a straight course; they were obliged to 
tack, and so the way became somewhat uncertain. Still 
they made progress. 

On the seventh day after leaving the Faroes they at 
last sighted land. A large and wide-stretching land, 
crowned by white glaciers behind blue mountains, and 
land with broad, open fjords and bright streams which 
wound down green mountain-sides, rose from the sea 
before their wondering eyes. 

This must be the land they sought. Here then it lay, 
solitary and uninhabited, far away in the uttermost 
part of the sea. It lay silent and patient, expecting 
them. 

The land greeted them with sunshine and summer and 
blue mountains. Majestic it lay there, with skyward 
towering promontories and broad mouths of fjords 


23 § THE SWORN BROTHERS 
which, like open arms, offered them a royal welcome. 
No other land had ever received them with such a festal 
and solemn greeting as this gave them. 

A strange silence spread on board the vessel. It was 
early in the morning that they sailed into a fjord full of 
swans. The blue surface of the fjord was completely 
covered with these white birds, which, with proudly 
lifted necks and in great flocks, swam to one side as the 
ship glided on. Many other birds swam among them — 
variegated eider-ducks and handsome water-fowl. But 
one did not notice them because of the white swans. 
Hallveig named the fjord Svanefjord. 

The brothers had chosen this fjord because it was 
protected by a little group of islands which might make 
it more secure as a winter haven than the open fjords. 
They tacked a little to and fro, using a corner of their 
sail, and surveyed the land. Bare mountains rose on 
either hand. On the north was a strip of fertile land 
along the fjord; on the east side the waves broke freely 
at the base of the mountain. The land at the end of 
the fjord semed fertile and inviting, but they could not 
find a landing-place which suited them. 

Ingolf proposed that they should inspect a little more 
closely the nearest fjord south of the one they were in. 
He had seen from the ship that there lay a broad fjord 
sheltered by a small, low group of islands. 

They tacked past a promontory and entered the other 
fjord. It was both broader and deeper than the one 
they had just come from, but was likewise full of swans ! 
Hallveig laughed with gladness when she saw it. This 
fjord also must be called “ Svanefjord,” she declared. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 239 
They might be called North and South. She did not 
know there were so many swans to be found in the world. 
“ Birds love this land,” she said to herself. 

Helga stood by her side. She compelled herself to 
smile and share Hallveig’s gladness, but her heart was 
full of pain, for the beautiful land she saw here, and 
which Hallveig already seemed to love, could never be 
hers. She saw the swans, the mountains, and the green 
dales. But in her heart there was no room for anything 
but a quiet, slightly strange emotion. The scent of the 
pines from the islands at home was too keen in her mem- 
ory. Ingolf and Leif stood silent and in a solemn mood, 
side by side; they loked at the land and did not say a 
word. They had stood thus a long time when Ingolf 
turned to his brother and said quietly : 44 What do you 

think of the land, Leif? ” 

44 It is a big land and seems a good one,” answered 
Leif, in a low voice. 

44 If only most of it was not barren mountain,” said 
Ingolf, but his voice lacked the reservation which his 
words expressed. 

44 I think we might soon feel at home among these 
mountains,” said Leif. 

44 It does not look unfriendly,” Ingolf admitted. 

In his inmost heart he was deeply moved. The 
strength and sternness of the mountains filled his mind 
with a peculiar excitement. Among these mountains 
the green dales and fertile stretches of land, which he 
caught a glimpse of at the end of the fjord, assumed 
a doubly home-like aspect. 

Suddenly Leif awoke from his long reflection and si- 


240 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
lent contemplation. Abruptly and unexpectedly, as 
always, a resolve had been born in his mind, and aroused 
him. “ It is all the same to me what sort of a land it is 
— I shall settle here,” he declared in an excited tone. 
“ Since I have come, I think it would disappoint the 
land if I left it again. And I will not disappoint this 
land, which lies here so ready to receive me — so much 
is certain.” 

Ingolf was silent. Leif had given expression to his 
own thoughts. He felt so convinced at this moment 
that here it was his lot to settle and remain. But this 
feeling was followed in his mind by a peculiar anxiety 
which almost made him sorry. Was it a good land — 
a land where one could peacefully build and settle, and 
where his family could flourish in happiness and pros- 
perity? Not himself alone, but his children and chil- 
dren’s children should dwell here, if he determined to 
settle himself in the place. 

The brothers chose a landing-place on the north side 
of the fjord, and steered thither. It was with strange 
feelings that they set foot on this new land, which from 
time immemorial had lain here behind the sea and the 
distance, alone with its birds. On sea and land, every- 
where the birds swarmed. The questioning whistle of 
the golden plover and the rippling quaver of the curlew 
were the first sounds that greeted them as they trod 
the stones of the shore. 

Ingolf and Leif immediately set the crew to work to 
bring the animals on land and to unload the vessel. 
They themselves proceeded to pitch their tents, after 
having selected a spot with thick green grass, well 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 241 
protected from wind and weather by a projection of 
rock, and close to the brink of a small, clear stream. 
The kitchen utensils were brought up, and a fire kindled. 
The shore was covered with driftwood, so that there was 
plenty of fuel. Pots containing salted flesh were hung 
up ; at last they got hot meat again. They could not 
remember that any meat had tasted so good as this hot 
salt flesh after the dried fish, preserved flesh, and hard 
and finally mouldy bread they had had on the sea voy- 
age. They baked bread, too, and ate it warm from the 
embers. It was splendid to have soft bread between 
their teeth again. 

Round them the animals dispersed, grazing eagerly 
over the fertile pastures. It was a pleasure to see the 
satisfaction with which they swallowed the green grass. 
Towards evening the vessel was so far unloaded that it 
could be brought ashore and rolled on logs over the 
ground. They had chosen a little cleft in the rocks for 
it to lie in shelter during the winter. 

By the evening, when the men had crept into their 
skin bags and had lain down to sleep, Ingolf and Leif, 
Hallveig and Helga, still sat round the remains of the 
fire, but did not think of sleep. They sat silent, close 
to one another, and did not talk. The night was bright 
and still, and dew was falling. The fire gleamed palely 
in the night. Red ember-snakes writhed at the bottom 
of it. The fjord spread a shining surface, dotted white 
with sleeping swans. There was a peace and stillness 
over the land which filled their minds with a peculiar 
awe and sense of expectation. 


242 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 


III 

The summer they spent in South Svanef jord was, for 
the brothers and their wives, an unbroken succession of 
beautiful days. There was a peculiar atmosphere of 
peace and prosperity about the lonely settlement, where 
the fire burnt day and night under the cliff behind the 
tents, while on a rising ground close at hand their 
winter dwelling rose slowly from the ground. It was 
a house sixty feet in length, thirty in breadth, which 
the brothers were having built — a house with thick 
turf walls for a protection against the cold of winter, 
and adapted to be partitioned according to their needs 
when they had first roofed it in. 

While their men worked at the dwelling and gathered 
in hay as winter fodder for the cattle, Ingolf and Leif 
let the days come and go. And whether they were 
sunny days or the fog hung in grey, soft, gliding belts 
down to the middle of the mountain-sides, all the days 
had a peculiar solemn solitariness and charm about 
them. 

The land they had come to was after Leif’s heart. It 
made quite a different impression on him to any other 
land he had visited. The sense of power that brooded 
over it, and the almost palpable solitude, swallowed up 
the unrest of his mind and gave him peace. The moun- 
tains’ strongly marked and infinitely varied shapes, a 
little copse hidden among grey cliffs, close up to a 
glacier, the heavily pouring rivers in deep ravines, the 
fjords where the swans swam among other fowls like 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 243 

royal dragon-ships among peaceful freighters, a seal 
bathing in the sun on a rock by the fjord, not wise 
enough to be afraid of men, the countless birds’ nests 
with the snugly hidden, different-coloured eggs one 
came across everywhere, and then the soft, downy young 
ones hopping about between little hillocks — all filled 
his soul with a sense of wonder and calm hitherto un- 
known. 

Ingolf and Leif made little excursions on their horses 
in the neighbourhood. They soon ascertained that the 
fjords north of the Svanefjords were very poor in pas- 
ture-land; the mountains descended for the most part 
steeply to the sea, while the land, on the other hand, 
seemed to become better the farther southward they 
went. When they had made that discovery they equip- 
ped themselves for a journey of some days in order to 
examine the land south of the Svanefjords more closely. 
Over a low, stony stretch of tableland they came to an- 
other inlocked fjord which was much broader than even 
the broad South Svanefjord. The greater part of 
the upland of this fjord was, however, covered with 
gravel and clay. Quite outside by the sea was a stretch 
of luxuriant meadow, and here and there stood rock- 
islets amid the sand, round which there were large 
green pastures. Farther up, right under the moun- 
tains, there was also pasture-land, and there they found 
the largest and most luxuriant wood they had yet seen. 
They came to a river with many rapidly flowing courses 
which streamed with clay-coloured, turbid water over 
a sandy and unsafe bottom. But they had caught 
sight of some sharp mountain-peaks far to the south- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 


244 

west, and since it could scarcely be difficult to cross 
the ravines between them, they resolved to proceed 
thither and see what was to be found on the other side. 
It was generally the case with this land, that one was 
not satisfied till one had seen what there was on the 
other side of all the mountains which came in view. 
They passed with some difficulty the dangerous river- 
current, and rode farther along high, steep mountain 
declivities striped with many-coloured gravel. 

They found a ravine between the mountain-peaks, 
and when they had reached the other side of the moun- 
tains, there opened on them, while they rode along the 
edge of the steep descents which led down to the low- 
land, a view, the like of which they had never seen. 
A fjord dotted with small green islands, wide-stretch- 
ing meadows and pastures intersected by gleaming 
watercourses, a wide bluish ring of mountains which 
locked in the luxuriant region with a mighty curve, 
and behind all this in the south and west, glaciers — 
an immense, slightly arched stretch of sparkling snow 
with white offshoots to all ravines. 

It was on a clear, sunny day at noon that they stood 
there and surveyed this region, which arrested their 
minds with a sense of solemn wonder and irresistible 
fascination such as no view had ever done before. In 
his rapture, Leif laid his hand upon Ingolf’s shoulder 
and pressed it; he had tears in his eyes, and his large 
mouth quivered. They had dismounted from their 
horses and stood silent for a long time. And when 
they mounted again to examine the district further, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 245 

they rode on in silence. From that hour they were 
Icelanders ; the land was theirs, and they belonged to 
it. In silence the compact was finally and irrevocably 
solemnized. 

When they came back from their trip, Hallveig and 
Helga had an important and, as they themselves 
thought, serious piece of news to tell them. They had 
one day climbed up the green ascent above the encamp- 
ment, quite up to the base of the cliffs, in order to 
get a wider view over the fjord and the district. And 
just as they sat and contemplated the low group of 
islands and a little island beyond it, they saw smoke 
rising from the island. It had been a perfectly calm 
and clear day; there could be no doubt that they had 
seen correctly. They had not said anything to the 
men, and they now only wished to ask Ingolf and Leif 
to be careful, and not to go about any more alone. 
Ingolf and Leif immediately put the larger of the two 
boats in the water, called some of their men, and bade 
them take their weapons with them. They wished to 
find out what kind of people they had for neighbours. 
It was in vain that Hallveig and Helga begged and 
prayed them not to insist on going out, and least of 
all in a little rowing-boat. The brothers were too 
resolved on finding out more about the smoke from 
the island. In answer to their wives they objected that 
the ship was too unwieldly, and was, moreover, not a 
ship of war. There was scarcely any chance of fight- 
ing ; if there were people on the island, they were prob- 
ably some peaceful, starving, shipwrecked men, whose 


246 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
vessel had been driven to sea and lost. For the rest, 
they promised to be careful, but they were resolved to 
go out to the island that day. 

So they rowed out thither. Even when they had 
got quite close to it, they could see no sign that it was 
inhabited. They rowed round it, and still saw no in- 
habitants or buildings. They determined to land, and 
chose a creek on the south sid€ of the island. As 
soon as they had landed, they saw a wretched little 
boat, in which they would hardly have trusted them- 
selves to cross a fjord, hidden among the rocks. They 
went farther up on the island, and found a hut well 
concealed in a hollow. 

As they approached, a man came forth in a splen- 
did cloak and head-dress, with a staff in his hands, 
and followed by some lean shapes black with dirt, and 
meanly clad. They came out from the hut, but re- 
mained standing before the door, without going to- 
wards them. They had seen this kind of people be- 
fore, and immediately perceived that they had what 
were called Irish monks before them. 

Both Leif and Ingolf, as well as several of their men, 
knew some Irish, and therefore went nearer in order to 
hear a little why these people dwelt here on a desert 
island. 

The monks, one of whom carried a cup of water, 
evidently did not wish them to come too near them or 
their dwelling. The sworn brothers remained standing 
at some distance and questioned them. The monks 
answered their questions reluctantly, but they gathered 
from them that they had lived here for several years, 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 247 

that they had long since heard reports of this land, 
and that other monks before them had journeyed to 
seek it out. They had not seen any of them, but the 
land was wide, and they had remained here on the 
island where they had first landed. This information 
Ingolf at last extracted from the monks, with many 
questions answered, for the most part, in monosyllables. 

When the brothers could not think of anything more 
to ask them, and were going down to their boat again, 
the man with the head-dress, cloak, and staff stopped 
them with a question. “ Why had they come hither? ” 

Ingolf told them that they had come here to look at 
the land, and intended to settle here. 

His words aroused a movement and disturbance 
among the monks, and their leader gave him to under- 
stand plainly that the land was sanctified and reserved 
by God for Christian men ; no heathen had ever settled 
here, nor ever could. Every kind of misfortune would 
strike them if they migrated hither, unless they first let 
themselves be baptized and went over to the Christian 
faith. Ingolf answered them quietly that they must 
grant him that it would ill become him to be less faithful 
to his gods than they were to theirs. The monk an- 
swered that heathen did not trust in gods but in idols. 
Ingolf answered that the Ases had hitherto protected 
him and his family. Then bidding them farewell, he 
went off, followed by Leif and his men. They saw the 
monks sprinkling with water the places where they had 
trod. Then Ingolf smiled and Leif laughed aloud. 
The monks sprinkled even the waves which had licked 
the heathen’s boat. 


248 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

When Ingolf and Leif returned, they were able to 
quiet Hallveig and Helga with the news that they were 
peaceful and harmless people who inhabited the little 
island. Their only weapon was a little water in a cup ! 
After that they called the island “ Monks’ Island.” 
When the autumn came with cold and sleet the sworn 
brothers already sat warm in their turf -house. Before 
the dwelling Ingolf had caused to be built a smaller 
edifice, where he set up small, roughly carved wooden 
images of Odin and Thor. And when the time for the 
autumn sacrificial feast was come, he offered them an 
ox (they must share the offering as best they could), 
and had a little feast. 

Leif held aloof from all things of that sort. During 
the twenty-four hours of the feast, he went out catch- 
ing birds by day and slept quietly in his bed by night. 
In his lonely wanderings the brown leaves of the autumn 
rustled round his feet and spoke to him. Leif did not 
think much about catching birds. He enjoyed being 
alone with the mountains and the blue sky. Wherever 
he met a family of grouse who held faithfully together 
he let them go. He only aimed at solitary birds, caught 
them round the neck with a practised fling of his light 
line, and drew them to himself with one sweep through 
the air. 

Ingolf’s sacrificial feast and all his devotion to the 
gods was a continually recurring trial to Leif’s 
brotherly feeling. He could not reconcile himself to 
Ingolf’s constant and devoted adherence to the worship 
of these ugly wooden idols. Time after time he was 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 249 
obliged, in order to control his rising displeasure, to 
remind himself that Ingolf never interfered in his beliefs 
and thoughts concerning the gods, and therefore had a 
right to expect the same from him. But in his heart 
Leif scorned and despised Ingolf’s gods, and it was in- 
evitable that some of this violent antipathy should some- 
times glance on his brother. 

Singularly enough, on the other hand, Leif did not 
take it at all ill that Helga held fast to her own and her 
fathers’ faith, without its being clear to him that he 
possessed in that, as it were, a proof of her steadfast- 
ness. He did not at all wish that Helga should forsake 
her gods to follow him in his want of faith and contempt 
for them. The day that she did so would have given 
a severe blow to Leif’s happiness. So and no otherwise 
was his nature. 

The winter came with hard frost but without much 
snow. The weather for ski-ing, which Ingolf and Leif 
were waiting for in order to show Hallveig and Helga 
a little of the country south of the Svanefjords, did not 
come. Their disappointment was, however, mitigated 
by the fact that their sheep and goats could, contrary 
to expectation, go out and get their food the whole of 
the winter, with the exception of a few stormy days. 
The brothers came to the conclusion that it was a land 
where relatively few people might possess many sheep. 
They also noticed that sheep and goats both in winter 
and summer went up to the mountains and did not re- 
main below in the luxuriant pastures. It was evident 
that the grass they grazed among the stones upon the 


250 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
apparently barren mountains must be of peculiar 
strength, for the sheep’s bodies remained stout and their 
wool white. 

The goats had found some holes in the mountain near 
the house. There they remained at night, took refuge 
there in bad weather, and were comfortable. 

In spite of the short days and long nights and the 
great solitude the winter proved by no means long. 
Neither the brothers nor Hallveig nor Helga felt the 
solitude oppressive ; it brought them into closer intimacy 
with each other in a way that no summer days could 
have done. They sat round the fire, busy with their 
little occupations, and talked cheerfully and confiden- 
tially together. Ingolf and Leif carved wood, Hallveig 
and Helga spun yarn and dyed it in different shades of 
heather-colour, made mittens and handkerchiefs, or ar- 
tistically woven bands of it. 

In the middle of the winter Hallveig gave birth to 
a boy, whom Ingolf sprinkled with his own hand with 
water and named Thorsten after Thor, and in remem- 
brance of his former friend, Haasten, from whom fate 
had so painfully severed him. When Hallveig had given 
birth to her boy, Helga became extremely solitary in 
soul. She never could find any sign that she was with 
child. When no one could see her, she wept bitter tears 
about it, but gave no outward sign. Outwardly she was 
uniformly cheerful and bright, and showed to each and 
all an untroubled demeanour. It was something she 
kept to herself, like the scent of the pines from the 
islands. Spring came, with mildness in the air and 
vorna.l winds. As soon as it could be managed, the ship 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 251 
was launched, loaded, and made fit for sea. The sworn 
brothers needed as much as possible of the summer to 
make preparations for their migration here the next 
spring, to exchange those of their movable goods and 
the live-stock which they could not take with them 
for useful wares, and in general to arrange their affairs 
in Norway before they left the country for good. All 
of them, except Helga, left the new land, though they 
had only been there a year, with regret. The land had 
been a good friend to them, and they were loth to bid 
it farewell even for a short time. When they sailed 
away from it, it lay there so quiet and silent, gazing 
after them, as it were. Before they departed, the mi- 
gratory birds had all come back. The land lay bathed 
in sunshine, with cheerful bird-life on the fjord and on 
the shore. 

Leif, the restless, was no more eager for journeys. 
He would rather have remained where he was, and not 
have travelled to Norway at all, But even Leif had to 
grant that the plan was impracticable. The provisions 
for the journey, which they had brought with them, were 
rapidly decreasing, and, moreover, it would be difficult 
for Ingolf when he came back to find just the same spot 
in the land, dependent as he was on weather and sea. 
Besides, Leif saw clearly that Helga, though she had 
unhesitatingly acquiesced in his wild proposal, preferred 
that they should travel with the others. Helga was 
willing to sacrifice everything for Leif, even the scent 
of the pines from the islands at home. But when she 
gave her brave assent to remain, her self-command failed 
her a little, and her lips quivered slightly. The whole 


252 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
winter she had looked forward with joy to the moment 
when she should sail between the islands to Dalsfjord. 
Like a secret treasure, she had concealed the conscious- 
ness that that was in store for her, in her steadfast 
heart. That remained there till Leif started with the 
others. But when he sailed away from the land, the 
old unrest was again awake in his soul. 


IV 

The brothers were favoured by a good wind as they 
crossed the sea to Norway. Only ten days after they 
had sailed out between the skerries outside the Svane- 
fjords, the vessel lay before Ingolf’s house in Dalsfjord. 

When they disembarked, it was only Helga who felt 
as though she had come home. Ingolf and Leif had 
already separated themselves in their hearts from their 
birthplace, and Hallveig, whose home was wherever 
Ingolf was, had never been intimately acquainted with 
this district. 

Leif had already on the return journey expressed his 
wish to go on a Viking expedition in the summer. He 
gave many reasons — - among others, that he needed 
serfs. Further, he alleged that it was the simplest way 
of obtaining goods for their journey to Iceland the next 
spring. Ingolf could arrange their affairs in Dalsfjord 
while he was out trading for them both. Leif spoke 
much about this important trading and about his very 
inconvenient want of serfs. They were dear to buy, 
and it was easiest to take them where one could find 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 253 
them. All these and more reasons were adduced by 
Leif. But he concealed his real reason for the journey, 
which was that it was impossible for him to conceive 
how he should spend a summer at home at Dalsfjord. 
His blood had suddenly become restless. His mind was 
like a bow which had been long on the strain. 

Helga, who, as was her way, always left matters to 
Leif, made no objection to his plan. On the contrary, 
she gave it her warmest assent. But now it appeared 
that there would be no more sunshine in the summer 
which would be the last she spent at home. 

Ingolf, for his part, knew Leif. And he was forced 
to admit that the arrangement was not a bad one. 
They certainly needed goods, and would obtain them 
most cheaply by fetching them themselves. For the 
rest, whatever private plans Leif had in his expedition 
were his own affair. It was thus already decided on 
the way that Leif should go on a Viking expedition. 

As soon as they landed at Dalsfjord, Leif set to work 
equipping himself for his expedition. He was somewhat 
late in that, and had therefore to hurry his prepara- 
tions as much as possible. He allowed himself leisure 
neither for sleep nor meals. In great haste he collected 
all the goods which he and Ingolf had in stock, and 
loaded his dragon-ship with them, together with the 
other ship which he still had in reserve. This time he 
had to be content with two ships ; he could not well man 
more, and, moreover, they had not goods for more than 
two. 

Only a few days after his homecoming Leif sailed out 
again from Dalsfjord and left Helga alone with the 


254 THE sworn brothers 

pine-tree scent from the islands. Leif did not guess 
that the pain of separation which left in his mind only 
a fleeting pang, filled Helga with burning anxiety and 
unrest, which should not vanish till she had him again. 

Leif sailed out over the sea and let the sea-breezes, 
the sense of solitary independence, together with the 
expectation of dangers and adventures, absorb his 
mind. 

He sailed to Ireland, and traded and ravaged wher- 
ever he came. This time Ingolf had forgotten to ex- 
act any promises of caution from him. Leif had lat- 
terly appeared to him so altered that he simply had not 
considered it necessary. Leif was therefore completely 
free, unfettered by promises or considerations of any 
kind. And in the consciousness that this was now the 
last time he was on a Viking expedition, he displayed a 
daring and exuberance in his conduct which filled his 
men with joy and sent several of them to Odin. 

During the summer Leif acquired, more by pillaging 
than by commercial genius, a very large supply of all 
kinds of goods, mostly valuable cloths and metals. In 
the course of the summer he succeeded in catching ten 
serfs — ten wiry, grimy men — who bore names like 
Duftak, Gerrod, Skjoldbjam, Haldor, Drafdrit, and 
the like, sour-looking men with evil eyes, but good 
enough as serfs, tough at rowing as they sat chained 
to the oars, and enduring in all kinds of work. Luck, 
which only unwillingly forsakes the bold, followed Leif 
wherever he went. On one occasion, towards the close 
of the summer, it nearly went ill with him. 

He had landed with his men on an apparently de- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 255 
sorted coast, which was protected by skerries and rocky 
islands with strong currents between them — a place 
which only Leif could think suitable for landing. He 
caused his ships, loaded with the costly booty of the 
summer, to be rowed in between these skerries, in order 
to hide them in a rocky creek, which he had selected 
during a solitary excursion, while he with his men went 
for a foray in the neighbourhood. For this expedition 
he needed as many of his men as possible, the object 
being a very large and presumably rich town. Leif 
left the ships in the creek with only a few men to look 
over the chained serfs, whom he dared not allow to go 
free as long as he was so near their native place. 

With the rest of his men Leif went on shore and be- 
took himself to the wood. They were all full of great 
excitement and expectation. This was to be the last 
great adventure of the summer, and Leif expected a 
booty which might perhaps make it necessary to con- 
quer a vessel to carry it in. Time would show! 

The wood they intended to cross covered a steep 
mountain-side, from the summit down to the coast, and 
it was traversed by deep, rocky ravines covered with 
bushes. Leif and his men had not penetrated far into 
this very impassable wood when they were attacked by 
an armed force far superior to their own. The people 
of the town must have had spies out along the coast. 
They were not only outwardly but really prepared for 
their coming. Leif had just shouted to his men to 
fight each for himself, first and foremost to get away 
and save the ships, when the enemy was on them with 
strident war-cries and loud clashing of weapons. Leif 


256 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
had no time to see how his men fared. The people of 
the town had at once seen who was the leader, and 
since it was the leader whom it was the most important 
to strike, they flocked round him with lifted axes and 
upraised swords. Leif had to sacrifice his spear to one 
of the two nearest attackers ; the other’s head he split 
with his ax, but next moment a swarm of howling Irish 
were pressing on him. They did not, however, surround 
him, a fact which Leif, who was striking doughtily about 
him with ax in one hand and sword in the other — his 
shield he had thrown away — had no time to think 
about. They pressed him back in between the trees. 

Leif, who at the moment only thought that six was the 
smallest number he could reasonably take with him to 
Valhalla, and was still short of two, suddenly lost his 
foothold. It happened so unexpectedly that his sword 
dropped from his hand, but with his ax he hooked him- 
self fast to a tree- root in falling, and there he hung, 
swinging in the air, over the edge of a ravine. His 
attackers had raised a great shout of victory when he 
fell. They now gathered on the edge of the ravine, 
stood there and laughed at him, and made themselves 
merry at his plight. They pricked at him for amuse- 
ment with their spears, while in loud tones they debated 
which would be the most amusing way to see him die. 
A proposal that they should slowly prick the life out 
of him gained the day. So they began to prick him in 
turn, each of them wishing to have his share of the 
pleasure. 

Leif was in a desperate situation. He looked down 
at the bottom of the ravine, where there grew heather 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 257 
and bushes. He had no other resource than to let him- 
self fall and see if he escaped with life. He wasted no 
time in reviewing the situation ; he simply let go and let 
himself fall. At the moment he fell he perceived that 
men spread themselves on both sides of him, to find a 
way down to the ravine and to surround him there if he 
escaped from the fall with his life and whole limbs. The 
fall absorbed both his body and his thoughts. He 
turned two somersaults in the air and struck against 
something hard; there was a singing in his ears, and 
he fainted for a time. 

When he came to himself again, he was lying on his 
back in some high heather and staring up at the light 
green leaves on some scattered stunted trees. He had a 
distinct consciousness of danger without at once remem- 
bering where it threatened him, and grasped involun- 
tarily after his ax and spear. He grasped in vacancy, 
and when he discovered that he was weaponless, the 
whole situation was suddenly clear to him. In an in- 
stant he was on his legs, satisfied himself that no bones 
were broken, picked up his helmet, and, involuntarily 
stooping to half his height, set off, running as hastily 
as his somewhat stiff limbs allowed, into the thickest 
part of the wood, and took the way down to the coast. 

He had already run a good way when he heard men 
approaching, talking loudly, farther down the ravine. 
He halted and stood stiff and motionless. Only his 
eyes roamed round to seek a hiding-place, but he saw 
nothing resembling one anywhere. A little hollow in 
the ground close to his feet might perhaps afford room 
for his body, but by no means could it conceal him. 


258 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
With every moment that passed, while he stood there 
without any chance of escape, he could more distinctly 
hear his heart beating. He already imagined to himself 
how it would be to have his entrails drawn out and to be 
led round a tree. But at the same instant, when he was 
on the point of giving up and of flying up the ravine 
where he was quite sure to meet other foes, his eye fell 
on a large flat stone. There was salvation! Trem- 
bling over his whole body with excitement, he raised the 
stone on its edge and rolled it towards the hollow. 
Then he lay down, wrapped his cloak round him, shrunk 
himself up as well as he could, and pushed the stone 
right over him. There he lay and heard his pursuers 
come tramping. From their talk he understood that 
they were quite sure that he still lay where he had fallen, 
and feared that he had broken his neck, so that all 
further amusement for them was over. All the same, 
they urged each other to have a good look for him. 
If they found the red-haired devil, he should be flayed 
alive. Leif lay there under his flat stone with a comer 
of his cloak between his teeth. An irresistible convul- 
sive fit of laughter seized him and shook his whole body. 
Every moment he might be prepared for them to raise 
the stone ; he did not know whether it covered him com- 
pletely. But here he lay, and there they went, rejoicing 
at the idea of flaying him alive. Less than that was 
needed to make Leif merry. 

The men passed. Their voices died away gradually 
farther up the ravine. Leif let some moments pass, 
then cautiously raised the stone. After taking a good 
look round he set out, crouching as he ran, to the har- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 259 
bour. He reached the shore without seeing more ene- 
mies. He stood for a little, recovering himself in the 
cool air from the sea. He was tolerably sure that they 
would remain so keenly on the watch that he could 
hardly in full daylight get to his ship, if indeed he still 
had a ship at all! It was impossible for him to know 
if things had gone better with his men than with him- 
self, or if the ships had already fallen into the enemies’ 
hands. It was really a nice mess that he had got into ! 
When would he see Helga again? 

Leif let his gaze wander over the fjord, and caught 
sight of an island with some stunted fir trees a little 
distance out. This island was surrounded by smaller 
ones, and appeared to him, at that moment, very 
attractive. His enemies would scarcely think of look- 
ing for him outside the borders of the land. 

Leif did not reflect very long. He hid his cloak, 
helmet, and whatever might be in his way when swim- 
ming thither, piled stones up on them, and let them lie. 
Then he flung himself into the waves. He swam on his 
back the first part of the way in order to be able to keep 
an eye on the land and to see if he was noticed. He 
could not see the least sign of life on shore. He reached 
the island safe and sound, and crawled, wet and weary, 
up its smooth, rocky side. He dragged himself under 
the shelter of a stone where he could lie and let the sun 
bathe him ; luckily it shone brightly and warmly, in spite 
of the lateness of the season. He settled himself com- 
fortably and closed his eyes. Shortly afterwards he fell 
asleep. He awoke from uneasy dreams ; the light of the 
setting sun fell dazzling on his face. He had, then, 


260 the sworn brothers 

slept the whole day. And what sort of a coverlet was 
that which he had over him? Closer inspection showed 
it to be a grey cloak of coarse material. Leif looked 
round him with wide-open eyes, and caught sight of a 
man squatting a little distance off, and regarding him 
with mild, attentive eyes. 

Leif did not place much confidence in the mildness of 
his glance. Involuntarily he felt around for his weap- 
ons. There were no weapons there — now he remem- 
bered the whole affair — but the man there seemed like- 
wise unarmed. Also, he smiled, and for the rest was so 
thin and wasted that he could hardly be dangerous. 
What sort of a man was he? He looked ragged and 
starving. His hair and beard were tangled like a bird’s 
nest. There was an atmosphere of death about him. 
Only in his eyes and smile was there life — a gentle and, 
at the same time, intense life. 

The man rose and disappeared behind a projecting 
rock. Leif thought this very strange conduct, and 
remembered, when he was out of sight, that he had not 
heard his step at all. Was he still asleep and dream- 
ing? Was it a living man he had seen or a ghost? No, 
there he came again, whoever he was. He had bare legs, 
which explained why he walked noiselessly, and, for the 
rest, appeared altogether wretched and harmless. This 
time he came up close to Leif with some shellfish, which 
he opened with a practised hand, merely with the help 
of a sharp-edged stone. Leif ate a couple of the shell- 
fish, being ravenously hungry, and would have gladly 
thanked this friendly and strange man, but his disgust 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 2t5i 
was too strong for him, and he declared himself satis- 
fied. 

Then the strange man smiled anew, an indulgent 
smile, and ate the rest of the shellfish himself. When he 
had finished, he asked Leif how he was, if he could rise, 
and how he came to be lying here on his island. Leif 
trumped up a long story about having fallen over- 
board from a ship. “ The current had seized him,” he 
said, “ and carried him hither.” He found it best at. the 
same time to show the man quite clearly, in order that 
he might make no mistake, that he not only could rise, 
but that he was altogether quite sound. 

The man smiled again, whether on account of his 
story or his slightly threatening gestures, Leif was not 
sure, and asked him no more, but rose quietly and bade 
Leif follow him. He led him over to the other side of 
the island to the mouth of a little cave. “ I live here,” 
he said in his gentle voice. “ You are the first guest 
who has paid me a visit, and the only man I have seen 
for many years. Assuredly God had His special pur- 
pose in sending you hither, my brother, however that 
may have happened. If you will share my cave with 
me for the night, you are welcome. In the morning 
you can swim to the shore, if you will, and are a strong 
swimmer. You can also perhaps remain here, if you 
prefer it.” 

“ What are you doing here? ” asked Leif, who, to his 
astonishment, could discover neither the roving eye nor 
mistrustful behaviour of an outlaw in this mild, quiet 
man. “ Why do you live alone on this desert island? ” 


262 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

“ I serve my God,” answered the man gently and 
seriously, making the sign of the Cross. Then Leif 
suddenly became aware that it was one of the mad Irish 
monks whom he had before him. 

From that moment he did not fear the man any more. 
The monks were peaceful people, mad though they were. 
But there was something mysterious about the man 
which caused Leif to feel by no means comfortable in 
his society. 

“ How do you live? ” Leif asked, after a long pause. 
The man smiled his gentle smile, and pointed to a pot- 
shaped hollow in the rock, which stood filled to the brim 
with sea-water. “ At high tide God sends me sometimes 
a little food,” he said contentedly, “ or I dive for shell- 
fish when I am hungry. There is also plenty of sea- 
weed here. I do not need much. Shall not God who 
feeds the birds also feed me? ” 

“ How do you serve your God? ” asked Leif, grow- 
ing curious. 

“ I pray, fast, and lead a pure life,” answered the 
monk quietly. 

“Who is your God?” Leif questioned further. 

“ The one true God, the Trinity — God the Father, 
God the Son, and God the Holy Ghost,” answered the 
monk in his gentle voice, and again made the sign of 
the Cross. 

“What is His name?” Leif continued. 

He had sat down on a stone step outside the mouth 
of the cave and fixed his wondering eyes on the monk. 

“ He is called Jehovah ; His Son, whose sacred name 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 263 
is Jesus Christ, let Himself be bom as man, and shed 
His blood for men, to wash away their sins.” 

Leif was silent. He remembered carved and painted 
images he had seen of a God they called Jesus Christ. 
He hung nailed to a cross, with blood dripping from 
His hands and feet, from His thorn-crowned head, and 
from a wound in His side. Leif had always despised 
this God, who, according to the narrative, had willingly 
let Himself be killed and hung up upon a cross of wood. 
He did not comprehend the love of such a wretched 
divinity which could make a man like this monk live his 
life on this desert island, merely to pray to Him and 
thank Him. A powerless God He must be — much 
more wretched than even Odin and Thor. And yet He 
could obtain such power over men. 

The monk had seated himself on a stone directly 
opposite Leif. The last rays of the sun fell on his back, 
and made his grey hair glow like a golden glory round 
his head. Leif remembered having seen this gold ring 
round the head, and he sat and began to feel quite 
strange and uneasy in his mind. 

“Shall I tell you about Jesus Christ?” asked the 
monk at last, in a voice that was soft and ingratiating 
like a woman’s. 

“ No,” answered Leif, not without a certain fear in 
his soul, which distinctly betrayed itself in his voice. 
“ Tell me rather of something else.” 

The monk sighed sorrowfully. “ As you will, my 
brother. The Lord is mighty, and I am but the least 
of His instruments. Perhaps He has reserved the grace 


264 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

of delivering your soul for another and worthier than 
myself. What shall I tell you, brother? ” 

“ Tell me something about foreign lands,” said 
Leif, who had a dim consciousness that there could 
hardly be anything which this man did not know. 

44 I cannot tell you about foreign lands,” answered 
the monk gently. 44 1 have not seen any other coun- 
try except Ireland. And I do not feel the want of 
it. The wickedness of the world is great in the lands. 
The Devil rules most lands where people dwell. The 
Lord has of His mercy granted me this lonely island, 
and my only wish is to live here in peace till He takes 
me to Himself in His glory.” 

He was silent for a while, and reflected. 44 But I can 
read to you of a place called Paradise,” he said, break- 
ing off his meditations. Then he rose and crept into 
the low mouth of the cave. 

A little while after he came back with a roll in his 
hand. When he opened it, Leif saw that it consisted 
of some pieces of skin covered over with strange signs. 

The monk sat down and began to read in a monoto- 
nous and devout voice: 

4 ‘ There is a place that is called Paradise. It is not 
in heaven nor upon earth, but between heaven and 
earth, at an equal distance from both, as it was fixed 
there by God. Paradise is forty miles higher than the 
Flood rose at its highest. Paradise is of the same 
length and breadth on all sides. There is no hill nor 
valley there. There comes never frost, there falls never 
snow. The earth is luxuriant and fruitful there, but 
there are no evil beasts nor dangers nor defects of 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 265 
any kind. There is a pure well, which is called the 
well of life. There is a splendid and beautiful wood 
called ‘Radion saltus,’ the leaves of which never fade. 
Each of its trees is straight and round like a spar, 
and so high that the top is invisible. There are all 
kinds of trees which stand in complete beauty and 
bear all manner of blossoms and beautifully coloured 
apples and fruits of all kinds. There no leaves fall 
from the branches. The wood stands in the midst of 
Paradise. One of the fruit trees was forbidden to 
Adam ; in its fruit was hidden the knowledge of good 
and evil. There is neither hate nor hunger, and never 
is there night nor darkness, but always perpetual 
day. The sun shines there seven times more strongly 
than in this world, for its light is increased with the 
light of all the stars. There walk Angels, keeping 
all things in order in joy and pleasure. Thither have 
the souls of good men gone (and shall go and dwell 
there till Doomsday) since God opened the place when 
He took thither the soul of the Thief who died upon the 
cross. 

“ In Paradise there is a bird which is called the 
Phoenix. It is very large, and wonderful is the fashion 
of its creation, and it is the King of' all birds. It 
bathes in the well of life, and then flies up on that 
tree which is the highest in Paradise, and sits in the 
sun. Then it shines with a light like that of the sun’s 
rays. Its whole body gleams like gold, its feathers are 
like God’s angels, its breast is beautiful, and its beak 
resembles its feathers. Its eyes are like crystal, and 
its feet like blood. But when this beautiful bird, the 


266 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
Phoenix, flies from Paradise to the land of Egypt and 
dwells there five weeks, all kinds of birds gather there 
and sing round it in all manner of ways. Then the 
men who dwell there hear that and gather round it 
from everywhere, and speak as follows : 4 Welcome, 

Phoenix, to our land ! Thou shinest like red gold ; thou 
art the King of all the birds’ Then the people of the 
land make another phoenix of wax and copper which 
resembles the old one as much as possible. All the birds 
fall at its feet and honour it with a glad voice. Along 
its back there runs a red stripe, beautiful as burnt gold. 
When its fifth week is passed, the beautiful Phoenix flies 
again to Paradise. All the birds fly with it, some below 
it, some above it, on both sides. But when they cannot 
follow it any longer they return home.” 

The monk paused and looked at Leif, who sat bowed 
opposite him with open mouth and eyes. When the 
monk saw how absorbed his hearer was, he smiled and 
continued : 

6i It happened four thousand years before the birth 
of Christ (one millennium had passed) that the Phoenix 
had become old, and gathered round it a great number 
of birds, in order to bring together a great pile of fuel. 
But by God’s will it happened so that the sun shone on 
the pile of fuel and the sun’s warmth kindled a fire in it. 
But the Phoenix fell in the midst of the fire and was 
burned to ashes. But the third day afterwards it rose 
from the dead and was young again, and went to the 
Well of Life and bathed. Then its feathers grew again, 
as beautiful as they had ever been. It becomes old in 
the course of a thousand winters, then it burns itself 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 267 

again to ashes, and rises each time young once more. 
But no one knows, except God alone, whether it is a 
male or a female bird.” 

The monk stopped. The sun had gone down, and the 
dusk of twilight filled the air. He could no longer see 
to distinguish the characters. He rolled up his skin- 
scroll carefully together and tied a band round it. 

Leif had swallowed his words to the end with eager 
ears. At the same time the monk’s droning way of 
reading had had a soporific effect upon him. When 
the monk was silent for a moment, Leif gave a deep 
yawn and felt a strange weariness in all his limbs. 
The next moment he fell asleep where he sat, with his 
head propped on his hands. 

The monk let him sit and sleep while he uttered a 
long and humble prayer to God, that it might be 
granted him to save this heathen’s soul from destruction 
and the outer darkness. 

Then he awoke Leif gently, and bade him follow him 
into the cave and share his straw bed and his cloak 
with him, for it was now cold outside. 

Leif awoke and saw that it was already night, with a 
pale glimmer of the moon behind black clouds. Now 
the time had really come. But he was not a little curi- 
ous to learn more about the monk’s cave, and, besides, 
it was perhaps best to let him fall asleep before he left 
the island. 

The monk struck a light and kindled a shaving. 
Then he crept into the low mouth of the cave. Leif 
crept after him, and the first thing he set eyes upon was 
a magnificent sword with a golden hilt and gold inlaid 


268 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
blade. It stood set up against the wall in the inner- 
most part of the cave. It was the most beautiful sight 
which at the moment could meet Leif’s eyes, and it was 
impossible for him to avert his gaze from the shining 
sword. When he noticed the monk’s look fixed on him, 
he compelled himself to ask, in an indifferent tone, how 
it was he possessed such a valuable sword, as he was 
so poor and peaceful. 

“ That sword I inherited from my father,” answered 
the monk gently and as it were apologetically. 66 1 
brought it with me here so that it should not do more 
harm than it has already done among men. I first in- 
tended to throw it into the sea, but it is so splendid. I 
have never been able to bring myself to do that, and it 
does no harm here in my cave.” 

He took it in his hand with obvious tenderness, and 
showed it to Leif. Leif dared not touch it for fear of 
betraying his covetousness. 

The monk stood and contemplated the sword, and 
said, as though reflecting : “ They who slay with the 

sword shall perish with the sword.” 

Leif believed that he was pronouncing a spell which 
belonged to the sword, and smiled incredulously. Im- 
mediately afterwards he threw himself down on the 
pallet of straw, as though he were weary and sleepy, 
and only thought of rest. 

The monk replaced the sword, put out the light, laid 
himself down at Leif’s side, and arranged his cloak 
over them both, so that his guest had a brother’s share. 
Leif lay wide awake, wondering whether he should suc- 
ceed in finding his men, and whether he should see his 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 269 
ships again. Soon afterwards Leif heard the monk 
snoring, and began to twist and turn himself, to see if 
that would wake him. No, the monk slept deeply and 
soundly; his snoring filled the cave with the peace of 
sleep and night. 

Then Leif rose stealthily from the pallet, groped his 
way to the sword, took hold of it, although with a little 
prick in his conscience, and crept on all fours noiselessly 
out of the cave, followed by the unconscious snoring of 
the monk. When he stood outside in the dark night, he 
raised himself erect and breathed freely. He was not 
at all sure whether he still had his ships and men, or 
whether all his men were killed, and the ships taken pos- 
session of by the enemy. But he again held a sword in 
his hand. Leif only stopped for a moment outside the 
mouth of the cave. Then with long, noiseless strides 
he crossed over the island and plunged into the water. 
He held the sword between his teeth and swam as best 
he could. 

Leif found his cloak and other articles of clothing 
where he had left them. He had much feared lest they 
should be gone, and the discovery of them have served as 
a guide to the enemy. He put his clothes on and then 
began to listen intently in all directions. When he 
could not hear any movement or noise anywhere, he set 
off running along the shore in the direction of the creek 
where he had left his ships. The last part of the way 
he crept through the wood. He reached the creek with- 
out having come across hindrances of any kind. And 
out there lay his ships. They were lying farther out 
than when he bad left them, and to Leif it seemed a 


270 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
good sign. This time he tied his cloak in a bundle on 
his back, took the sword between his teeth, and, thus 
equipped, swam out to the ships. He swam as noise- 
lessly and cautiously as possible, so that he might be 
able to turn quickly if it should prove that it was not 
his men who were in possession of the ships. 

When he got within a bowshot of the ships, his old 
headman gave the alarm, and asked in a grim voice: 
“ Who goes there ? ” 

Leif answered with a low whistle, which they all knew, 
and there was great excitement and gladness on board. 
He had a rope thrown to him. Immediately afterwards 
he swung himself over the gunwale and stood wet and 
dripping among his men, with a strange sword between 
his teeth. 

“ Leif ! Leif ! ” they shouted, and all wanted to 
touch him. Leif asked hastily how many men they had 
lost. It appeared that they had only three killed and 
two wounded. The rest had got on board safe and 
sound. Questions hailed down upon him. His men 
had really not expected to see him again, and were 
frenzied with delight and impatient to hear what had 
happened to him. 

Before Leif would tell them anything, he questioned 
them thoroughly, and learnt that they had intended to 
remain lying here for some days, if the weather allowed, 
in case he should return, or hoping at least that they 
might learn something of his fate in some other way. 

All the men on board the dragon-ship were gathered 
in a cluster round Leif, their eyes fixed on his splendid 
sword. Leif took off his wet clothes and put on dry 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 271 
ones. Then he crept into his bearskin bag and shook 
himself with a sense of satisfaction. The men took 
their places round him and waited patiently to hear his 
story. Lying stretched on his back among his sitting 
men, with the pale moonlight flickering over his face, 
Leif began his narrative. 

He began with his fall down the ravine. He told 
them how he had first hooked himself firm with his ax, 
and then had been obliged to let go of it and to drop 
when the men had begun to prick him. He told of his 
awaking without a weapon, and of his flight. He only 
related briefly the adventure with the flat stone under 
which he had concealed himself. His men listened, 
breathless with excitement. 

When Leif was about to tell of his visit to the cave 
he suddenly paused. He noticed, to his surprise, that 
he really did not like to tell how he had got possession 
of his sword. But it was precisely about the sword 
that his men were most curious to hear. 

“The sword?” asked the old headman in a husky 
voice, when he had been silent for a while. 

“ Yes, now comes the most wonderful thing of all,” 
answered Leif reflectively. And, staring at the pale 
sickle of the moon, he rallied all his inventive powers 
and continued : " I had at last come up out of the 

ravine and was wandering in the wood. I do not know 
how long I ran about without an idea where I was. 
But suddenly I stood at the entrance of a great cave in 
the earth. I slipped into it in order to let the darkness 
hide me. When I had gone a good way in, I heard a 
strange sound farther on in the cave. I stole forward 


272 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
and caught sight, in the dark, of a man who sat and 
sang. His head waggled forward and backward and to 
the sides, and his song penetrated my bones and mar- 
row. His eyes rolled about in his head as though he 
were possessed. His face was yellow and blue, and 
there issued a strong odour from him, for he was not a 
living man, but a dead one. A little behind him hung 
this sword, and it shone on the wall of the cave. As I 
was weaponless, my life depended on my getting hold 
of the sword. I stole, therefore, farther on, and suc- 
ceeded in slipping past him without his noticing me. 
But, just as I was going to seize the sword, I stumbled 
over a stone on the floor of the cave, and at the same 
instant I had the dead man on me.” 

Leif was so absorbed in his story that a cold sweat 
burst out on his forehead at the narrative of this im- 
aginary fight. His men listened in deathlike silence, 
staring at him with wide-open eyes, and pressing in- 
voluntarily closer to each other. 

“ So near to the dead I have never been,” Leif con- 
tinued, and took a deep breath. “ You have no idea 
what power there is in a dead man’s bones. He crushed 
me as though with claws of iron. The most uncomfort- 
able part was, that wherever I seized hold of him the 
flesh slipped away under my grip, and I held the bare 
bone-pipes with my hands. And there was a most 
intolerable smell which nearly suffocated me. More- 
over, the whole time he kept wheezing foam into my 
face.” Leif stopped with a groan, and with the back 
of his hand wiped the sweat from his brow. He lay 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 273 

there white as a corpse, with burning eyes, in the pale 
moonlight. 

“ At last I succeeded in getting him under me,” he 
said in a lowered voice, “ and putting out my utmost 
strength I pushed him against the stone he had sat 
upon, and at last I broke his back. While he lay there, 
and before I had seized the sword to cut off his 
wretched head, his rotten tongue continued to spit out 
curses. I will not repeat them, for they were terrible. 
Only so much I will tell you, that he said that there 
was a spell on this sword, that whosoever should kill 
with it should die with it.” 

Leif’s old headman, who during the last part of this 
narrative had panted like a sick man, suddenly sprang 
up in great excitement. “ Throw the cursed sword 
overboard,” he shouted in a shaky voice, with his whole 
body trembling. Leif reached after the sword, and 
clutched its golden hilt firmly. 66 No ! ” he answered 
decidedly. “ I have risked too much to gain it.” 

The old man broke down with a hiccoughing sob, 
which sent an ice-cold shudder through the bones and 
marrow of Leif and all the rest. 

“ What did you do then with the dead man? ” asked 
one at length, with his teeth chattering. 

“ I exit his head off and laid it by his feet,” Leif 
answered curtly, and gave a sigh of relief. Since there 
was no more to tell, Leif remained lying silent. His 
men continued sitting silent and motionless round him. 

Leif found himself wondering that his meeting with 
the monk had suddenly become so distant and unreal. 
Was it not something which he had dreamt? How was 


274 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
it, really? Had he not been fighting with a dead man? 
His body was so strangely stiff. And if not, why 
should he have this smell in his nostrils ? Leif no longer 
knew himself what to believe. The drowsiness of sleep 
slurred the clearness of his thought and confused the 
real with the unreal. 

The old man had gradually become silent. For a 
while he sat motionless, with his head wrapped in a 
corner of his cloak. Then he let the corner fall and 
continued to sit and look at Leif. When at last he 
spoke, his voice had resumed its deep, quiet tone. “ In 
memory of your wonderful experience and great adven- 
ture, you shall hereafter be called ‘ Hjor-Leif,’ ” he 
said solemnly to Leif. 

Leif smiled with half-closed eyes; then they closed 
quite. He slept peacefully and calmly as though he 
had never been engaged in fighting a dead man. 

His men remained sitting quite silent around him. 
They did not talk together. They had conceived a 
great fear in their souls which the moon’s unearthly 
light considerably increased. They were simply afraid 
to lie down and close their eyes and fall asleep. They 
could not understand how Leif could lie there and sleep 
so comfortably after such an adventure. Their ad- 
miration for him had never been greater than now. 
They would like to know whether he would be afraid to 
encounter the gods themselves. They had never seen 
fear in his eyes. It was certainly right that he should 
have the sword affixed to his name and be called Hior- 
Leif. 

Leif awoke of his own accord at sunrise. Then he 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 275 
saw his men still in a circle round him. He broke into a 
loud fit of laughter when he saw their stupid eyes and 
faces weary with watching. 

“ Beer ! Beer ! ” he shouted, and sprang up. 
“ Plenty of beer for all the men ! Drink now, boys ! ” 
He cheered them up. The most slack of them he 
whirled round and capsized and thumped till there was 
a roar of merriment around him. 

When Leif had emptied a couple of jugs of beer he 
felt hungry and demanded food. For a whole day and 
night he had had nothing except two raw shellfish, if 
that were not something which he had only dreamt. 
At any rate, his hunger was keen and insatiable. With 
continually increasing wonder his men stood round him 
and watched him devour a hearty meal. He was the 
only one on board who had an appetite. An icy dread 
instilled by the moonlight still possessed his men like 
bodily nausea. Even the beer which he had given them 
they drank more from obedience than from pleasure. 

When Leif had made them first stir themselves and 
then totter a little on their legs, he set them at the 
oars and bade them set to work like the boys they 
were ! They should only think of their wives and dear- 
est ones, and for the rest row as though a dead man 
were after them. Leif had had enough adventures for 
the present. Now he wanted to get home to Norway. 


276 THE SWORN BROTHERS 


V 

Helga, the faithful and anxious, was once more to see 
the summer die on the fields and in the wood and Leif 
return home over the autumn sea. 

The foggy, raw, cold autumn day became great and 
festive when she caught sight of Leif’s ship out on the 
fjord. A red flag waved from the mast, a signal which 
had been agreed upon. There came Leif sailing with 
her happiness on board. 

Merely the fact of his being alive was like a boon 
from the gods. It filled her soul with summer to feel 
herself warm and living in his arms. Every time that 
Leif came home from an expedition, it was equally new 
and incomprehensible that he lived — lived and was 
near her again. 

Leif came home with spring and renewal of life in his 
soul. That was always the case with him. The evil 
and dangerous unrest was gone. He had swept it out 
of his soul with adventures. Leif was again Leif. His 
cheerful laughter betokened his inner quiet. There was 
noise and bustle wherever he moved, but there was a 
contented assurance in his voice and look. 

To Helga, at any rate, it seemed worth while to have 
endured the pain of longing and anxiety during the 
summer in order to have him home again. The eager 
tone of his voice alone, when he asked questions or re- 
lated incidents, made her heart swell with happiness. 
She could forget both to answer and to listen, and just 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 277 

cast herself on his neck because she must, because it 
was so delightful to weep and laugh out her happiness 
with his arms round her. 

Leif never returned empty-handed from an expedi- 
tion. Besides the serfs and goods which he had this 
time gained, he had acquired a new name — H j or- 
Leif. 

Ingolf, Hallveig, and Helga were all obliged to laugh 
loudly the first time they heard him called by this new 
name. Leif began at once to explain eagerly, and with 
a little embarrassment, that it was not a name which he 
had himself assumed — one of his men had bestowed it 
on him of his own accord. But it was plain to see that 
he was proud of the addition to his name, and did not 
like their laughing at it. 

They questioned him with curiosity about the sword 
which had given occasion for the name — a valuable 
sword which few remembered to have seen the like of. 

Leif answered with great seriousness that there was a 
ludicrous story connected with that sword. He had 
told it once to his men. But it was not a story one 
went spreading about. He had no intention of repeat- 
ing it. His old headman, on the other hand, was fond 
of relating it. He was by no means disposed to let 
Leif’s adventure pass into oblivion. And he related it 
in such a way that one did not sleep quietly for several 
nights after hearing the old man’s quavering voice re- 
late the unheard-of terrors which Leif had experienced 
in the cave. He certainly deserved to be called Hjor- 
Leif, especially since he himself liked it — on that all 
were agreed, when they had heard of the way in which 


27B THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Leif had gained his sword. And so from that day he 

was called Hjor-Leif, and nothing else. 

Neither Ingolf nor any one else doubted that the 
story was true. The sword in itself was sufficient 
proof. Moreover, it was so entirely like Leif not to 
be satisfied with fighting living men, but also to have 
to test his strength with the dead, and to come well out 
of the encounter. 

Hjor-Leif was, as we have said, not to be persuaded 
to narrate the story himself. He was not at all fond of 
being reminded of it. 

His other adventures, small and great, he was gen- 
erally willing enough to relate. And he took them by 
no means seriously. His description of the way he 
hung out over the cliff, clinging to the handle of his ax 
and being thrust at by sharp spear-points, might have 
made even a dead man writhe with laughter, although 
in itself there was nothing pleasant in the situation. 
The Leif who revealed himself behind such experiences, 
and could relate them in such a light and completely 
artless way — that was the Leif whom Ingolf loved 
and could not resist. For a long time after he had 
heard Hjor-Leif tell of the little hollow and the flat 
stone, Ingolf could have a fit of laughter merely by 
thinking of it. 

Hjor-Leif confided to Helga, and Helga alone, a 
wonderful story regarding which he was not sure 
whether it was an actual experience or a dream. Upon 
an island he had swum to he had met a hermit who from 
some mysterious characters on some pieces of skin had 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 279 
deciphered a long and wonderful account of a place 
which was called Paradise, and a bird he called the 
Phoenix. Had Helga ever heard the name of the place 
or the bird? No, Helga had not. And even though 
Helga in her heart thought that there was no limit 
to Hjor-Leif’s possible experiences, she gave it, never- 
theless, as her view that it was very likely a dream. 
Hjor-Leif also thought it might be. For part of the 
story or dream was that the hermit had given him 
shellfish to eat, and that he really had eaten them. 
That could in any case not be the fact, for he cherished 
the most decided dislike to raw shellfish. That must at 
least be something he had dreamt. 

All the same, the story about the monk continued to 
haunt Hjor-Leif’s mind and disquiet him. For a part 
of the dream which he had not confided to Helga was — 
that he had stolen his sword from the monk. That was 
a bad dream. 

When Hjor-Leif returned home from the Viking expe- 
dition of the summer, Ingolf had already sold such of 
their goods and cattle as could not be stowed on board 
the two ships. He had also sold his dragon-ship. He 
confided in a quiet voice to his brother that he intended 
hereafter to lead a perfectly peaceful life. Hjor-Leif 
once more remembered his dream of the hermit on the 
island, and said that he also had had enough of these 
expeditions. They agreed that Ingolf should purchase 
from Hjor-Leif his share in the vessel, and that Hjor- 
Leif should then exchange his two ships for a powerful 
trading-ship. Ingolf had in his journeys seen one that 


2 8 O' THE SWORN BROTHERS 
might suit him. The matter was arranged, and every- 
thing was now ready for their departure in the next 
spring. 

It was the season when the first winter nights were 
powdering the earth with frost. 

And now began a lively and unquiet time for the 
sworn brothers. Relatives and friends came from near 
and far to spend some days with them. The whole of 
this last winter in Dalsfjord there was a festivity and 
bustle which made them all giddy with hilarity, es- 
pecially Hjor-Leif. His irrepressible mood infected 
Helga. She gave herself away and forgot everything, 
even her most secret troubles — she forgot everything 
in the one fact that she just had Leif. They let day 
be day, and night be night, and merely lived — lived 
in a state of blissful intoxication, which excluded every- 
thing except absorption in the present happiness of 
their souls. Often when Helga was falling asleep, she 
thought, “ You will not wake in the morning,” and 
smiled happily. Her happiness was so deep that death 
and life ran into one. 

There was no pause in the festivities. When there 
was no feast being held in the house, they and their 
guests and servants were invited to week-long feasts 
in other houses. Among their kinsmen and friends 
there were already at this time many who said that if 
Ingolf and Hjor-Leif prospered in the new land, they 
also would sell their properties in Norway and migrate 
thither. Norway was no longer what it had been. 
They knew no longer whether they were free yeomen or 
King Harald’s lease-holders. Lately one of Harald’s 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 281 
Jarls had murdered Atle Jarl the Slender. Haas ten 
held his right and inheritance by Harald’s permission. 
And there were many situated as he was. Every one 
who dared to murmur had forfeited life and land. It 
would certainly be a good thing to find a free place 
so far away that Harald’s hard arm could not reach. 

Hjor-Leif reminded Ingolf that he had long foretold 
that. There was no need to fear solitude in the new 
land. Before many years had passed, the whole of the 
great island would be taken in possession by the best 
men of Norway. 

Hjor-Leif spoke contentedly and undisturbedly 
about the matter. He was himself, as usual, not aware 
of any responsibility. Upon Ingolf the prospects of 
many following them thither had a different effect. He 
was quite weighed down with a sense of responsibility 
and anxiety. Was the land out there in the west so 
good that he could justify drawing others by his 
example from their inheritance and the country of their 
race? And, above all: Was it the gods’ will that he 
should journey thither? Ingolf arranged a great 
Yuletide sacrificial feast. And now he wished to ascer- 
tain the will of the gods. 

On the first night of the feast he cast lots. Some 
chips or sticks, dipped in sacrificial blood, were tossed 
in a cloth, and he read off the characters formed by 
the positions which the chips assumed towards each 
other. Far to the left lay a chip by itself, straight up 
and down, a clear character, an “I.” That signified 
“ ice,” and seemed to mean that he should travel. The 
next character was even clearer. Some chips had so 


282 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
arranged themselves' that they formed the runic char- 
acter “ F.” That signified “ cattle ” ; goods and wealth. 
There was no fear of making a mistake. Ingolf read 
off still more characters, but they were all propitious, 
with the exception of a single death-rune. Well, one 
could not escape death by not travelling. That came 
to each one on the day assigned by the fates. Ingolf 
was reassured. 

Winter passed, and the days increased in light and 
length. Then came a spring day. It was a warm and 
festal spring which fell in step with winter’s mood. 

The sworn brothers launched their vessel and loaded 
it with goods and implements, men and cattle. Ingolf 
had taken the pillars of his high-seat on board, to- 
gether with all the images of the gods from the temple. 

Leif sat doubled up with laughter and watched In- 
golf and his men dragging with solemn intentness the 
worm-eaten and bedizened pillars of the gods from the 
temple down to the ship. Was Ingolf, then, no wiser? 

Helga awoke from her trance of happiness as she 
stood with her hand in Hjor-Leif’s and sailed out be- 
tween some small islands covered with spruce and fir, 
from whence a strong pine-scent was carried towards 
her by a gentle breeze. Hjor-Leif felt her hand grow 
cold in his. He clasped the slender fingers more closely. 
Had he clasped them too closely? Her little hand 
began suddenly to tremble in his. He looked into her 
eyes with a searching and slightly troubled look. But 
there was nothing the matter. She smiled her quietest 
and happiest smile at him. He kissed her, made her 
sit in shelter, and wrapped a skin round her, so that 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 283 
she should not feel cold. Soon they were outside the 
islands. The wind blew stronger and more steadily. 
Before the bellying sails the two heavily loaded ships 
steered over a sea blue with spring. 


VI 

The sworn brothers’ ships lay rolling violently, rock- 
ing and pitching in the heavy swell south of Iceland. 
The day was calm and warm. High light clouds were 
spread over the deep blue vault of heaven. The sun 
poured his strong spring light in broad floods over sea 
and land. 

That day it was fourteen days since they had sailed 
out from Dalsfjord. For fourteen days they had been 
in the power of the wind. A storm which tore the sails 
and broke the yards had driven them about over a rag- 
ing sea, which ceaselessly sent cold showers of spray 
over the low gunwales. From morning till evening, 
from evening till morning, four men had stood in each 
vessel with the two baling scoops, working for life to 
keep the water out. In spite of being continually re- 
lieved the men were at last so worn out and wasted 
that they could scarcely eat, and fell asleep and rolled 
over wherever they sat down even for a moment. 

By continual watchfulness and clever seamanship the 
brothers had succeeded in keeping their vessels together. 
Each stood day and night at the rudder. Only in the 
short intervals when the wind turned, or there was a 
short pause, did they throw themselves down to sleep 


284 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
for the moment as if dead. They had no. time to think 
of Helga and Hallveig. Helga was careful not to be in 
the way. She rendered the small service she was able 
to do under these circumstances as much as possible 
without making herself observed. Hallveig sat with 
her boy in her lap and let the wind blow and the storm 
rage. She kept her eyes on Ingolf and felt safe. 

The sworn brothers fought for life and death with 
storm and sea. The great thing was to hold out, not 
to give up, not to think of anything but what concerned 
the steering and the quantity of canvas they should 
carry, not to be wearied, not to lose one’s head — to 
hold out, to hold out. It was just this unceasing 
struggle which kept up their courage and spirits. 

The animals were ill and starving ; some of them died 
and had to be thrown overboard, others lay in their 
last agonies, pitiable to see. Much of their corn and 
other food-stores was spoilt by the dense showers of 
spray. The fresh water in the casks sank regularly 
and irremediably. The men went about slackly, and 
had to be kept going with a hard hand. There was 
hardly anything on board which was not otherwise than 
it should be, and giving reason for deep anxiety. But 
the brothers held out. 

When at last on the previous day they had seen on 
the extreme verge of the northern horizon a light from 
the snow-covered interior of the new land like a faint 
white gleam, each had thought within himself that it 
was not a day too soon. 

During the last twenty-four hours the storm had at 
last slowly quieted down, and now they lay here, held up 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 285 
by a presumably only short calm, a few hours’ sail 
from the coast, and gazed curiously and expectantly 
over the sea at the land in the blue distance. 

The ships lay side by side, kept in their places by 
long boat-hooks, only so far from each other as was 
necessary in order to prevent their chafing and in- 
juring their sides. 

Hjor-Leif and Helga had gone on board Ingolf’s 
vessel in order to greet him and Hallveig and to talk 
over the situation. All four were seated, Hallveig with 
her little boy in her arms, on the stern poop. After 
severe trial they had passed through there was a silence 
over them which was difficult to break. They had not 
yet grown properly accustomed to the fact that life and 
death did not hang on each moment as it passed. 
Therefore they spoke but little. Towards the north- 
east and north-west the soft lines of the slightly ris- 
ing and falling glaciers stood out behind the blue moun- 
tains that crowned this flat land. The brothers fol- 
lowed the changing contours of the country with a 
peculiar tenderness in their eyes. But their gaze al- 
ways turned back to the glaciers which shone spark- 
ling white in the strong sunshine. 

Hallveig and Helga also could not turn away their 
eyes from the glaciers. The few words which they now 
and then exchanged were said in low tones, as if they sat 
in a temple, and not at sea on a swaying vessel. 

Ingolf and Hjor-Leif had long sat silent side by side, 
inspecting the land with keen eyes. Between a pro- 
jecting point a long way to the east, and another far 
to the west, there stretched a flat, unbroken coast-line, 


286 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

distinctly marked by a white edge of rolling surf. 

“ It will be difficult to land here,” concluded Leif at 
last, in a slightly hard and irritated tone. “ Also, it 
seems as if most of the land nearest the shore is barren 
sand.” 

“ There are enough landing-places by the points,” 
Ingolf answered quietly, “ and behind the sands the 
land may be good and fertile, even close up to the 
glaciers. We saw that on the eastern side last sum- 
mer.” 

Ingolf was in secret rather disappointed that they 
had not found the Svanefjords again. But he did not 
speak about it. It was not possible to look for them 
now. At present, the great thing was to get on land as 
quickly as possible, and almost anywhere, so that the 
men and animals could have a good rest and recover. 

The sworn brothers had agreed that they must settle 
for the summer and the coming winter on the spot 
where they landed. Afterwards they might look out 
for a permanent residence. Ingolf had very decided 
views with regard to the choice of a dwelling-place. 
These views, however, he had not yet confided to Hjor- 
Leif, nor to any one else. The matter concerned the 
gods, and in all that concerned them his brother’s at- 
titude was a foregone conclusion. Hjor-Leif, on his 
part, only thought of finding a pleasant and fertile 
spot, preferably by the sea, and protected by the moun- 
tains, where he could feel himself at home and be com- 
fortable. 

For a long time they sat in silence, each deep in 
thought. Ingolf reflected how he had best communi- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 287 
cate his plan to Hjor-Leif. He saw at once that it 
was no good to be silent about it longer. For already, 
before they departed from here, it must be put into 
execution. He sat and felt rather perplexed inwardly, 
and could not find words. 

At that moment Hjor-Leif was sitting and reflecting 
over an experience which he had had the previous night. 
He had lain asleep in his bearskin bag while his old 
headman took charge of the tiller. Suddenly he 
started up from sleep, having certainly dreamt of some- 
thing or other he could not remember, and as he did 
so he collided with a man who must have been stooping 
over him. It was one of his Irish serfs, Duftak, a man 
whose evil eye had followed him since he once in wrath 
had stretched him on the ground with a well-deserved 
blow. Hjor-Leif was not certain, but it seemed to 
him that the serf had thrown something or other which 
he had in his hand overboard, just as he had stumbled 
against him and stood opposite him. He thought he 
had heard a little splash as when a hard object strikes 
the water. But he was by no means certain of the 
matter, and neither the serf’s eyes nor his behaviour 
had betrayed anything. He had asked him what he was 
doing here, and it seemed that he had come to look after 
a roll of rope which lay close by. Hjor-Leif had had 
his thoughts occupied the whole day by this occurrence. 
He had already observed for a long time that the serf’s 
eyes followed Helga wherever she went and stood, with 
an evil and at the same time covetous look. He could 
not understand why he had not already thrown the 
serf overboard, and why he did not intend to do so. 


288 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
He was quite sure that it was not from fear, although 
there seemed to be a peculiar understanding among 
his Irish serfs. It was rather because he could not 
do without serfs, and because if he killed one of them 
it would be safest to kill them all. 

At length Leif unwillingly shook these thoughts off, 
and asked curtly : 44 We shall sail southward, I sup- 

pose, when the wind gets up again? ” 

Ingolf was silent. It was certainly about an equal 
distance to the two points, and he had a very great 
desire to seek a landing-place near the more easterly 
of the two. 

Instead of giving a direct answer, he began cau- 
tiously : 44 I have thought, brother, that I for my part 

will let the gods decide where I should settle in this 
new land.” 

Leif, whose temper at the moment was a little off its 
balance because of the incident with the serf, gave a 
hard laugh: 44 How will you go about it?” 

Ingolf pointed to the pillars of his high-seat, which 
lay lashed together with strong skin straps above a 
pile amidships. 

44 I will throw the pillars of my high-seat overboard. 
Wherever they drift to land, I will settle.” 

44 Even if they drift to land in the middle of the 
sands here?” asked Hjor-Leif incredulously and a 
little scornfully. 

“ The gods will know how to find the place where it 
will be best for me and my family to settle,” answered 
Ingolf, undisturbed. 44 1 lay with confidence the choice 
of a dwelling in their hand.” 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 289 

Hjor-Leif was silent for a long time. There was a 
hard and pitiless line round his large mouth. There 
was Ingolf again with his cursed gods! At last he 
spoke, without looking at anything : “ Instead, then, 

of our choosing a place for ourselves where the earth 
is fertile and luxuriant we are to settle wherever it 
pleases the wind and current to wash up a pair of dead 
planks on shore.” 

He talked himself into a bad temper. And he wound 
up bitterly : “ We shall hardly be neighbours, then, 

brother ! ” 

Ingolf sprang up from his place. He was on the 
point of giving an angry answer when he remembered 
suddenly a snowy day when he and Hjor-Leif had 
ridden alone over a desolate heath. He shut his lips 
tightly, and stood for a while silent, leaning against 
the tiller. In his eyes there was a seeking look which 
wandered in perplexity over the water. The sun’s 
glimmer dazzled his eyes. He could not find a word 
kind and cautious enough to answer with. But his 
resolve stood immovably firm. Suddenly he collected 
himself, and, calling a couple of his men, bade them 
take the high-seat pillars down from the pile and lay 
them on the gunwale. So he stood for a little and let 
his hands glide carefully over the age-browned wood. 

Hjor-Leif sat watching with a hard, evil look in his 
grey eyes. Cautiously Ingolf let the pillars glide over- 
board. He remained standing, and followed them with 
his eyes as they lay there floating on the bright, oily 
water. Hjor-Leif could only see his back. There was 
an air of decision and resolve about that back which 


290 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
irritated him still further. Hallveig and Helga had 
followed the conversation, and now sat silent and an- 
xious, not daring to look at each other. Helga did not 
at all reflect which of the two was more in the right. 
She was simply troubled. In her gentle mind there 
rose a strange, impotent fear which made her heart 
beat heavily and painfully. 

Hallveig, on the other hand, was at first in her in- 
most heart on the point of justifying Hjor-Leif. At 
the first moment it appeared to her that one’s own 
eyes’ choice of a dwelling could always be as good as 
that of blind gods, nay, really much safer. But when 
she had sat for a while with her firm, open gaze fixed 
on Ingolf’s back, a change took place in her mind. 
The air of security and assurance which was about her 
husband’s whole person, and which his back just now 
so distinctly expressed, had an unconscious effect upon 
her. She understood all of a sudden that it was just 
this sign from the gods which was needed in order to 
attach her husband’s heart firmly and unbreakably to 
his new home. There, where the pillars of his high- 
seat drifted on shore, Ingolf would feel himself at home 
with all his soul and in spite of reason. The gods’ 
choice of the place would give his strength and will the 
firm ground without which, in spite of all his strength, 
he could not thrive. On a spot so chosen Ingolf would 
force happiness and prosperity to dwell in the face of 
every imaginable difficulty. For in alliance with his 
gods he was invincible. 

Hallveig sat there and became assured and peaceful 
in mind. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 291 

She understood that it was from an unwaveringly 
sure and wise instinct that Ingolf acted when he cast 
the pillars overboard. It was of vital importance to 
him to feel himself in covenant with his gods and in 
possession of their favour. 

Hallveig stooped over her little boy and kissed him on 
the forehead, and remained sitting for a while with 
bowed head, lest any should see she had tears in her 
eyes. 

With beating heart Ingolf stood and watched his 
treasured pillars tossed by the billows, lightly, aimlessly, 
as though they were ordinary pieces of driftwood. It 
was not without severe internal conflicts that he had 
resolved to deliver his dearest possession to the power 
of the sea. But here life was at stake. It was not 
only a matter of finding a place where his cattle could 
graze and his house stand, but of finding exactly that 
place which the gods willed to grant him and his family. 
The place where they could know he would stay for the 
future. The place where his and his family’s happiness 
and prosperity were not only under his but under their 
care and responsibility. 

When Ingolf had stood for a long time watching the 
pillars, which gradually drifted astern in an easterly 
direction, his displeasure towards his brother disap- 
peared. He turned slowly, and, with a peculiar smile 
upon his young face towards the others, went quietly 
and seated himself by the side of Hjor-Leif. 

“ What do you think of our choosing the eastern 
point as a landing-place, brother? ” he asked in a quiet 
and friendly tone. 


292 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

The question irritated Leif. There was no talk of 
choice; it was merely a question where a piece of drift- 
wood should decide their landing. 

66 1 have already for my part chosen the west,” he 
answered firmly, and at the same time as quietly as he 
could, and not without a certain satisfaction at the 
effect of his words. 

But it was not only on Ingolf that Leif’s answer had 
the effect of a well-directed blow. Both Hallveig and 
Helga felt that here was something evil and dangerous 
going on. Quite involuntarily Helga called Hjor- 
Leif’s name in a supplicating tone. She had no idea 
of wishing to influence him in the least degree. She 
knew him, and was aware that it was hopeless. The 
word fell like a prayer from her gentle and anxious 
soul. In one hot wave the blood mounted to Hj or- 
Leif’s head when he heard Helga’s voice. “ You can 
remain with your brother, since you prefer that to fol- 
lowing me.” The bitter words leapt from his mouth. 
Helga broke down in a heavy and despairing fit of 
weeping. Leif sat motionless, and apparently un- 
moved. But in his breast there tore and tugged a 
fierce and intolerable pain which was not far from mak- 
ing him powerless. It was not at all, as it now ap- 
peared, a sudden whim which caused him not to wish 
to have Helga on board again. It was the scene by 
night with the serf, Duftak, which from the beginning 
had given rise to the thought in him that Helga would 
be really safer on Ingolf’s ship. Some vague and 
groundless presentiment or other, which made him still 
more sensitive and impatient, told him that there was 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 293 
danger in the journey for him and Helga. It was 
nothing but pure tenderness for Helga which made him 
resolve that they should part before they were all quite 
on shore. This time he had not thought of parting 
from Ingolf. But in a moment Hjor-Leif was com- 
pletely in the power of his restless temperament which, 
as so often before, distorted his words and actions and 
drove him to hasty resolves. To separate from the 
others, and seek another landing-place, with the pros- 
pect perhaps of not seeing them for a whole year, was 
for him a much greater trial than for Ingolf, to whose 
equable temperament a year’s separation contained 
nothing unthinkable or alarming. Hjor-Leif could 
really not imagine how he could hold out merely a 
month, much less a whole year, without them. 

And if he now chose to land in another place than 
Ingolf, each for the present would have to remain where 
he landed. But it was completely impossible for him to 
expose his dependence and pain at parting. He could 
neither humble himself nor subdue his spirit so far as 
to enable them to discuss matters reasonably. As soon 
as the fateful words were out of his mouth he was help- 
lessly in their power. 

While thoughts and feelings were rushing like violent 
streams through Hjor-Leif’s lacerated soul, Ingolf had 
already succeeded in reviewing the matter reasonably. 
In separation there was the advantage that the one who 
first found a landing-place could, by kindling a fire on 
his point, inform the other, who perhaps would be seek- 
ing a landing-place in vain, where he could look for one. 
Ingolf, with a seaman’s practised eye, had long before 


294 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

discovered that the coast here was difficult, not to say 
impossible to land on. It confronted the open sea. 
The heavy swells, which were certainly almost always 
prevalent here, would shatter any ship that tried to 
land on the sands. It was by no means unlikely that 
the character of the coast near the two points might 
be equally difficult. And it was impossible to know if 
the coast east or south of the points was better. Since 
Leif now wished it, Ingolf had for his part nothing 
agains* their separation, for some days or for a year, 
as it might happen. He therefore quietly proposed 
that whoever first succeeded in landing should kindle 
a fire on his point as a signal to the other. The 
latter could then make for that place, if he had not 
found another harbour before, or in the contrary case 
might answer with a fire on his point. 

Hjor-Leif briefly agreed to this arrangement. It was 
he who had settled that they should separate, and yet 
it was a severe disappointment to him that it was now 
finally decided on. “ I may come southward in the 
spring, if I have not by that time found my pillars,” 
said Ingolf quietly, when the matter of the fires had 
been settled. “ But if I should not come, I will send 
you a messenger, if I have not heard from you before.” 

Hjor-Leif nodded curtly. It was incomprehensible 
to him that Ingolf could sit there and talk so quietly, as 
if nothing had happened between them and everything 
was all right. 

“ If you find my pillars,” Ingolf continued, with the 
same immovable calm, “ take good care of them, and 
let me know of the discovery as soon as possible.” 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 295 
Hjor-Leif made no answer. Internally he swore that 
if he had the luck to find the infernal pillars it would 
be a joy to him to let the fire devour them. 

All conversation gradually died out among the four 
persons who sat there, swinging on the sea, swayed by 
the balance of fate, each mind filled with its character- 
istic inner thoughts, peace or unrest, wearing pain or 
assured contentment — sat there in the grip of their 
own souls and of blind powers, while the brilliant spring 
day glided into a light, soft night. 

The red sun-gold over the sea in the west faded and 
died away into other and colder colours. The world 
was new and strange, and charged with presentiment 
as always on the boundary between day and night. 
The four sat there, and let the day go and night come 
over their peaceful or irritated silence. Ingolf’s little 
boy, Thorsten, slept quietly in his mother’s bosom. 
All around was quiet. Peace was there for whomso- 
ever had a mind to receive it. The brothers sat side 
by side, yet each in his own world. Ingolf, as always, 
kept his mind collected, was his natural self, and knew 
it. Just as he ate what nourished his body of the 
good things of sea and earth, so his mind absorbed 
whatever benefited him from the changing moods of day 
and night, sea and heaven and earth. Everything else 
remained lying untouched and harmless outside the 
tightly closed circle of his mind. 

With Hjor-Leif it was otherwise. He had no collec- 
tedness in his mind. Every kind of experience or mood 
which approached him was seized by the tentacles of his 
restless heart. Evil and good, health and injury — his 


296 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
hungry nature swallowed and satiated itself with all, 
without any other result than merely to increase his 
burning desire for something — a condition or an ex- 
perience — he knew no name for it. In a measure he 
was himself just as Ingolf was. But his self was 
volatile and difficult to grasp. It died away in grief 
and gladness, as though it were a part of them. 

Thus the night passed. And when day again bor- 
dered the east, it was folowed by a gentle breeze from 
the sea which could be used for sailing equally west- 
ward or eastward. 

Hjor-Leif rose and heaved a heavy sigh in the cool 
morning air. His last hope: A stiff breeze from the 
west, which would oblige him to follow his brother, was 
gone. Helga and Ingolf both rose with Hjor-Leif. 
Helga went to him, put her arm round his neck, and 
pressed close to him. No prayer came from her lips, 
but her whole soul was a prayer. 

Hjor-Leif examined his mind and found a fear there 
— some misty foreboding of impending disaster, which 
determined him to stand firm, to be hard both towards 
himself and towards her. 

He responded to her caress, but not in the whole- 
hearted way which would allow him to forget his words 
and revoke his determination not to let her follow him. 
There was a distinct air of separation in his kiss and in 
the gentle passing of his hand over her luxuriant fair 
hair. 

So Helga gave up her hope and submitted silently to 
his will, as she had always done. 

Hjor-Leif silently gave Hallveig his hand in farewell. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 297 
She looked firmly and inquiringly at him, and pressed his 
hand silently. There was something about Hjor-Leif, 
the man who was so unlike Ingolf, and whom she did 
not understand, that stirred something in her heart. 

When he had left her, she suddenly, called after him : 
“ Good-bye, Hjor-Leif, till we meet again. We shall 
take good care of Helga.” 

Hjor-Leif turned towards her with a forced and wry 
smile on his irregular features — a smile which betrayed 
such a pathetic and involuntary gratitude that, imme- 
diately after he had turned and gone, Helga fell into 
Hallveig’s arms, and both wept. They had suddenly 
divined, with the sure instinct of women, that it was 
out of tenderness and love that Hjor-Leif had let Helga 
remain behind. There was much in the whole sudden 
arrangement which they did not understand, but this 
they did. 

Ingolf followed Hjor-Leif to the gunwale amidships. 
The men were engaged in drawing the ships close to- 
gether with boat-hooks. The distance between them 
had gradually become so small that he could soon 
spring over into his own ship. 

“ I do not rightly understand why you let Helga 
remain behind,” Ingolf said at last, when Hjor-Leif 
already had his foot on the gunwale. 

Hjor-Leif paused, and stood still a little, without 
meeting Ingolf’s searching look. “ I cannot give you 
any reason,” he answered at last, and the hardness and 
gruffness in his voice spoke of feelings of quite another 
sort in his heart, “ except that in my judgment it is the 
best for her.” 


298 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Ingolf’s whole bearing clearly showed that the answer 
did not satisfy him. 

Hjor-Leif became irritated. “ I have ten serfs and 
only ten freemen,” he continued in a firm and rather 
annoyed tone, for he did not like, not only before 
Ingolf, but also before himself, to clothe his forebod- 
ings in such a distinct shape. “ I cannot always be at 
hand, and the serfs are not reliable. I may fall sick 
and misfortune come upon us. Many things may hap- 
pen. Are you satisfied? ” 

Hjor-Leif’s tone was still equally hard and unyield- 
ing. But Ingolf had seen through him, and smilingly 
reached him his hand. Hjor-Leif squeezed it with his 
iron claw so that it hurt, and stood meanwhile with 
averted face; his features worked visibly, and he bit 
his lip till the blood came. Hastily he let go of Ingolf’s 
hand, and at the same moment sprang into his own 
ship. 

Immediately afterwards Ingolf heard his voice from 
it. It was cuttingly sharp, and rose higher and 
higher in a torrent of words. It soon appeared that 
Hjor-Leif had quickly succeeded in putting life into 
his men. Soon after, his ship, with sail hoisted, glided 
away before the light breeze. 

Ingolf stood and thought that such a lonely year 
might do Hjor-Leif good. He would be a different 
man the next time they saw him. Ingolf only lent a 
momentary hearing to the voice of a strange wounded 
and groundless sense of loss in his soul. Quietly he 
turned round, roused his tired men mildly, and bade 
them hoist sail and make the vessel clear. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 299 

As early as the next night Hjor-Leif saw a fire shine 
from Ingolf’s point. So Ingolf was already on land, 
and everything was right there. Hjor-Leif had not 
fared so well. The westerly breeze he had so strongly 
desired had come when he had no more use for it. It 
had come too late, and very inopportunely. After 
forty-eight hours he lay here pitching in the choppy 
seas, tacking as well as he could without getting much 
nearer his object. There was not a drop of fresh 
water on board. The Irish serfs had discovered how to 
knead meal and butter into a mess they called mzntak, 
and declared that it was a food one did not get thirsty 
by eating. None the less, all were suffering with thirst, 
and the animals were in a miserable condition, unable to 
swallow a straw of the hay they had brought with them. 
The mintaJc quickly fermented, and the whole mass had 
to be thrown overboard. 

It was only Hjor-Leif’s wretched and indomitable 
obstinacy which prevented him from taking advantage 
of the wind and quickly running his ship to Ingolf’s 
point. By doing so all his sufferings would have been 
got rid of at once. It needed only a little resolution, 
a slight change of mind. The wind was there, the 
light was there. The fire gleamed and beckoned. All 
was well so far. The only difficulty was that the de- 
ciding little possibility was wanting — the possibility 
of Hjor-Leif’s bending his mind the little bit that was 
necessary — the possibility of giving way. In Hjor- 
Leif’s volatile soul there towered a steep rock. He 
would see his animals perish of hunger and thirst, his 
crew perish one by one, and himself die by any death 


300 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
whatever rather than turn his vessel and use the favour- 
able wind. 

At last, on the evening of the third day, a little rain 
fell, and Hjor-Leif succeeded in collecting some water 
in the outspread sail. That refreshed both men and 
animals. Not till four days after Ingolf had kindled 
his fire did he see a fire burning in answer on Hjor-Leif’s 
point. When he told Helga that, she went up on the 
point, sat by herself, and stared fixedly at the faint red 
light, sometimes hardly visible, far to the south-west. 
There she remained sitting for two days and nights, 
as long as Hjor-Leif kept up his fire in order to be 
sure that it should be seen. 

Ingolf and Hallveig had at last begun to be anxious 
for Helga, for she ate nothing, did not sleep, and hardly 
answered when they spoke to her. 

But when after these two days spent up there on 
the point she returned to the tents, she was herself 
again, and had recovered her old self-command. There 
was nothing to show either Ingolf or Hallveig that she 
carried about a burning sense of bereavement. Neither 
did they know that she lay whole and half nights sleep- 
less, breathing in fancy the rich, delicious scent of pine 
trees. 


VII 

For the second time in his life Hjor-Leif lost his 
spirits completely. After closer reflection he found his 
lonely situation so meaningless and unjust, so devoid of 
all reconciling elements such as, for example, a pros- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 301 

pect of adventures or opportunity for exploits — in 
brief, so utterly irrational, that he involuntarily began 
to show his teeth at existence by drowning himself in 
perpetual melancholy, only now and then interrupted 
by isolated attacks of ill-temper. 

The days encountered him heavily and sulkily. It 
seemed as if all their endeavours were directed to show 
him in earnest how empty and tedious and intolerable 
they could be, if they seriously set about it. The 
bright, cloudless summer days sneered at him when they 
met him with ice-cold scornful light from sunrise to 
sunset. Grey and rainy days, on the other hand, 
showed him without disguise their dull side. Hjor- 
Leif could not come to an agreement with himself which 
of the two kinds of days was really the more intolerable. 
They were all alike impossible. The one point he was 
clear about with regard to the days was that he had 
without doubt still the worst remaining. He cursed 
them with oaths which were powerful both in length and 
strength, and derived from an inexhaustible supply. 
But they were no help — not even momentarily. In 
the battle with the days he suffered one defeat after 
another; they were far stronger than he. They were 
invincible. And they possessed, although he daily ex- 
perienced that, in spite of all, they did pass, a peculiar- 
ity of appearing endless, which deprived him of all hope. 

Hjor-Leif tried in every way to put a little meaning 
into them. 

He set his freemen to build a winter dwelling, a 
house nineteen fathoms long. It was to contain them 
all, together with their wives. He had only taken 


302 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

young, newly married people with him from Norway, 
with the single exception of his old headman. Hjor- 
Leif did what he could to take a little interest in the 
work. But it was only self-deception. The days did 
not for a moment let go their wild-beast clutch on his 
neck. 

He set the serfs to build a house eighteen fathoms 
long, and bullied them till they quailed and shivered 
and fell into helpless embarrassment merely at the sight 
of him. Yes, he instilled a wholesome terror into the 
Irish serfs. They slunk about, and hardly knew 
whether to walk upright or on all fours. And they had 
no eyes — at any rate, there seemed no more any sight 
in their eyes. Regarding them, he felt sure that he 
had made them harmless for ever. But it brought him 
no comfort either to treat them like dogs or to realize 
their harmlessness. That did not bring a spark of his 
spirits back. There was nothing to rouse them in that 
quarter. 

One of the items in Hjor-Leif’s despairing and hope- 
less struggle with the days was going along the shore 
and choosing driftwood for his buildings. When he 
found a stout, solid plank, he marked it with a stroke 
of his ax; then he bade the serfs find the planks so 
marked, and bring them home. 

Sometimes in these wanderings, Hjor-Leif found him- 
self standing and hewing wildly and meaninglessly at a 
plank, as though his life depended on cutting it into a 
plaything for the winds. Whenever he awoke from 
such an attack of frenzy he looked round him with a 
shamefaced expression, and began eagerly, with a 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 303 

strong sense of humiliation, to efface the traces of it, 
watched by the evil eye of a hostile day. 

Hj or-Leif had one hope, and only one. His longing, 
strongly reinforced by his despair, had treated with the 
rocky pride of his soul, and the result was a reason- 
able agreement. 

Therefore he went everywhere and searched for In- 
golf’s high-seat pillars. Not in order to do away with 
them by means of fire, but to get an excuse for seeking 
Ingolf at once, and so obtaining an honourable and ac- 
ceptable victory over all that pained and plagued him. 
Hj or-Leif wanted to see what the day would look like 
when by finding the pillars he was able to escape from 
his wretchedness with a bound. 

This hope sustained him. But day after day passed 
without his finding the pillars. Not even the sea and 
tides were friendly disposed towards him. He talked 
in a loud voice with the sea, and reminded it of all the 
honourable bouts they had had with each other. But 
either the sea did not hear or would not recognize him. 
It had perhaps become hostile towards him, like every- 
thing else in heaven and earth. Hj or-Leif had been as 
far eastward along the coast as the impassible glacier 
streams would let him go. Now he turned westward. 
He took food with him, and remained away four days 
and nights. During his expedition he came to know 
a new part of the country which he liked, and where he 
could well imagine himself settling. 

Below the green mountains, which first in a steep as- 
cent and then with a more gradual incline rose towards 
the Tdiite glacier which with its two domes reminded 


304 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

one of a female giant’s breasts, the low land stretched 
with fertile meadows and picturesque bush-covered 
valleys and luxuriant pastures towards the shining sea. 
In the south-west green precipitous isles rose from the 
sea. Hjor-Leif gave the mountains names after these 
islands, which simultaneously limited and enriched the 
view, and called them Island-mountains. The western 
dome of the glacier he named the Island-mountains’ 
Glacier; the eastern he had already, after a more east- 
ern district, baptized Myrdals-Glacier. Hjor-Leif did 
not turn round, for he saw the land open into a wide 
bay towards the west. He examined the shore outside 
the Island-mountains and Myrdal very closely. It was 
a great' disappointment to him that the pillars had not 
drifted on shore here. 

Hjor-Leif returned home from this excursion still 
more taciturn and depressed than he had started. 
Wearing unrest received him with open arms every 
morning and did not release him from its evil embrace 
till sleep at night had pity on him. 

He set some of his men to get in hay, others he made 
go out fishing, the rest he kept occupied with the houses. 
It was an insignificant alleviation of his trouble to see 
his men busily occupied. For himself he had no pa- 
tience for anything. On the walks which he now and 
then took along the coast to assure himself if the pillars 
had not drifted on shore in his immediate neighbour- 
hood, he was no more accompanied by even the small- 
est hope. 

During these walks Helga was always in his mind. 
But not openly and consciously — he scarcely had pa- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 305 
tience enough to think of her in that way. No, secretly 
and hidden away she lived in his mind. Through mem- 
ories and reminiscences she was near to him, without his 
being obliged to face the fact that they were divided 
from each other by a long distance and a sea of days, 
and that this separation was due to a stupid and cer- 
tainly quite groundless foreboding. He carried these 
memories about very tenderly and cautiously, without 
any intention of letting them slip quite out of the fog 
of unconsciousness. As a man dying of thirst sips dew, 
he cheated himself into a reminiscent happiness. It 
was a dangerous proceeding. For if he woke from 
the dream, his agony flung him on the ground in a pas- 
sion of tears, unworthy of a man, and which, more- 
over, brought no relief. 

Hjor-Leif became at last weary of the sea and shore. 
He turned his mind against them and made enemies 
again — evil emptiness and helpless melancholy — 
Nature’s immovable answer to all discontent. So 
Hjor-Leif became hostile to all things round him. 
The echo of his own mind met him everywhere and 
tortured him as only self-inflicted pain can torture. 

He extended his lonely wanderings to the wide- 
stretching pastures, overgrown with spreading coppice- 
wood, which reached from his point right up to the blue 
mountains. But also in this region he soon became 
homeless. His inner want of peace drove all peace 
around him away. 

When winter came, Hjor-Leif sat like a bear in his 
lair, alone with the fire and his half-share of the nine- 
teen-fathom-long house. It was uncomfortable near 


30 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

him. Therefore his men kept together in their end of 
the house, even though no fire burned there. They 
were newly married, and felt neither cold nor dull. 

The serfs slunk in now and then, by twos, with fuel 
for the fire. They shivered, and came hurriedly away 
from their task, even though Hjor-Leif sat with 
his head in his hands and did not look at them 
at all. 

Hjor-Leif was poor now. He was so poor that he 
caught himself longing for the break in the evening’s 
brooding silence, which the serf’s coming caused. So 
poor, that in order not to betray his poverty he showed 
himself perverse and ungracious towards his old head- 
man, when the latter once overcame his embarrassment 
and, out of devotion and sympathy, sat with him one 
evening. Either he was silent with the old man in his 
own comfortlessness, or he pained him with scornful 
words and malicious laughter. The old man could not 
understand how Hjor-Leif had lost all his good temper 
and indomitable spirits, unless the evil spirits of this 
strange land had deprived him of them. He could not 
endure this land where Hjor-Leif, his favourite, had 
neither living nor dead foes to fight with. There were 
plenty of wizards and goblins here, as he had himself ex- 
perienced. There was an unearthly life in the rocks 
and heights. But these were creatures without value 
for a man eager for battle. One could not attack them 
weapon in hand. The sacred iron could only protect 
one against them, and keep them out of the house. 

Hjor-Leif’s old headman fought bravely with his fear 
£ild discomfort for an obviously bewitched man. But 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 307 
there came an end, and he also gave up Hjor-Leif and 
let him sit alone by the fire. 

For days and nights together the storm and hail beat 
on the house with howlings and threatening hootings. 
The winter days were often only an indistinct glimmer. 
And in the uncanny winter night all evil spirits were 
loose. 

Hjor-Leif sat through the long evenings in his bitter- 
ness alone by the fire. And even the fire, his only 
friend in the wintry emptiness, now showed fits of en- 
mity, and spat out evil smoke which struck his breast 
like a tearing cough. 

Hjor-Leif sat most often with his face in his hands. 
By doing so he, as it were, shut himself into himself, 
and cheated in a measure the evil powers in him and 
round him. But there was a danger in thus sitting 
hugging his pain. Solitude used the opportunity to 
whisper words of madness in his ear. And often Hjor- 
Leif was near forgetting himself, and beginning to 
listen to its alluring, unbridled talk. 

But then sleep came, and saved him, and gave him 
some hours’ forgetfulness. A forgetfulness which, how- 
ever short it was, armed him for the morrow’s encoun- 
ter with a hostile, desolate, and lonely day. 


VIII 

Now there is this to be told of Ingolf, that when he 
had found a practicable harbour, and unloaded his ship 
and drawn it on land, he set his men immediately to 


308 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

work at building winter dwellings for men and animals. 

He himself rode about on horseback, followed by a 
young serf, Vifel, who had grown up in his father’s 
house, and whom he valued greatly. He examined the 
district, and took long rides along the shore to look for 
the pillars of his high-seat. He made use of his oppor- 
tunities, and was satisfied. The district suited him in 
many ways. From his point he commanded a wide view 
eastward and westward along the coast — the most ex- 
tensive view he remembered to have seen. 

Some distance inland, exactly opposite the point, 
divided from it by luxuriant pasture-land, there rose a 
steep, high mountain. On both sides of it the circle of 
mountains retired, on the south-west side in a wide curve. 
Behind this mountain rose the glacier, a gigantic pile of 
ice glittering white in the distance, which sent wrinkled 
feelers down all the ravines as if to taste the lowland. 
Remarkably enough, no cold emanated from this huge 
mass of ice ; on the contrary, it seemed to warm the air, 
perhaps by attracting all the bad weather and cold to its 
far summit, which was only seldom visible. On both 
sides of the point there stretched barren sand along the 
coast intersected by countless glacier streams. These 
sands in some places spread themselves inland till they 
met the edge of the glacier. But the wide-stretching 
pasture-land along the mountains, which this barren 
sand surrounded, was of a peculiarly rich fertility. 
There was abundance of coppice-wood, which in places 
grew close up to the glacier and presented a singular 
appearance. The cattle throve well here. The air was 
full of warm moisture, and was suitable for grass and 


3°9 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 
cattle and men. Ingolf had to admit that the summer 
was better and the soil more luxuriant here than in the 
Svanefjords. At the same time, he wished his pillars 
would drift ashore in the Svanefjords. And in this 
Hallveig was one with him. 

Secretly he derived not a little hope from the circum- 
stance that the pillars had apparently taken an east- 
ward direction when he saw them drift away from the 
ship. Who could say ? — perhaps it was to the Svane- 
f j ords ! He did not dare to wish anything in that way ; 
it was for Odin to decide it. And it would be presump- 
tuous of him to wish to instruct or to influence the One- 
eyed with the ravens. But many things pass through 
one’s thoughts which one cannot control. Odin must 
know that and would excuse it. 

Ingolf endured the suspense for two months. Then 
he prepared for a long expedition with his serf, Vifel. 
Hallveig did not like this journey. Both Ingolf and his 
men had told her so much about the impassable glacier 
streams. Ingolf, however, quieted her by promising to 
show all possible caution. But he wished to go and 
look for himself in the Svanefjords. 

Ingolf and his serf rode over the sand-dunes. On 
each sand-hill sat a gull. Full of an injured sense of 
proprietorship, the birds sat there and followed silently 
with an inscrutable look these strange animals who 
brought disturbance into the landscape. These sands 
were intersected by a countless number of powerful 
glacier streams. But fortunately the glacier proved 
passable in that part, so that Ingolf and his companion 
succeeded in circumventing the rivers in that way. 


310 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

On the evening of the second day they were again 
stopped by a glacier stream as broad as a fjord, and 
with a treacherous bottom of fine sand. It traversed 
the district Ingolf and Leif had penetrated on their ex- 
pedition southward from the Svanefjords the previous 
summer. Ingolf tried to circumvent it in the same way 
as he had the other river. But here the glacier was so 
full of deep crevasses along and across its course, that 
after many vain attempts he had to give it up. There 
was nothing for it but to turn round and put off the 
examination of the coast till the winter had bridged with 
ice the impassable rivers. 

The remainder of the summer passed in winter prepa- 
rations of all kinds. There were plenty of things to 
take in hand and look after. 

Ingolf kept an eye on his sister, Helga, and showed 
her great friendliness in his words and behaviour. He 
could not exactly ascertain the real state of her feelings. 
She was quiet as ever, and all smiles and good-humour. 
She played with the boy, helped Hallveig, and there was 
apparently nothing in the least the matter with her 
spirits. But Ingolf had now and then, early in the 
morning, before any one else was up, surprised her 
standing staring with a long look towards the distant 
mountains that showed bluish in the south-west. In 
that direction lay Hjor-Leif’s point, although so far 
away that it could not be discerned. It cut Ingolf to 
the heart to see his sister stand gazing so — her face 
was so unusually pale in the mornings, and her blue eyes 
darker than at other times, as though shadowed by a 
twilight below them. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 311 
He had been many times on the point of telling her 
about the last words he had exchanged with Leif. For 
he knew that she was not aware of Hjor-Leif’s real 
reason for letting her remain behind with himself and 
Hallveig, and had no idea what she thought about it. 
But on further reflection he gave up the thought of tell- 
ing her every time. Perhaps by doing so he would only 
cause her unnecessary anxiety and sorrow. She would 
certainly hardly be so quiet as now, if she were seriously 
anxious for Hjor-Leif. Best not to interfere with her 
thoughts. For his own part, Ingolf was not for an 
instant afraid of anything happening to Hjor-Leif, 
though he agreed with him that it was best not to ex- 
pose Helga to the results of any conspiracy among the 
serfs, which he might well have reason to fear. But In- 
golf knew Hjor-Leif. Even if his brother had been 
alone with the ten seditious serfs he would not have felt 
anxious for him. Hjor-Leif was on the watch, and he 
had successfully managed worse situations. 

The winter began with slight frost and much snow. 
It was past Yuletide before the rivers were frozen. 

As soon as possible, Ingolf equipped Vifel and an- 
other of his serfs, named Karle, and sent them eastward 
along the coast with orders to examine closely every 
creek and every promontory, and not to return till they 
had inspected both Svanefjords, except in the event of 
their finding the pillars before. 

The serfs experienced wretched weather, with snow- 
storms and intense frost. They remained away for two 
weeks, and returned hungry and weary. They had 
examined the coast-line as far as north of the Svane- 


312 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

fjords, but seen nothing of the pillars anywhere. When 
they had informed Ingolf, he heaved a deep sigh and 
gave up the Svanefjords. 

He allowed the serfs time to rest and recover after 
their severe experience. Then he ordered them to get 
ready again. This time he gave them horses and seni 
<diem westward along the coast. He enjoined them not 
to return till they had found Hjor-Leif. If they hai 
not found the pillars before they met him they were to 
tell Hjor-Leif to come westward with his men and cattle 
as soon as summer was in the air and a sea-passage was 
safe. 

But spring came this time earlier than it was ex- 
pected. Already in the night before the serfs started, 
a warm and strong south-west wind began to melt the 
snows and melt the ice that covered the rivers. The 
serfs only succeeded in passing the nearest rivers on ice. 
By the second day they could neither get forward nor 
backward by reason of furious rivers which carried 
huge volumes of muddy water and great blocks of ice. 
But they had to push on, and did so with the horses’ 
help, although they often wasted days in finding a ford, 
and sometimes had to let themselves be dragged through 
the water, hanging on to the horses’ tails or manes. It 
was the worst journey that Vifel and Karle had ever 
been out on, and it was only due to Vifel’s endurance 
and fidelity that they went forward and escaped with 
their lives. On the way they met men — Irish monks 
— who here far inland had built a temple with a brazen 
voice which shook the air. The monks questioned them, 
and seemed displeased with what they had to narrate. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 313 
They did not show them much friendliness. But Vifel 
and Karle were eternally thankful for merely escaping 
with life from these strange men who were in covenant 
with a god, the sound of whose voice alone cast them 
terror-struck to the earth. 

At last the serfs reached Hjor-Leif’s point. They 
had been fourteen days on the journey. They found 
the houses empty and the place forsaken. They went 
down to the shore and found the ship. The boats, on 
the other hand, were gone. Not the slightest sign of 
life was visible anywhere. 


IX 

Hjor-Leif saw the winter come to an end at last. 
He lay one night and heard the tone of the wind change. 
He knew the eager and implacable voice of the south-east 
wind. It did not surprise him then to hear a dripping 
indoors and out. 

His heart began to beat a little as he lay there. 
But he lay still, did not jump from his bed, did not run 
to salute the spring and bid its warm wind take the bad 
weather from him, as in other circumstances he would 
have done. There was not much left of Hjor-Leif’s 
strength now. He did not awake with the spring. 
Generally he was accustomed to avoid the house when 
spring had first come. But this time he remained 
within, sick in mind, and without power to shake off the 
burden of winter and his bereavement. He remained 
sitting indoors while the young year awoke the earth 


3H THE SWORN BROTHERS 

from winter’s sleep, without paying attention to it. 
That was not like Hjor-Leif. Indeed, it was so unlike 
him, that his men avoided each other’s looks and did not 
speak about him. He got out of his bed each morning 
with a sigh, clothed himself wearily, and went slowly 
and sluggishly out to see how far the spring was ad- 
vanced, and if the weather held. If it was bright he 
went up on the point and looked eastward over the land 
and over the sea. Then he went home again, dragging 
his feet like an old man or an invalid, and wrapped 
himself in his solitude and waited. It was still too early 
in the year for Ingolf to be coming — Ingolf and Helga. 

He hardly dared to think of her name. The very 
thought scorched and burnt his wounded soul that by 
this separation which he had insisted on he had caused 
Helga fresh grief. His own sufferings were indeed 
bitterly deserved — that he had to acknowledge — but 
that did not make them any easier. The thought made 
the wilderness of his soul even more desolate. Self- 
caused, self-deserved, every torturing day, every sleep- 
forsaken night, every suffering, every whip-lash of long- 
ing, altogether self-caused, without reason and to no 
use. That was bad enough to think about. But it 
was worse with Helga — Helga who might have reason 
to believe that he had left her behind in cold blood, and 
to think that perhaps he looked forward without long- 
ing to seeing her again. The thought was so intolerable 
that at times it seemed as if his head would split and his 
heart stop beating. These and similar thoughts tor- 
tured Hjor-Leif, but he sat and let the tedious hours 
pass. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 315 

Outside, the spring winds raged, while he sat wdthin. 
The spring’s gladness found no way to his soul. His 
exhausted heart could not welcome the days in its em- 
brace and rejoice at the prospect of soon meeting 
Helga. 

Hjor-Leif used every opportunity of bullying the 
serfs. He heaped on them kicks and blows whenever 
the fancy took him, and often without cause. He hated 
these serfs, who crept before him like vermin, so dog- 
like and abject that they did not dare to show the 
glances of their eyes. His fear of their combining and 
attacking him and his men had long ago died out of his 
mind to the last spark, and it seemed to him now both 
ridiculous and incredible that he had ever cherished 
such a thought. These abject animals, these crook- 
backed creatures ! Their fault it was — all that he had 
had to suffer this year. And they should pay for it! 
To the end of their wretched days they should pay for 
it ! Blows they should have — blows and kicks. He 
would fill their currish hearts with never-appeased fear. 
He would not kill them; they should live and suffer. 
In all that concerned the serfs, Hjor-Leif was implac- 
able. He had succeeded in inspiring them with such 
terror that there was not a look in their eyes, nor speech 
in their tongue, save when they were alone and sure 
of not being seen or heard. 

As soon as the earth was released from the frost to a 
spade’s depth Hjor-Leif set his serfs to plough a piece 
of pasture-land west of the point. They had an ox to 
draw the plough. 

And now the serfs’ time had come. Duftak, who had 


3 1 6 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

many kicks and cuffs to avenge, had hatched a plan. 

The opportunity was ready to hand. 

When Duftak and another serf went off in the morn- 
ing with ox and plough, he gave the other serfs a signal. 
They had knives and clubs hidden here and there. Now 
these were produced and concealed in their rags. The 
serfs were ready. 

As soon as Hjor-Leif’s free men had gone into their 
morning meal, Duftak stabbed the ox with a knife in its 
neck and set out running home with the other serfs close 
on his heels. Breathlessly Duftak burst in to Hjor- 
Leif, and stammered, apparently in the greatest terror : 
“ A bear ! A bear ! ” 

The serf’s fear seemed quite genuine. Hjor-Leif 
seized him by the neck, shook him, and quickly learnt 
from him that a bear had come out of the wood and had 
killed the ox. 

Everything happened as Duftak had foreseen. 
Hjor-Leif let him go, strangely enough without the 
usual kick, shouted to his men, and bade them follow 
him and look for the bear, and scatter themselves well 
in the thickets, so that the beast should not escape. 
Then he seized his ax and spear and ran. 

Ah, this meant something for Hjor-Leif. His heart 
was again in its place, and beat gladly and quietly. 
The bear came as though sent by good fortune itself. 
His soul expanded with a great and happy sense of 
freedom. He sprang like a boy out of doors, and for- 
got in his haste to take his sword with him. 

Duftak only hesitated a brief moment — then he 
seized the sword and ran after Hjor-Leif. He had un- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 317 
dertaken to tackle him by himself alone, and the sword 
was better than his short knife. 

Everything happened as Duftak had calculated — 
while his men dispersed in the thicket, Hjor-Leif ran 
to the ox. Duftak had counted on this curiosity in 
his master. Pie knew that he rrmst see how the bear had 
treated the ox, before he began the pursuit. Hjor-Leif 
set off in long bounds, light at heart and untroubled. 
The old love of adventure had awakened in him. He 
was too much absorbed to notice that the serf was close 
at his heels. 

Hjor-Leif reached the ox, stopped and started, bent 
down over it, then slowly raised himself. His thoughts 
stood still for a moment in surprise. What was this? 
The ox had been stabbed. Was the story about the 
bear only a lie? He turned quietly and as though 
stupefied, and looked round him. 

Just opposite him stood Duftak, with Hjor-Leif’s 
sword lifted — the point quivered straight in front of 
his breast. 

The recollection of the monk’s saying flashed through 
Hjor-Leif’s mind, like a momentary weakness and ir- 
resolution. Then — before he knew it — the gold-in- 
laid blade of the sword flashed, and he collapsed with a 
chill sensation between his ribs — a strange, not uncom- 
fortable sensation, which, however, was immediately fol- 
lowed by a pang and a loud crash, in which earth and 
sky disappeared. 

As Hjor-Leif sank, a lightning thought reminded him 
that Helga was in safety. Ah, Helga was safe ! A dim 
consciousness that he had not suffered in vain settled 


3 1 8 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
like a faint smile on his large mouth. The blood 
poured steaming and gushing out of his neck. And so 
the world passed from him. . . . 

Hjor-Leif ha^ lived, and life had done with him. 
He had paid the price of life, as was meet and right. 

Once more the mistletoe branch had struck down the 
invulnerable. 


X 

One night towards morning Ingolf was awakened by 
the tramping of horses’ hoofs. He had begun to be 
anxious lest the serfs, who had been away the best part 
of a month, might have perished, and, springing out of 
bed, dressed quickly and threw a cloak over him. 

Yes, it was Vifel and Karle home at last. When he 
came out, they were standing outside in the half-light 
night and talking softly together. They had not yet 
taken the saddles off the horses. Their manner showed 
clearly that they were the bearers of evil tidings. Both 
turned their heads when Ingolf opened the door, but 
remained standing irresolute, and forgot to salute. 

Ingolf stood still for a moment. Then he went up to 
them, greeted them quietly, and bade Karle take the 
saddles off the horses and go and sleep. “ You had bet- 
ter not talk to any one,” Ingolf concluded, turning to 
Karle. Then he laid his hand on Vifel’ s shoulder and led 
him round behind the house. There they could best 
stand and talk undisturbed. Vifel was so silent that 
stillness seemed to envelop him like an invisible vapour 
in the air. 

When they had come to the back of the house, Ingolf 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 319 
let go of Vi f el’s shoulder and leaned against the wall of 
the house. His first heavy foreboding had quickly 
turned into a dawning certainty — a certainty which all 
but overpowered him. For a few interminable moments 
he remained standing there, leaning against the wall, 
and staring to the eastward, where* a faint flush on the 
steel-blue vault of the sky announced the coming of the 
sun. He avoided looking at Vifel, whose expression and 
behaviour so inexorably revealed what had happened. 
He shrank from having his last despairing hope anni- 
hilated. He must have an interval before he could en- 
dure to have his fears, his all but certain foreboding, 
confirmed by the pitiless word. 

The sun rose and was free of the clouds on the hori- 
zon before his mind had slowly reached the point that 
uncertainty was intolerable to him. 

He cast a glance at the serf. Vifel stood and wept, 
silent and motionless. The tears ran in streams over 
his cheeks, and left light streaks behind them. 

“ What have you to tell? ” Ingolf asked at last, 
with forced quietude. 

e< Hjor-Leif’s death,” stammered the serf, with chat- 
tering teeth. 

There was a long pause. Ingolf had bowed his head, 
and stood with closed eyes and compressed lips. He 
wept. 

At last, without raising his head or opening his eyes, 
he gave the serf a sign to continue. 

Vifel finished weeping and began stammeringly : 
“ When we came to the point we found the houses empty. 
We saw no one anywhere. We found the ship in its 


320 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

place down by the shore, but both boats had gone. We 
began to search the fields and the undergrowth round 
the point. First we found Hjor-Leif. He lay in a 
field near the house by the side of a piece of ploughed 
earth. He had been killed by a stab in the breast. We 
continued searching, and found gradually most of his 
men, scattered about in the undergrowth, all dead. 
Some of them had been obviously stabbed from behind, 
others had many wounds, which witnessed to a fight 
having taken place. The serfs and women we saw no- 
where.” 

“Hjor-Leif had a foreboding of that,” was the 
thought that passed through Ingolf’s mind when the 
serf was silent. 

Ingolf remained standing quite still. His heart 
hammered and beat, “ Leif ! Leif ! ” At last he lifted 
his head and looked round him with weary eyes. His 
look had become very desolate. Otherwise there was 
nothing to notice in him, now that there was no more 
doubt and the first strong burst of grief was over. 

In a quiet voice he questioned the serf more closely, 
and learned that he and Karle had buried those of Hjor- 
Leif’s men whom they had found. Hjor-Leif himself 
they had covered and left lying where they had found 
him. 

A strange slackness had come over Ingolf. Now and 
then he roused himself and put a question to the serf. 
Each time the serf had answered, there was again a 
long pause. 

Ingolf gradually got an account of their journey. 
Vifel told him of the difficult rivers, of the monks and 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 321 
their temple, and how he and Karle had caught and 
killed one of Hjor-Leif’s sheep, which they had found 
in the thicket, as food for their home journey. 

Helga was up this morning early as usual. She was 
generally out before any one else, especially when the 
weather was bright. It was in the early morning that 
she could best go out, unseen and undisturbed, to stand 
and gaze towards the distant mountains in the south- 
west which hid Hjor-Leif in their blue mist. 

This morning, as soon as she stepped out of the door, 
she heard quiet voices behind the house. She could not 
distinguish words, but only heard the sound. This half- 
heard conversation filled her at once with a peculiar fear, 
and when she recognized Vifel’s voice her heart beat 
violently. A vague alarm filled her breast and rose 
choking to her throat. For some time she remained 
standing and could not move from the spot — stood 
leaning heavily against the house-wall, and pressed her 
hand to her heart. Then the voices were suddenly 
silent. There was stillness behind the house. What 
could Ingolf and Vifel have to talk about in such a tone? 
Why had Ingolf not roused her at once? She knew 
how restlessly he was expecting the serf’s arrival. 

At last Helga dragged herself the few steps round 
the house. She both hoped and feared that she must 
have made a mistake — that it was not Vifel’s voice 
she had heard. But she must have certainty. Her 
fear was crushing her. 

Yes, there stood Vifel, and there stood Ingolf. 
Helga only needed to see them ; the first glance told her 
everything. Ingolf immediately saw his sister, and by a 


322 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
powerful effort succeeded in collecting himself and going 
quietly towards her. As he went, he said quietly to the 
serf : 44 Go and sleep, Vifel. You are a free man.” 

Vifel departed silently. He did not take the opportun- 
ity to thank Ingolf. His highest hope was at last and 
unexpectedly fulfilled, yet he wept as he went. 

When Ingolf had reached his sister he stood still in 
perplexity. There was in her look a mingling of prayer 
and certainty which made it impossible for him to say 
anything. There was a restlessness about Helga which 
made it impossible for her to stand still. 

44 Let us go,” she said appealingly. Side by side 
brother and sister went over the ground without speak- 
ing a word. 

Where the coppice wood began, they turned and went 
back towards the houses. So they continued walking to 
and fro, silently, side by side. The sun had risen, and 
already stood high. 

Ingolf’s men, who had learnt of Hjor-Leif’s death 
from Vifel, kept within doors. None wished to disturb 
Ingolf and Helga. Hallveig had been out and glanced 
towards the pair. Then she had slipped in again to 
her boy. Helga’s grief made her very heavy at heart. 

To and fro, keeping step, Ingolf and Helga went. 
Helga felt as if she could not stop. As long as she 
could walk so, keeping herself in movement, it seemed 
as if there was nothing which had ceased — ended. So 
long as she had heard nothing, perhaps nothing had 
happened. There were life and happiness at stake in 
continuing to walk — to walk, and not stand still. 

There was no sobbing in Helga’s breast. It was so 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 323 
empty within. A clammy pressure held her heart im- 
prisoned in apathy. There were no tears in her eyes. 
She was far past the narrow limits of weeping. Only 
a great and threatening stillness and emptiness in her 
soul, and round her a waste wilderness that would 
swallow her as soon as she stood still. 

At last she was so exhausted that she had to drag 
herself forward with the help of her brother’s arm. In- 
golf helped her, supported her, and held her up. He 
was in great distress. She walked there quivering on 
his arm, and he had no comfort to give her. Such 
heavy hours Ingolf had never experienced. He forgot 
his own sorrow : it was as nothing beside his sister’s mute 
despair. His whole soul was engrossed in her. His 
powerlessness, his complete perplexity, his lack of any 
word to comfort her, drove all other feelings out of his 
mind. 

At last Helga had to give up. Her strength was 
spent. Exhausted, she sank in his arms. He laid her 
carefully down, and she remained lying with half-closed 
eyes, breathing heavily and slowly ; then she fell asleep. 
Ingolf remained sitting by her side and gazing intently 
on her pale, tired face. She continued sighing in her 
sleep. Ingolf could not take his eyes from her. “ This 
was what Leif feared,” was the thought that echoed 
within him. There were not very many thoughts in 
his brain, stunned as it was by his own and his sister’s 
grief. 

When he had been sitting thus for some time, Hall- 
veig came out to him from the house with her boy on 
her arm. She could no longer endure the loneliness. 


324 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

She sat down silently by Ingolf’s side. Her eyes were 
circled with red rims, and there was a peculiar wry smile 
on her face, called forth by the struggle to keep her 
tears down. When she had sat a little and looked at 
the sleeping Helga, she could do no more ; she leant her 
head against her husband, hid her face, and wept. 

Little Thorsten prattled cheerfully, and struggled to 
get down to Helga. Ingolf had to begin to play with 
him in order to make him sit still. The child’s un- 
troubled chatter cut him to the heart. 

Helga slept but a short time. Suddenly she opened 
her eyes, rose abruptly, and looked about her in be- 
wilderment. 

“ What is this? Why am I lying here? ” she asked 
in an astonished voice. As soon as she spoke, she felt a 
choking in her throat, and remembered all of a sudden 
what had happened, and why she lay there. Then she 
collapsed with a groan, and remained sitting for a 
while with her face hidden in her hands. Then she 
straightened herself abruptly. 

“How did it happen?” she asked in a hoarse, un- 
controlled voice, and looked straight in front of her 
with a hard expression on her young face. And when 
Ingolf did not answer at once, she added in a still more 
unrestrained tone : “ Tell me at once ! ” 

Ingolf told her, hesitatingly and in disconnected 
words, that his serfs had found Hjor-Leif and his men 
dead. It looked as if Hjor-Leif ’s Irish serfs had killed 
them. 

“ But the women? ” Helga asked in the same tone as 
before. 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 325 

Ingolf gave it as his opinion that the serfs must have 
taken the women with them to whatever hiding they had 
sought. He added a few cautious words to the effect 
that he had grounds for supposing that Hjor-Leif al- 
ready a year ago had been afraid of what had now 
happened, and that therefore he had let her remain with 
him and Hallveig. 

Then Helga laughed, if the sound which issued from 
her throat could be called laughter. 

44 It is all the same now,” she said in a hard voice. 

Then she collected herself and stretched out her hand 
toward the child. For a while she sat stroking his hair 
and trying to smile at him. Then suddenly she gave 
Hallveig the boy and looked up at her brother with a 
look that revealed all her hopeless despair without dis- 
guise, and said : 46 1 want to see him. Can we not go 

there? ” 

Her voice was hoarse and passionate as before. 
There was nothing to recall her former soft and gentle 
tone, but the hardness was gone. 

44 We will go as soon as we can,” answered Ingolf 
quietly. 

Helga rose impatiently. She was a little unsteady on 
her legs, but declined all support both from her brother 
and her sister-in-law. 

44 Let us not waste time,” she said irritably, and 
stumbled towards the houses. 

Ingolf and Hallveig followed her in silence. Hallveig 
took the boy on her arm again. 

That same day the ship was launched. Day and 
night they worked with feverish haste to load it. The 


326 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

next day it lay ready for sea, and in the evening the 

weather was fair for sailing. 

Ingolf wondered a little at Helga. She did not weep. 
She did not seek solitude. She went about among them 
much as usual — did her accustomed work, took charge 
of the boy, and helped Hallveig. Only the change in 
her voice and her strange, fixed look betrayed her grief 
— a grief which made Ingolf fear, and troubled him 
more than any weeping and open despair. 


XI 

The next day at sunrise they were there. Helga was 
supported by her brother to shore on the slender land- 
ing-plank. When she stood on the shore before Hjor- 
Leif’s point and looked over towards the houses, her 
strength failed her for the second time. She could do 
no more. She leant against her brother to save herself 
from falling. He put his arm round her and led her to 
a stone where she could sit and recover her strength. 
There she sat down, and remained sitting, staring out 
over the sea, that lay resplendent in the glow of sunrise, 
but her eyes saw nothing. A light morning breeze 
played with her hair and gently caressed her pale face. 

Ingolf stood by her side, waiting. Since she so much 
wished to see Hjor-Leif he would not oppose it, but he 
wished to follow her and be near her. 

Helga had forgotten him, and why she sat there. 
For the moment she remembered nothing except that she 
was alone and had Hjor-Leif no more. There were 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 327 
times when this fact seemed incomprehensible. If Hjor- 
Leif was dead, why was she alive? She did not under- 
stand that. But so it was — she was alive. And die 
she could not. Death would not come to her, though 
she prayed for it to all imaginable Powers. 

When Ingolf had stood for a while motionless by her 
side, he bent down over her and said quietly that he must 
go for a little to give his men orders. Helga started 
when he spoke to her, and looked hastily up at him with 
a terrified look in her eyes. Then she came to herself, 
remembered why she sat here, why Ingolf stood waiting 
for her, and she seized his hand. She sat for a while 
holding it convulsively in hers and moaning softly. 
Then she said in that strange, distant voice which quite 
seemed to have displaced her own : 44 Ingolf — I cannot, 
after all — let me just sit. I cannot rise. Ah, I can 
do nothing,” she said, half-wailing, and hid her face in 
her hands. 

Ingolf stood a little irresolute ; then he bent over her 
and said softly : 44 1 will come again and fetch you.” 

She nodded impatiently with her bowed head, as if 
begging him only to go — to go ! 

As soon as she no longer heard his steps she began a 
low, heart-rending wail. Ah, she had no hope now. 
Her heart was dead. But she lived, and could not die. 

Ingolf went back to the ship, helped Hallveig and her 
boy on shore, and asked Hallveig to look to Helga 
while he went and buried Hjor-Leif. Then he told Vifel 
and several of his men to take spades and a bier and 
follow him. The others he set to work unloading the 
ship. 


328 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

Ingolf was quite composed now. The stamp of the 
resolute firmness, which was the real expression of his 
character, was more distinct than ever before. He had 
reconciled himself to his brother’s death as a healthy 
man reconciles himself to the inevitable. He had sought 
comfort in his faith, and had eradicated all despair 
from his mind, so that only a healthy, hardening, bene- 
ficial pain remained behind. He remembered the death- 
rune among the omens at the sacrificial feast; it had 
then pointed at Hjor-Leif. Yes, Fate shields a man 
till she strikes him — nothing can alter that. Against 
Fate even the bravest fight in vain. Not even Odin can 
shake the sentence of the Norns. 

Such were Ingolf’s thoughts as, with a composed 
mind, he went to carry out his last duty to his brother. 

There had been an old agreement between him and 
Hjor-Leif that, if Ingolf died first, Hjor-Leif should 
inter him in a funeral barrow with exact observation 
of all the ritual of the Ase-religion. In return, Ingolf 
had pledged himself, if he were the survivor, to bury 
Hjor-Leif in the ground without any kind of solemnity. 
All that Hj or-Leif wished, when he no longer lived, was 
to be buried in a dry spot, at the depth of a man’s 
stature, and to lie there with clean earth round him. 
It was no more than reasonable that he should have his 
will, though Ingolf in his inmost heart felt a strong 
impulse to inter him in a barrow and to do him all the 
honour which became a chieftain. 

The birds were singing in the dewy morning when the 
sailcloth with which Vifel had covered Hjor-Leif was 
lifted. Their song sounded all at once piercingly in 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 329 
Ingolf’s ears. He stood for a while and looked at his 
brother’s decomposed remains. He had seen many dead 
men, without being specially moved thereby. But now 
his self-control deserted him a moment. He wept. 
When he had grown calm again he made the sign of the 
Hammer over the body, and said softly, as though to 
himself : “ A mean fate here befell a good man, that a 

serf should cause his death, and so it will happen to each 
one who will not sacrifice to the gods.” 

Hjor-Leif’s corpse was laid on the bier, and Ingolf 
covered it with his cloak. Then he went on ahead up 
to the point to seek for a burying-place. Step by step 
the men carried his brother’s body after him. 

Ingolf quickly found a place towards the south and 
the sun. The grave was dug, and Hjor-Leif was low- 
ered into it, wrapped in his brother’s cloak. Then they 
cast clean earth over him, and trampled it well 
down. 

Ingolf remained standing by the grave till his men 
had gone. Then he spoke for the last time to his sworn 
brother. “Hjor-Leif,” he said with emotion and in 
a natural tone, as though he were quite sure of being 
heard, “ if no duty had bound me to life, I would have 
followed you in death. The days are poor without you, 
brother. But I comfort myself with the thought that 
we shall meet again in Valhalla, and that you by that 
time will have made your peace with the gods.” 

When Ingolf had spoken, he took a thunder-stone 
which hung on a chain round his neck, a gift from his 
mother, of whom he had an indistinct memory, pressed 
it deep down in the earth, and covered it up. Nothing 


33° THE SWORN BROTHERS 

in his eye was so sacred as this lucky stone. Therefore 
he gave it to his brother to take with him on the way. 

Ingolf found his sister where he had left her. She sat 
in the same attitude; not, once had she moved since he 
left her. Her wailing had died away. She sat silent. 
And when he laid his hand on her shoulder she did not 
start, only turned her head quietly, and looked up 
wearily at him. She tried to rise, but had become stiff 
from sitting in the same position. It was some time be- 
fore she could stand and walk. Ingolf led her gently 
over the shore, up the point, to Hjor-Leif’s grave. At 
the grave she remained standing motionless, clinging 
to his arm, and gazing down at the brown scar in the 
earth. For the first time since she had heard of Hjor- 
Leif’s death her eyes filled with tears. She loosed her 
hold of Ingolf’s arm and asked him impatiently to 
leave her. 

When Ingolf had gone, she threw herself on the 
grave, pressed her face down in the loose earth, and 
lay there weeping, silently and ceaselessly. Now she 
could weep. . . . 

Long after Helga had wept all power of weeping out 
of her soul she remained lying there, with her arms 
thrown out as though clinging to the earth. Then at 
last she fell asleep, worn out with sorrow and fatigue. 

When she woke again it was evening. She rose and 
looked around her in alarm, suddenly afraid lest any 
one should see her lying thus. As she stood there and 
looked around her, she perceived a black round patch 
on the greensward a little distance off. There had 
burnt the fire, which about a year ago she had sat 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 331 

gazing at from Ingolf’s point. . . . Ah, that red 
fire. ... . 

And now it was quenched . . . quenched for ever. 

Helga sat down, looking alternately at the grave 
and the burnt patch. Now and then her eyes filled with 
tears. But she could weep no more. 

Later in the evening Hallveig came silently and 
sat down by her side. They did not speak. Hallveig 
wept now and then. Helga sat motionless, gazing be- 
fore her with eyes that scorched and burned, but seeing 
nothing. 

The two women remained sitting there the whole 
night. When sunrise streaked the horizon next day 
they rose quietly and went silently homeward to the 
houses. 


XII 

Ingolf sent his men to search for the Irish serfs. 

As the boats were gone, there was reason to sup- 
pose that they had sought flight by sea. And as they 
knew Ingolf was in the east, it was likely they had 
rowed farther westward along the coast. 

Ingolf’s men searched the coast westward for many 
days’ journey. They saw nothing of the serfs any- 
where — not even a sign that they had landed. And 
even if they had been drowned, their bodies must have 
been cast ashore. Neither did they find the pillars of 
Ingolf ’s high-seat, which they were also looking for. 

When they returned home and told Ingolf that they 


332 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

had neither found the serfs nor the pillars, he said in 
his quiet way : “ The pillars shall be found and the serfs 

too, if I have to search the whole country.” Ingolf 
sent Vifel with fifteen men in a boat out to the islands, 
which from the mountains near the point were visible 
in the south-west. 

There Vifel found the Irish serfs. They were living 
in caves scattered about on the largest of the islands. 
When they found that they were discovered, panic 
seized them, and they did not even try to offer resist- 
ance. When they saw Ingolf’s men coming over the 
island they scattered in wild confusion. Some of them 
were cut down while flying; others, among whom was 
Duftak, flung themselves down from the cliffs and pro- 
montories and perished. 

The women, whom the serfs had taken with them 
out to the islands, and the most obstinate of whom were 
still kept bound, were able to tell how Hjor-Leif and 
their husbands had been murdered. They spoke coolly 
and calmly of the matter. They had forgotten how 
to weep and how to rejoice. 

Vifel buried the serfs on the edge of the shore, where 
the ground is dry at ebb and covered at full tide, as 
criminals should be buried. 

Then he searched each creek and promontory in 
vain. The pillars had not drifted to shore there. Af- 
terwards he distributed his men in three boats with the 
women and the valuables which the serfs had stolen and 
taken with them to the islands, among them Hjor-Leif ’s 
costly sword. Ever since then the islands have been 
called the Westman Islands after the Irish serfs 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 333 

Ingolf met the boats down on the shore. Vifel told 
him of the death of the serfs, recounted the women’s 
narrative of Hjor-Leif’s murder, and handed him the 
sword. 

Ingolf took it cautiously. He remembered the story 
about Hjor-Leif’s fight with the dead man, who was 
reported to have said that a charm attached to the 
sword whereby everyone who killed with it should him- 
self die by it. Ingolf had comforted himself with the 
thought that so long as Hjor-Leif had not killed any- 
one with the sword there was no danger for him from 
it. Now, however, Hjor-Leif had been slain by it. 
Perhaps the saying meant that whoever possessed that 
sword should perish by it. At any rate he would not 
have it. Sorcery was not to be trifled with. Ingolf 
went straight to Hjor-Leif’s grave with the sword 
and stuck it in the earth so that the golden handle 
projected from the black mould. It was the only thing 
left by his brother which he was unwilling to receive. 

There was no danger of anyone taking it there. His 
men kept at a distance from Hjor-Leif’s grave. They 
asserted that he walked again, and believed that Helga 
met the dead man when she went up there at night, 
as she often did. 

Ingolf did not share their superstition in that respect. 
But, on the other hand, he well understood how Helga’s 
appearance might give rise to such thoughts in his 
men. She looked more like a dead man’s bride than a 
young living woman. Her fair hair had become white, 
and hung dishevelled about her head. The light of her 
glance was quenched, and the skin that stretched over 


334 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

her wan, emaciated face was grey and without bright- 
ness or colour. The only signs of life she gave were 
eating and breathing. She carefully took charge of 
Thorsten, with a peculiar absent tenderness, since 
Hallveig had now a little girl to watch over. She did 
nothing else. 

That summer and the following winter Ingolf re- 
mained by Hjor-Leif’s point. The next spring he de- 
parted and went farther westward. He stopped at a 
river whose mouth formed a comparatively safe har- 
bour. Good landing-places were generally scarce on 
these shores. Thither he had his ships brought. Some 
way inland, west of the river, he built winter dwellings 
under a hill, which was named Ingolf’s Hill. In the 
summer, as always, he had his men out to search for the 
pillars. When they came back they were able to inform 
him that they had reached a great promontory. 
North of the mountains there was a broad fjord. 

In the winter, Ingolf sent Vifel and Karle to search 
the coast-line north of the hills. Out on a barren 
promontory in a creek, which because of some warm, 
denesly smoking springs in the neighbourhood received 
the name “ Rogvig ” (“ smoke-creek* ”), Vifel and Karle 
at last found the pillars. They had drifted ashore just 
below a little rounded height. On the height there sat 
an eagle. It did not move when Vifel and Karle ap- 
proached. It sat there still when they went away, after 
having secured the pillars. Vifel and Karle were much 
afraid of the eagle. Only once before had they been 
equally afraid — that was when the brazen voice from 
the monks’ house had cast them to the ground. Vifel 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 335 
and Karle went back and informed Ingolf of their find. 
Then Ingolf was glad. Now he knew where he should 
dwell. Now he caught a glimpse of meaning again in 
his life. He immediately arranged a great sacrificial 
feast, and made sacrifices to Odin and Thor and gave 
them thank-offerings. 

When he heard about the eagle he became thoughtful. 
Neither he nor anyone else believed that the eagle’s 
having sat there was accidental. There was in In- 
golf’s mind not the least doubt that the eagle had really 
been his old father, who, in a shape corresponding to his 
name, had been sent by Odin to guide and keep watch 
over the pillars. 

Never again was an eagle seen on that height, which 
received the name " Om’s Height.” 

As soon as spring came, and the roads were passable, 
Ingolf left Ingolf’s Hill and went over to Rogvig. 
The place where Ingolf’s pillars had drifted ashore was 
a large, bare promontory. The district was stony, and 
there was not much pasture-land. By far the greatest 
number of the parts he had traversed had been better 
and more suitable for settling. But here it was his 
lot to dwell. And, besides, he could take possession of 
as large a territory as he chose, and build houses for 
his people and cattle-sheds where he found fertile soil. 

Already that summer Ingolf began to mark out his 
lands. For himself and his posterity he took possession 
of the whole of the great promontory, from the river- 
mouth where his ships lay up along its curving course 
and across the hills to a fjord on the north side of the 
promontory, which was named Hvalfjord, between two 


336 THE SWORN BROTHERS 

rivers, which received the names of Brynjedal River 
and Okse River. 

Many of Ingolf’s men were dissatisfied at having to 
settle in this unfertile region. The serf Karle, in great 
vexation, ran away with a serf-woman. Ingolf found 
them long afterwards settled inland. 

Ingolf gave land to his freed serf, Vifel. He settled 
on Vifestofte, and Vifel’s Hill bears his name. He be- 
came a well-to-do man. The next summer Ingolf went 
to Norway to fetch timber for his houses. He built 
a residence at Rogvig, which was not at all inferior to 
the chief seat of the family at Dalsfjord in Norway. 
To the residence was attached a temple which in its 
size and splendid equipment did not fall far short of 
that at Gaulum. Ingolf was faithful to his gods and 
showed them great honour. Since they had given him a 
new place of abode he felt confidently assured that he 
had regained their favour. 

Ingolf, who daily had his sister Helga before his 
eyes, was often reminded of his sworn brother, Hjor- 
Leif. Now he understood much which he had not un- 
derstood before, and caught a sight of the connection 
between events, which taken separately seemed acci- 
dental. He remembered the beggar’s words : “ Point 
and blade! ” Now he understood what the beggar had 
meant. It was owing to Hjor-Leif’s prompting that 
they had journeyed to Iceland. Hjor-Leif was really 
the first occupant, even though he had not come to 
settle there permanently. Fate, the blind and immov- 
able, had been out after him prematurely. Ingolf’s 
heart was moved when he remembered how Hjor-Leif 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 337 

had grown fond of this land from the first. It was 
accordingly Hjor-Leif whom Iceland had first taken 
in its embrace. Hjor-Leif was the first who had 
consecrated the soil of the new land with flesh and 
blood. Had the gods, or perhaps the guardian spirits 
of the country, claimed him as a sacrifice? It was at 
any rate a great sacrifice. But Ingolf did not dare to 
find fault with the gods. Already the year after In- 
golf had settled in Rogvig people began to flock 
to the country. They were for the most part Nor- 
wegian chieftains who could not come to terms with 
King Harald. Ingolf gave several of the settlers land 
in his territory. 

Among the first settlers was Hallveig’s brother, Lopt, 
who was called Lopt the Old, and many of his family, 
which was a good and noble one. 

Haasten, Atle Jarl’s son, was also among the first 
occupants. He had at last been obliged to leave his 
own lands and property and flee the country to save 
his life. He took some land, guided by his high-seat 
pillars, due east of the river which bordered Ingolf’s 
territory. Haasten lost his ship when landing, but 
his property and men were saved. 

The very next winter he visited Ingolf in Rogvig. On 
the evening of Haasten’s coming, Ingolf sat as usual 
in the high-seat with his men at the table round him, a 
step lower. The fire burned cheerfully on the hearth- 
stones and spread a genial and penetrating glow. The 
coarsely carved images of the gods on the strongly 
illumined age-browned pillars of the high-seat laughed 
broadly in the glaring light. The talk was lively 


338 THE SWORN BROTHERS 
around the tables, and the beer- jugs were diligently 
emptied and filled. Ingolf was not grudging of beer 
to his men. He sat with a contented look in his peace- 
ful blue eyes and listened to their talk. He himself 
spoke but seldom, except when questioned. 

Then suddenly there came three knocks at the door. 
All the talking round the tables ceased. Ingolf turned 
his head and gave a signal to the man at the door. The 
bolt was pushed to one side, and in stepped a tall, erect, 
fair-bearded man in a red silk cloak with a golden hel- 
met on his head, followed by three other men. 

Ingolf immediately recognized Haasten, in spite of 
his beard and the ageing and weary expression of his 
thin face. He sprang up and went to meet him. He 
was too much moved to speak. For a while the two 
former friends stood silent, pressing each other’s hands 
and looking each other straight in the eyes. Then they 
fell into each other’s arms. When, shortly after, they 
sat side by side in the high-seat and had drunk to each 
other, Ingolf said : “ I did not know, Haasten, that 

you were on this road.” 

Haasten smiled his weary, steady smile, and an- 
swered: “ Yes, King Harald has driven me from the 
country, as I in my time drove you two brothers. Have 
you forgiven me that, Ingolf P ” 

“ I have never been angered with you for it,” Ingolf 
answered. 

They spoke together of many things, and their talk 
was light and untroubled. There was in Haasten’s 
attitude towards Ingolf the same deference that all 
other chieftains who came there showed the quiet, con- 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 339 

fident, simple, taciturn man, who by his example had 
drawn all the others to this new land. Ingolf was 
indeed his friend, and as such he showed him confidence, 
but he was also the first settler in the land, and as such 
he evinced for him a great and undisguised deference. 

They talked of Hjor-Leif. “ It happened as I fore- 
told,” said Haasten, and smiled sadly. “ The mistle- 
toe branch at last struck the invulnerable.” 

“We all owe Odin a death,” said Ingolf quietly, and 
drew a deep sigh. “ It is most often the survivors 
whose lot is the hardest.” 

His look involuntarily sought the women’s dais. 
There sat Helga, gazing before her without expression 
in her eyes, with his son, Thorsten, in her lap. 

Ingolf pointed out the boy to Haasten. “ His name 
is built of Thor’s name and yours,” he said in a gentler 
voice. While Ingolf talked, he noticed how attentively 
his son’s quiet blue eyes dwelt on the high-seat pillars. 
Thus he had himself sat as a boy, he remembered sud- 
denly. And now he met his son’s look. Were Thor- 
sten’s thoughts something like his had been when he was 
a child? 

Haasteri had been sitting in silence, watching the boy. 
Then he said suddenly : “ He must have been born 

soon after that winter.” 

“ The winter after,” Ingolf answered, a little curtly. 

“ He bears Thor’s name and mine,” Haasten con- 
tinued thoughtfully. “ May that bring him good 
luck ! ” 

He was silent a short time. Then he asked : “ But 

who is the woman? ” 


THE SWORN BROTHERS 


340 

“ My sister, Helga,” answered Ingolf quietly. The 
two friends sat silent a long time. 

Then Haasten beckoned to the boy, and when he 
came he took him between his knees, and looked closely 
at him. “ You have honest, intelligent eyes ; you will be 
a brave man,” he said at last, and stroked his fair hair. 
Then he took a heavy gold ring off his arm and gave it 
to Thorsten. 

“ That is because you are in some part my name- 
sake,” he explained, smiling at the boy, who stood with 
the ring in his hand, staring alternately at gift and giver. 
Thorsten tried the ring on his slender arm. 66 It is 
too large,” he declared, a little offended. Then he sud- 
denly brightened up. “ But it will fit me well enough 
by the time father is dead, and I sit in the high-seat.” 

Both Ingolf and Haasten laughed. Thorsten went 
to show Helga and his mother the ring. Then silence 
came over the two friends. Shortly after, Ingolf pro- 
posed that they should drink to their dead brother. 
The friends’ glances met over the rim of the drinking- 
horns. There were tears in their eyes. 

They sat late that night and drank and talked to- 
gether. They were very happy to sit side by side again. 
The solitude which had threatened to imprison each 
severally was suddenly banished. Now they had each 
other again, and felt the joy of friendship. 

The fire burned yellow and brightly on the hearth- 
stones. In its genial warm light the images of the 
gods on the carved pillars looked down as if following 
all that passed with slow content, and waiting, calmly 
wise, for what should come. 


THE END 


* 
















ifta 
































































































% 







































9 


















:■ v , 
























































































































* ‘ 






























































































































































































♦ 






















































































































































































































































































